Nfpa 1851

Copyright 2019 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA®).
Licensed by agreement to Jimmy Sumbera FOR INDIVIDUAL USE ONLY and downloaded on 11/08/2019. No reproduction or transmission in any form permitted
without written permission of NFPA®. For inquiries or access for multiple users, or to report unauthorized use, contact [email protected].
NFPA
®
1851
Standard on
Selection, Care, and U S E
O N L Y
A L
Maintenance of Protective U
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE}
Ensembles for Structural I D
Fire Fighting and Proximity I V
D
Fire Fighting IN
R
2020
O
F Customer ID
29799537
See ALERT
®
Copyright 2019 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA®). Licensed by agreement to Jimmy Sumbera FOR INDIVIDUAL USE ONLY and downloaded on 11/08/2019. No reproduction or transmission in any form permitted
IMPORTANT NOTICES AND DISCLAIMERS CONCERNING NFPA® STANDARDS
NFPA® codes, standards, recommended practices, and guides (“NFPA Standards”), of which the document
contained herein is one, are developed through a consensus standards development process approved by
the American National Standards Institute. This process brings together volunteers representing varied
viewpoints and interests to achieve consensus on fire and other safety issues. While the NFPA administers
the process and establishes rules to promote fairness in the development of consensus, it does not
independently test, evaluate, or verify the accuracy of any information or the soundness of any judgments
contained in NFPA Standards.
The NFPA disclaims liability for any personal injury, property, or other damages of any nature
whatsoever, whether special, indirect, consequential or compensatory, directly or indirectly resulting from
the publication, use of, or reliance on NFPA Standards. The NFPA also makes no guaranty or warranty as
to the accuracy or completeness of any information published herein.
In issuing and making NFPA Standards available, the NFPA is not undertaking to render professional or
other services for or on behalf of any person or entity. Nor is the NFPA undertaking to perform any duty
owed by any person or entity to someone else. Anyone using this document should rely on his or her own
L Y
independent judgment or, as appropriate, seek the advice of a competent professional in determining the
exercise of reasonable care in any given circumstances.
The NFPA has no power, nor does it undertake, to police or enforce compliance with the contents of
NFPA Standards. Nor does the NFPA list, certify, test, or inspect products, designs, or installations for O N
compliance with this document. Any certification or other statement of compliance with the requirements
of this document shall not be attributable to the NFPA and is solely the responsibility of the certifier or
maker of the statement.
S E
REVISION SYMBOLS IDENTIFYING CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS EDITION
L U
U A
Text revisions are shaded. A Δ before a section number indicates that words within that section were
deleted and a Δ to the left of a table or figure number indicates a revision to an existing table or figure.
When a chapter was heavily revised, the entire chapter is marked throughout with the Δ symbol. Where
I D
one or more sections were deleted, a • is placed between the remaining sections. Chapters, annexes,
sections, figures, and tables that are new are indicated with an N .
I V
Note that these indicators are a guide. Rearrangement of sections may not be captured in the markup,
but users can view complete revision details in the First and Second Draft Reports located in the archived
D
revision information section of each code at www.nfpa.org/docinfo. Any subsequent changes from the
NFPA Technical Meeting, Tentative Interim Amendments, and Errata are also located there.
IN
O R See ALERT
F ALERT: THIS STANDARD HAS BEEN MODIFIED BY A TIA OR ERRATA

Users of NFPA codes, standards, recommended practices, and guides (“NFPA Standards”) should
be aware that NFPA Standards may be amended from time to time through the issuance of a Tentative
Interim Amendment (TIA) or corrected by Errata. An official NFPA Standard at any point in time consists
of the current edition of the document together with any TIAs and Errata then in effect.
To determine whether an NFPA Standard has been amended through the issuance of TIAs or corrected
by Errata, go to www.nfpa.org/docinfo to choose from the list of NFPA Standards or use the search feature
to select the NFPA Standard number (e.g., NFPA 13). The document information page provides up-to-
date document-specific information as well as postings of all existing TIAs and Errata. It also includes the
option to register for an “Alert” feature to receive an automatic email notification when new updates and
other information are posted regarding the document.
ISBN: 978-145592354-0 (PDF)

®
ADDITIONAL IMPORTANT NOTICES AND DISCLAIMERS CONCERNING NFPA STANDARDS
Updating of NFPA Standards

Users of NFPA codes, standards, recommended practices, and guides (“NFPA Standards”) should be aware that these
documents may be superseded at any time by the issuance of a new edition, may be amended with the issuance of Tentative
Interim Amendments (TIAs), or be corrected by Errata. It is intended that through regular revisions and amendments,
participants in the NFPA standards development process consider the then-current and available information on incidents,
materials, technologies, innovations, and methods as these develop over time and that NFPA Standards reflect this
consideration. Therefore, any previous edition of this document no longer represents the current NFPA Standard on the
subject matter addressed. NFPA encourages the use of the most current edition of any NFPA Standard [as it may be amended
by TIA(s) or Errata] to take advantage of current experience and understanding. An official NFPA Standard at any point in
time consists of the current edition of the document, including any issued TIAs and Errata then in effect.
To determine whether an NFPA Standard has been amended through the issuance of TIAs or corrected by Errata, visit the
“Codes & Standards” section at www.nfpa.org.
Interpretations of NFPA Standards
A statement, written or oral, that is not processed in accordance with Section 6 of the Regulations Governing the
Development of NFPA Standards shall not be considered the official position of NFPA or any of its Committees and shall not
L Y
be considered to be, nor be relied upon as, a Formal Interpretation.
Patents
The NFPA does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights referenced in, related to, or asserted in
connection with an NFPA Standard. The users of NFPA Standards bear the sole responsibility for determining the validity of O N
of any patent resulting from the use of or reliance on NFPA Standards.
NFPA adheres to the policy of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) regarding the inclusion of patents in
S E
any such patent rights, as well as the risk of infringement of such rights, and the NFPA disclaims liability for the infringement
U
American National Standards (“the ANSI Patent Policy”), and hereby gives the following notice pursuant to that policy:
NOTICE: The user’s attention is called to the possibility that compliance with an NFPA Standard may require use of an
L
invention covered by patent rights. NFPA takes no position as to the validity of any such patent rights or as to whether such
A
patent rights constitute or include essential patent claims under the ANSI Patent Policy. If, in connection with the ANSI Patent
Policy, a patent holder has filed a statement of willingness to grant licenses under these rights on reasonable and
U
nondiscriminatory terms and conditions to applicants desiring to obtain such a license, copies of such filed statements can be
obtained, on request, from NFPA. For further information, contact the NFPA at the address listed below.
Law and Regulations
I D
Users of NFPA Standards should consult applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations. NFPA does not, by the
I V
publication of its codes, standards, recommended practices, and guides, intend to urge action that is not in compliance with
applicable laws, and these documents may not be construed as doing so.
Copyrights
D
IN
NFPA Standards are copyrighted. They are made available for a wide variety of both public and private uses. These include
both use, by reference, in laws and regulations, and use in private self-regulation, standardization, and the promotion of safe
practices and methods. By making these documents available for use and adoption by public authorities and private users, the
NFPA does not waive any rights in copyright to these documents.
O R
Use of NFPA Standards for regulatory purposes should be accomplished through adoption by reference. The term
“adoption by reference” means the citing of title, edition, and publishing information only. Any deletions, additions, and
changes desired by the adopting authority should be noted separately in the adopting instrument. In order to assist NFPA in
Ffollowing the uses made of its documents, adopting authorities are requested to notify the NFPA (Attention: Secretary,
Standards Council) in writing of such use. For technical assistance and questions concerning adoption of NFPA Standards,
contact NFPA at the address below.
For Further Information
All questions or other communications relating to NFPA Standards and all requests for information on NFPA procedures
governing its codes and standards development process, including information on the procedures for requesting Formal
Interpretations, for proposing Tentative Interim Amendments, and for proposing revisions to NFPA standards during regular
revision cycles, should be sent to NFPA headquarters, addressed to the attention of the Secretary, Standards Council, NFPA, 1
Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101, Quincy, MA 02269-9101; email: [email protected].
For more information about NFPA, visit the NFPA website at www.nfpa.org. All NFPA codes and standards can be viewed at
no cost at www.nfpa.org/docinfo.
1851-1
Copyright © 2019 National Fire Protection Association®. All Rights Reserved.
NFPA® 1851
Standard on
Selection, Care, and Maintenance of Protective Ensembles for Structural

Fire Fighting and Proximity Fire Fighting
2020 Edition
This edition of NFPA 1851, Standard on Selection, Care, and Maintenance of Protective Ensembles for
Structural Fire Fighting and Proximity Fire Fighting, was prepared by the Technical Committee on
L Y
Structural and Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Clothing and Equipment, released by the
Correlating Committee on Fire and Emergency Services Protective Clothing and Equipment, and
acted on by NFPA at its June Association Technical Meeting held June 17–20, 2019, in San Antonio,
TX. It was issued by the Standards Council on August 5, 2019, with an effective date of August 25,
2019, and supersedes all previous editions. O N
This document has been amended by one or more Tentative Interim Amendments (TIAs) and/or
Errata. See “Codes & Standards” at www.nfpa.org for more information.
S E
Origin and Development of NFPA 1851
L U
This edition of NFPA 1851 was approved as an American National Standard on August 25, 2019.
The first edition of NFPA 1851, published in 2001, was titled Standard on the Selection, Care, and
U A
Maintenance of Structural Fire Fighting Protective Ensembles. The standard was developed to be a
companion document for NFPA 1971, then titled Standard on Protective Ensembles for Structural Fire
Fighting, which has been in effect since 1975 and specifies product design, performance, testing, and
certification.
I D
NFPA 1851 is written for the organizations that evaluate the risks their emergency responders face
and their particular needs for protective clothing, that develop purchase specifications, and that
I V
purchase structural fire-fighting protective ensembles and ensemble elements. It is also written for
end users of structural fire-fighting protective ensembles and ensemble elements to be able to
D
inspect, maintain, and care for the protective ensembles and ensemble elements they use during
structural fire-fighting operations.
IN
The overall protection and safety of fire-fighting personnel depend not only on adequate
protective clothing but equally on the organization’s policies, training, and administration of the
correct use of the proper protective ensembles and ensemble elements in fire-fighting situations. To
O R satisfy the portion of the organization’s overall protective clothing and equipment program that
addresses structural fire-fighting protective ensembles and ensemble elements, this document
provides criteria for the selection, care, and maintenance of protective ensembles and ensemble
elements.
F In this standard, the requirements for several areas are written to begin with the person who
actually uses the protective ensemble or ensemble element being constantly aware of its condition
and need for cleaning, repair, or more in-depth inspection. Users can perform the simple actions to
improve the condition of the protective ensemble or ensemble element. The more involved actions
of advanced inspection, evaluation, cleaning, decontamination, and repair are handled by the
organization’s designated staff trained and authorized to perform such duties. In other areas, the
requirements are written for the organization to perform the administrative functions of the
structural fire-fighting protective ensemble program and to perform periodic actions to evaluate the
program to ensure it is achieving its goals and that the quality of the protective ensembles and
ensemble elements provides optimum safety to fire fighters.
The 2008 edition of NFPA 1851 was a complete revision of the first edition. Because NFPA 1976,
Standard on Protective Ensemble for Proximity Fire Fighting, was incorporated into the 2007 edition of
NFPA 1971, Standard on Protective Ensembles for Structural Fire Fighting and Proximity Fire Fighting, under
NFPA and National Fire Protection Association are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Massachusetts 02169.
1851-2 SCAM OF PROTECTIVE ENSEMBLES FOR STRUCTURAL FIRE FIGHTING AND PROXIMITY FIRE FIGHTING
the Technical Committee on Structural and Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Clothing and Equipment, this edition of NFPA
1851 was expanded to include both structural fire-fighting ensembles and proximity fire-fighting ensembles.
The 2008 edition followed the new standards format according to the Manual of Style for NFPA Technical Committee Documents.
New requirements in Chapter 11 for organizations and ISPs and for verification of the ISPs by independent, third-party
certification organizations set the criteria for organizations and ISPs to perform the tasks of inspection, cleaning, and repairing
of protective ensembles and ensemble elements. New requirements for testing methods for trained personnel in the
organization as well as the ISPs set the criteria to determine functionality and protection afforded by ensembles and ensemble
elements.
Chapter 10 was revised, requiring retirement of structural fire-fighting ensembles and ensemble elements and proximity
fire-fighting ensembles and ensemble elements not later than 10 years from the date the ensembles or ensemble elements were
manufactured. The radiant reflective outer shell of proximity fire-fighting ensembles and ensemble elements were required to
be replaced a maximum of 5 years from the date the ensembles or ensemble elements were manufactured. More frequent
replacement of fire-fighting ensembles and ensemble elements was required to better ensure that fire fighters had state-of-the-
art protection from fire-fighting environments. The significant changes that technology underwent within two editions of this
standard (approximately 10 years), in addition to the normal “wear and tear” of fire-fighting and additional emergency
L Y
incident responses, training, and other factors, dictated that protective ensembles and ensemble elements be replaced. Fire
departments that responded to a higher-than average number of emergency incidents or that had frequent or extensive
“working fire” operations were encouraged to plan for replacement of ensembles or ensemble elements on a more frequent
cycle.
O N
The 2014 edition of NFPA 1851 was another complete revision and featured many editorial changes as well as new
S E
definitions for manufacturer trained organization, verified organization, and verified independent service provider (ISP). A new table was
added to Chapter 4 that specified the responsibilities for garment inspection, cleaning, and repair. Inspection for delamination
and label integrity and legibility was added to Chapter 6. Changes were made to the cleaning and decontamination procedures
U
in Chapter 7, and requirements in Chapter 8 for the repair of ensembles and ensemble elements were revised. There were also
several changes to Chapter 11 that affected verification of organizations and ISPs, and two new tables were added that
addressed advanced inspection and advanced cleaning evaluations.
L
U A
The 2020 edition has seen major changes to the cleaning requirements in Chapter 4 and Chapter 7 and further changes to
supporting definitions. In Chapter 4, the table of responsibilities for garment element inspection, cleaning, and repair has
been redone to reflect six different groups that could potentially have one of those responsibilities with accompanying
clarifications concerning how that responsibility is accomplished. In Chapter 7, each major heading has been rewritten in light
I D
of new technologies and information gleaned from research and testing. Two new decision trees have been added for
handling, disposition, and cleaning of ensembles and ensemble elements to assist in determining the appropriate cleaning
procedure(s). These changes have also led to a definition and associated annex material for the term preliminary exposure
reduction to replace on-scene preliminary cleaning.
I V
For the 2020 edition, the technical committee has strengthened the annex material associated with the Chapter 10
D
retirement requirements by expanding on existing language and explaining the work that was done that led to the
development of retirement criteria in the standard. The technical committee has also added a paragraph concerning
IN
carcinogens and performance testing.
O R
F
2020 Edition
COMMITTEE PERSONNEL 1851-3
Correlating Committee on Fire and Emergency Services Protective Clothing and Equipment
William E. Haskell, III, Chair
National Institute for Occupational Safety & Health, MA [E]
Jason L. Allen, Intertek Testing Services, NY [RT] Benjamin Mauti, Globe Manufacturing/Mine Safety Appliances
James B. Area, Chimera Enterprises International, MD [SE] Company, PA [M]
Joseph Arrington, San Antonio Fire Department, TX [U] Michael F. McKenna, Michael McKenna & Associates, LLC, CA [SE]
Roger L. Barker, North Carolina State University, NC [SE] Douglas Menard, Boston Fire Department, MA [U]
James E. Brinkley, International Association of Fire Fighters, NY [L] John H. Morris, 3M Company, GA [M]
Rep. International Association of Fire Fighters Jack E. Reall, Columbus (OH) Division of Fire, OH [L]
Steven D. Corrado, UL LLC, NC [RT] Rep. Columbus Firefighters Union
Edmund Farley, Pittsburgh Bureau Of Fire, PA [E] Jeffrey O. Stull, International Personnel Protection, Inc., TX [M]
Patricia A. Gleason, ASTM/Safety Equipment Institute (SEI), VA
[RT]
David V. Haston, U.S. Department of Agriculture, ID [E]
Robert D. Tutterow, Jr., Fire Industry Education Resource
Organization (FIERO), NC [U]
Rep. NFPA Fire Service Section
L Y
N
William A. Van Lent, Veridian Ltd., Inc., IA [M]
Diane B. Hess, PBI Performance Products, Inc., NC [M]
Rep. Fire & Emergency Manufacturers & Services Association
Thomas M. Hosea, U.S. Department of the Navy, FL [RT]
Bruce H. Varner, BHVarner & Associates, AZ [M]
Beth C. Lancaster, U.S. Department of Defense, VA [E]
Jeff Legendre, Northborough Fire Department, MA [U]
O
Rep. International Fire Service Training Association
Steven H. Weinstein, Honeywell Safety Products, CA [M]
E
Karen E. Lehtonen, LION Group, Inc., OH [M] Richard Weise, Los Angeles County Fire Department/Safer, CA [U]
David G. Matthews, Fire & Industrial (PPE) Ltd., United Kingdom Harry P. Winer, HIP Consulting LLC, MA [SE]
S
[SE]
Rep. International Standards Organization
Louis Carpentier, Innotex Inc., Canada [M]

(Alt. to William A. Van Lent)
Alternates
L U
Stephen R. Sanders, ASTM/Safety Equipment Institute (SEI), VA
[RT]
A
Robin B. Childs, U.S. Department of Defense, VA [E] (Alt. to Patricia A. Gleason)
(Alt. to Beth C. Lancaster) Russell Shephard, Australasian Fire & Emergency Service
U
Patricia A. Freeman, Globe Manufacturing Company, LLC/Mine Authorities Council, Australia [SE]
Safety Appliances Company (MSA), NH [M] (Alt. to David G. Matthews)
D
(Alt. to Benjamin Mauti) David P. Stoddard, Michael McKenna & Associates, LLC, CA [SE]
I
Kenneth Hayes, Boston Fire Department, MA [U] (Alt. to Michael F. McKenna)
(Alt. to Douglas Menard) Grace G. Stull, International Personnel Protection, Inc., TX [M]
(Alt. to Jason L. Allen)

Judge W. Morgan, 3M Scott Safety, NC [M] V
Pamela A. Kavalesky, Intertek Testing Services, NY [RT]
I
(Alt. to Jeffrey O. Stull)
Rick L. Swan, IAFF Local 2881/CDF Fire Fighters, VA [L]
(Alt. to James E. Brinkley)
(Alt. to John H. Morris)
Gary L. Neilson, Sparks, NV [U]
D Jonathan V. Szalajda, National Institute for Occupational Safety &
Health, PA [E]
IN
(Alt. to Robert D. Tutterow, Jr.) (Alt. to William E. Haskell, III)
Amanda H. Newsom, UL LLC, NC [RT] Donald B. Thompson, North Carolina State University, NC [SE]
(Alt. to Steven D. Corrado) (Alt. to Roger L. Barker)
R
Anthony Petrilli, U.S. Department of Agriculture, MT [E] W. Jason Traynor, MSA Safety, PA [M]
(Alt. to David V. Haston) (Voting Alt.)
O
Kevin M. Roche, Facets Consulting, AZ [M] Jian Xiang, The DuPont Company, Inc., VA [M]
(Alt. to Bruce H. Varner) (Alt. to Diane B. Hess)
F Robert J. Athanas, FDNY/SAFE-IR, Incorporated, NY [U]

Rep. TC on Electronic Safety Equipment
Christina M. Baxter, Emergency Response Tips, LLC, VA [U]
Nonvoting
Brian Montgomery, U.S. Department of Justice, DC [E]
Rep. Tactical and Technical Operations Respiratory Protection
Equipment
Rep. TC on Hazardous Materials PC&E Daniel N. Rossos, Oregon Department of Public Safety Standards &
George Broyles, U.S. Forest Service, ID Training, OR [E]
Rep. TC on Wildland Fire Fighting PC&E Rep. TC on Respiratory Protection Equipment
Tricia L. Hock, ASTM/Safety Equipment Institute (SEI), VA [RT] Tim W. Tomlinson, Addison Fire Department, TX [C]
Rep. TC on Emergency Medical Services PC&E
Jeremy Metz, West Metro Fire Rescue, CO [U]
Rep. TC on Special Operations PC&E
2020 Edition
Chris Farrell, NFPA Staff Liaison
This list represents the membership at the time the Committee was balloted on the final text of this edition.
Since that time, changes in the membership may have occurred. A key to classifications is found at the
back of the document.
NOTE: Membership on a committee shall not in and of itself constitute an endorsement of

the Association or any document developed by the committee on which the member serves.
Committee Scope: This committee shall have primary responsibility for documents on the
design, performance, testing, and certification of protective clothing and protective
equipment manufactured for fire and emergency services organizations and personnel, to
protect against exposures encountered during emergency incident operations. This
committee shall also have the primary responsibility for documents on the selection, care,
and maintenance of such protective clothing and protective equipment by fire and
emergency services organizations and personnel.
L Y
O N
S E
L U
U A
I D
I V
D
IN
O R
F
2020 Edition
COMMITTEE PERSONNEL 1851-5
Technical Committee on Structural and Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Clothing and Equipment
Tim W. Tomlinson, Chair
Addison Fire Department, TX [C]
Marni L. Schmid, Secretary (Alternate)

Fortunes Collide Marketing LLC, MI [U]
Rep. Fire Industry Education Resource Organization
(Alt. to Robert D. Tutterow, Jr.)
Jason L. Allen, Intertek Testing Services, NY [RT] Steve L. Lakey, Northwest Safety Clean Inc., OR [IM]
George E. Berger, U.S. Marine Corps Installations Command, DC Rep. Verified Independent Services Providers Association
[C] Karen E. Lehtonen, Lion Group, Inc., OH [M]
Steven D. Corrado, UL LLC, NC [RT] Michael F. McKenna, Michael McKenna & Associates, LLC, CA [SE]
Paul F. Curtis, L.N. Curtis & Sons, CA [IM]
Anthoney Shawn Deaton, NC State University, NC [SE]
Tim Durby, Prescott Fire Department, AZ [U]
Gene Necklaus, Scottsboro Fire Department, AL [E]
Rep. International Association of Fire Chiefs
Louis V. Ott, Gentex Corporation, PA [M]
L Y
David P. Fanning, E. D. Bullard Company, KY [M]
Jonathan Fesik, Fire Industry Repair Maintenance Inc., Canada
[IM]
William A. Fithian, ASTM/Safety Equipment Institute (SEI), VA
Tom Ragan, Shelby Specialty Gloves, TN [M]
Jim Reidy, San Antonio Fire Department, TX [L]
O
Rep. Texas State Association of Fire Fighters
N
Damian L. Owens, Charlotte Fire Department, NC [U]
E
[RT] R. Wendell Robison, Fillmore, UT [C]
Patricia A. Freeman, Globe Manufacturing Company, LLC/Mine Rep. National Volunteer Fire Council
S
Safety Appliances Company (MSA), NH [M] Jeffrey O. Stull, International Personnel Protection, Inc., TX [M]
Tom Hamma, Heartland Fire & Rescue, CA [U] Robert D. Tutterow, Jr., Fire Industry Education Resource
U
Allen Ira Harkness, U.S. Department of the Navy, FL [RT] Organization (FIERO), NC [U]
Rep. Fire Industry Education Resource Organization
William E. Haskell, III, National Institute for Occupational Safety &
James A. Walter, Honeywell First Responder Products, OH [M]
L
Health, MA [E]
Rep. National Institute for Occupational Safety & Health Richard Weise, Los Angeles County Fire Department/Safer, CA [U]
A
Earl Hayden, El Paso, TX [L] Rep. Southern Area Fire Equipment Research
Rep. International Association of Fire Fighters Harry P. Winer, HIP Consulting LLC, MA [SE]
U
John M. Karban, FireDex, LLC, OH [M] Patrick J. Woods, Fire Department City of New York, NY [U]
Kim Klaren, Fairfax County Fire & Rescue Department, VA [U] Rep. Fire Department City of New York
I D Alternates
V
Roger L. Barker, North Carolina State University, NC [SE] Rickey Johnson, Jr., Addison Fire Department, TX [C]
I
(Alt. to Anthoney Shawn Deaton) (Alt. to Tim W. Tomlinson)
Daniel Buford, Bryan Fire Department, TX [L] Amanda H. Newsom, UL LLC, NC [RT]
D
(Alt. to Jim Reidy) (Alt. to Steven D. Corrado)
Thomas A. Clark, Minnesota Professional Fire Fighters, MN [L] Brett O'Mara, U.S. Marine Corps, AZ [C]
IN
(Alt. to Earl Hayden) (Alt. to George E. Berger)
Nicholas J. Curtis, Liberty Township, OH [SE] Andrew R. Oliver, Gear Wash LLC, WI [IM]
(Alt. to Michael F. McKenna) (Alt. to Jonathan Fesik)
Tyler J. Dennison, L.N. Curtis And Sons, UT [IM] John F. Rihn, Globe Manufacturing/Mine Safety Appliances
O R
(Alt. to Paul F. Curtis)
William Matthew Ernst, E.D. Bullard Company, KY [M]
(Alt. to David P. Fanning)
Christopher George Eysser, New York City Fire Department, NY [U]
Company, PA [M]
(Alt. to Patricia A. Freeman)
Kimberly Schoppa, Fairfax County Fire And Rescue, VA [U]
(Alt. to Kim Klaren)
F (Alt. to Patrick J. Woods)

Richard O. Granger, Jr., Charlotte Fire Department, NC [U]
(Alt. to Damian L. Owens)
Alysha L. Gray, Lion Group, Inc., OH [M]
(Alt. to Karen E. Lehtonen)
Daniel Silvestri, 911 Safety Equipment LLC, PA [IM]
(Alt. to Steve L. Lakey)
Douglas Sloan, Honeywell First Responder Products, NY [M]
(Alt. to James A. Walter)
Grace G. Stull, International Personnel Protection, Inc., TX [M]
Robert Green, USDOD Naval Base Guam, Guam [E] (Alt. to Jeffrey O. Stull)
(Alt. to Gene Necklaus) Jay L. Tarley, National Institute for Occupational Safety & Health,
Benjamin Hanna, Intertek, NY [RT] WV [E]
(Alt. to Jason L. Allen) (Alt. to William E. Haskell, III)
Todd Herring, Fire-Dex, OH [M] Daniel J. Theriault, U.S. Department of the Navy, FL [RT]
(Alt. to John M. Karban) (Alt. to Allen Ira Harkness)
Tricia L. Hock, ASTM/Safety Equipment Institute (SEI), VA [RT] Christopher R. Vaughan, Cuba Fire Department, AL [C]
(Alt. to William A. Fithian) (Alt. to R. Wendell Robison)
2020 Edition
Nonvoting
William R. Hamilton, U.S. Department of Labor, DC [E] Andrew Levinson, U.S. Department of Labor, DC [E]
Rep. Occupational Safety & Health Administration
Chris Farrell, NFPA Staff Liaison
This list represents the membership at the time the Committee was balloted on the final text of this edition.
Since that time, changes in the membership may have occurred. A key to classifications is found at the
back of the document.
NOTE: Membership on a committee shall not in and of itself constitute an endorsement of

the Association or any document developed by the committee on which the member serves.
Committee Scope: This committee shall have primary responsibility for documents on
protective ensembles, except respiratory protection, that provides head, limb, hand, foot,
torso, and interface protection for fire fighters and other emergency services responders
during incidents involving structural fire fighting operations or proximity fire fighting
operations.
L Y
Structural fire fighting operations include the activities of rescue, fire suppression, and
property conservation during incidents involving fires in buildings, enclosed structures,
vehicles, marine vessels, or like properties.
O N
E
Proximity fire fighting operations include the activities of rescue, fire suppression, and
property conservation during incidents involving commercial and military aircraft fires, bulk
S
flammable gas fires, bulk flammable and combustible liquids fires, combustible metal fires,
exotic fuel fires, and other such fires that produce very high levels of radiant heat as well as
convective and conductive heat.
L U
Additionally, this committee shall have primary responsibility for documents on the
selection, care, and maintenance of structural and proximity fire fighting protective
ensembles by fire and emergency services organizations and personnel.
U A
I D
I V
D
IN
O R
F
2020 Edition
CONTENTS 1851-7
Contents
Chapter 1 Administration ......................................... 1851– 8 8.4 Additional Requirements for Advanced

1.1 Scope. ................................................................ 1851– 8 Garment Element Repair. ................................ 1851– 30
1.2 Purpose. ............................................................ 1851– 8 8.5 Helmet Element Repair. .................................. 1851– 30
1.3 Application. ...................................................... 1851– 8 8.6 Glove Element Repair. ..................................... 1851– 31
1.4 Units. ................................................................. 1851– 9 8.7 Footwear Element Repair. ............................... 1851– 31
8.8 Structural Fire Fighting Hood and Proximity
Chapter 2 Referenced Publications ......................... 1851– 9 Fire Fighting Helmet Overcover and
2.1 General. ............................................................ 1851– 9 Proximity Fire Fighting Shroud Repair. ......... 1851– 31
2.2 NFPA Publications. ........................................... 1851– 9 8.9 Additional Requirements for Structural Fire
2.3 Other Publications. .......................................... 1851– 9 Fighting Ensembles and Proximity Fire
2.4 References for Extracts in Mandatory Fighting Ensembles with Optional Liquid
Y
Sections. (Reserved) ........................................ 1851– 9 and Particulate Contaminant Protection. ...... 1851– 31
Chapter
3.1
3.2
3.3
3 Definitions ...............................................
General. ............................................................
NFPA Official Definitions. ...............................
General Definitions. .........................................
1851– 9
1851– 9
1851– 9
1851– 10
Chapter 9
9.1
Storage .....................................................
All Ensembles and Ensemble Elements. .........
Chapter 10 Retirement, Disposition, and Special

N L1851– 31
1851– 31
O
Incident Procedure ................................. 1851– 31
Chapter 4 Program ................................................... 1851– 13 10.1 Retirement. ....................................................... 1851– 31
4.1 General. ............................................................ 1851– 13 10.2 Disposition of Retired Elements. .................... 1851– 32
E
4.2 Program Organization for Structural Fire 10.3 Special Incident Procedure. ............................ 1851– 32
Fighting Ensembles and Ensemble Elements
S
and Proximity Fire Fighting Ensembles and Chapter 11 Verification ............................................... 1851– 32
Ensemble Elements. ......................................... 1851– 14 11.1 General. ............................................................ 1851– 32
U
4.3 Records. ............................................................ 1851– 15 11.2 Verification Program. ....................................... 1851– 33
4.4 Manufacturer’s Instructions. ........................... 1851– 16 11.3 Inspection and Testing. ................................... 1851– 34
4.5 Protecting the Public and Personnel from 11.4 Organization or ISP Quality Management
4.6
Exposure to Contaminated PPE. .....................
Reporting Personal Protective Equipment
Health and Safety Concerns. ...........................
1851– 16
A
1851– 16 L Program. ...........................................................
Chapter 12 Test Procedures .......................................

12.1 Light Evaluation of Hood Particulate-
1851– 37
1851– 38
Chapter 5
5.1
Selection ...................................................
Selection and Purchase. ...................................
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U
1851– 16
1851– 16
Blocking Layers. ...............................................
12.2 Smoke Evaluation of Hood Particulate-
Blocking Layers. ...............................................
1851– 38
1851– 39
Chapter
6.1
6.2
6
V
Routine Inspection. .........................................I
Inspection ................................................
General. ............................................................
1851– 17
1851– 17
1851– 17
12.3 Water Penetration Barrier Evaluation. ...........
12.4 Chemical Decontamination Efficacy Test. ......
12.5 Biological Decontamination Efficacy Test. .....
1851– 41
1851– 42
1851– 44
6.3
6.4
Chapter 7
D I
Advanced Inspection. ......................................
Complete Liner Inspection. ............................
Cleaning and Decontamination ..............

1851– 19
1851– 20
1851– 21
12.6 Semi-Volatile Organic Compound Contained
Specimen Preparation, Extraction, and
Analysis. ............................................................
12.7 Heavy Metal Contaminated Specimen
1851– 46
IN
7.1 General. ............................................................ 1851– 21
Preparation, Extraction, and Analysis. ............ 1851– 47
7.2 Preliminary Exposure Reduction. ................... 1851– 24
12.8 Bacterial Contaminated Specimen
7.3 Advanced Cleaning. ......................................... 1851– 24
Preparation, Extraction, and Analysis. ............ 1851– 49
7.4 Disinfection or Sanitization and Biological
R
12.9 Preparation and Handling of Contaminated
Decontamination. ............................................ 1851– 27
Specimens and Surrogate Clothing. ............... 1851– 50
7.5 Specialized Cleaning. ....................................... 1851– 28
F 8.1
8.2
O
Chapter 8 Repair .......................................................
Requirements for All Ensembles and
Ensemble Elements. .........................................
Requirements for Both Basic and Advanced
Garment Element Repair. ................................
1851– 29
1851– 29
1851– 29
Annex A
Annex B
Index
Explanatory Material ...............................
Informational References .......................
..................................................................
1851– 63
1851– 103
1851– 106
8.3 Additional Requirements for Basic Garment

Element Repair. ................................................ 1851– 30
2020 Edition
NFPA 1851 1.1.4 This standard shall also specify the minimum selection,
care, and maintenance requirements for structural fire fighting
Standard on protective ensembles with optional liquid and particulate
contaminant protection and for proximity fire fighting protec‐
Selection, Care, and Maintenance of Protective tive ensembles with optional liquid and particulate contami‐
nant protection.
Ensembles for Structural Fire Fighting and
1.1.5 This standard shall not specify requirements for other
Proximity Fire Fighting organizational programs such as appropriate use of structural
fire fighting or proximity fire fighting protective ensembles for
2020 Edition training, for operations, or for infection control, because these
programs are under the jurisdiction of other NFPA standards.
IMPORTANT NOTE: This NFPA document is made available for
Δ 1.1.6 This standard shall not apply to protective ensembles or
Y
use subject to important notices and legal disclaimers. These notices
protective clothing that are compliant with NFPA 1951,
and disclaimers appear in all publications containing this document
L
NFPA 1977, NFPA 1991, NFPA 1992, NFPA 1994, and
and may be found under the heading “Important Notices and
NFPA 1999.
Disclaimers Concerning NFPA Standards.” They can also be viewed
at www.nfpa.org/disclaimers or obtained on request from NFPA.
UPDATES, ALERTS, AND FUTURE EDITIONS: New editions of
NFPA codes, standards, recommended practices, and guides (i.e.,
NFPA Standards) are released on scheduled revision cycles. This
O N
1.1.7 This standard shall not be construed as addressing all
the safety concerns associated with the use of compliant protec‐
tive ensembles or ensemble elements. It shall be the responsi‐
bility of the persons and organizations that use compliant
E
edition may be superseded by a later one, or it may be amended protective ensembles or ensemble elements to establish safety
outside of its scheduled revision cycle through the issuance of Tenta‐ and health practices and to determine the applicability of regu‐
S
tive Interim Amendments (TIAs). An official NFPA Standard at any latory limitations prior to use.
point in time consists of the current edition of the document, together
1.1.8 This standard shall not be construed as addressing all
U
with all TIAs and Errata in effect. To verify that this document is the
current edition or to determine if it has been amended by TIAs or the safety concerns, if any, associated with the use of this stand‐
Errata, please consult the National Fire Codes® Subscription Service ard by testing or repair facilities. It shall be the responsibility of
or the “List of NFPA Codes & Standards” at www.nfpa.org/docinfo.
In addition to TIAs and Errata, the document information pages also
include the option to sign up for alerts for individual documents and
A L
the persons and organizations that use this standard to conduct
testing of protective ensembles or ensemble elements to estab‐
lish safety and health practices and to determine the applicabil‐
ity of regulatory limitations prior to using this standard for any
U
to be involved in the development of the next edition.
NOTICE: An asterisk (*) following the number or letter designing, manufacturing, and testing.
D
designating a paragraph indicates that explanatory material on 1.1.9 Nothing herein shall restrict any jurisdiction from
the paragraph can be found in Annex A.
A reference in brackets [ ] following a section or paragraph
indicates material that has been extracted from another NFPA
V I exceeding these minimum requirements.

1.2 Purpose.
D I
document. Extracted text may be edited for consistency and
style and may include the revision of internal paragraph refer‐
ences and other references as appropriate. Requests for inter‐
pretations or revisions of extracted text shall be sent to the
1.2.1 The purpose of this standard shall be to establish a
program for structural fire fighting protective ensembles and
ensemble elements and for proximity fire fighting protective
IN
ensembles and ensemble elements to reduce the safety risks
technical committee responsible for the source document. and potential health risks associated with poorly maintained,
Information on referenced and extracted publications can contaminated, or damaged protective ensembles and ensemble
be found in Chapter 2 and Annex B. elements.
1.1 Scope.
O R Chapter 1 Administration
1.2.2 The purpose of this standard shall also be to establish
basic criteria for selection, inspection, cleaning, decontamina‐
tion, repair, storage, and retirement of structural fire fighting
F
Δ 1.1.1 This standard shall specify the minimum selection, care,
and maintenance requirements for structural fire fighting
protective ensembles and the individual ensemble elements
that include garments, helmets, gloves, footwear, and interface
protective ensembles or ensemble elements and proximity fire
fighting protective ensembles or ensemble elements.
1.3 Application.
Δ 1.3.1 This standard shall apply to structural fire fighting and
components that are compliant with NFPA 1971. proximity fire fighting ensembles and ensemble elements certi‐
fied as compliant with NFPA 1971.
Δ 1.1.2 This standard shall also specify the minimum selection,
care, and maintenance requirements for proximity fire fighting Δ 1.3.2 This standard shall also apply to structural fire fighting
protective ensembles and the individual ensemble elements ensembles and ensemble elements and proximity fire fighting
that include garments, helmets, gloves, footwear, and interface ensembles and ensemble elements certified as compliant with
components that are compliant with NFPA 1971. the previous editions of NFPA 1971.
Δ 1.1.3 This standard shall also specify requirements for both 1.3.2.1 This standard shall also apply to structural fire fighting
structural fire fighting and proximity fire fighting protective protective ensembles with optional liquid and particulate
ensembles, ensemble elements, clothing, and equipment certi‐ contaminant protection and to proximity fire fighting protec‐
fied as compliant with previous editions of NFPA 1971.
2020 Edition Shaded text = Revisions. Δ = Text deletions and figure/table revisions. • = Section deletions. N = New material.
DEFINITIONS 1851-9
tive ensembles with optional liquid and particulate contami‐ N 2.3.2 ASTM Publications. ASTM International, 100 Barr
nant protection. Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA
19428-2959.
1.3.3 This standard shall not apply to other organizational
programs such as appropriate use of structural fire fighting or ASTM D2261, Standard Test Method for Tearing Strength of
proximity fire fighting protective ensembles for training, opera‐ Fabrics by the Tongue (Single Rip) Procedure (Constant-Rate-of-
tions, or infection control, because these programs are under Extension Tensile Testing Machine), 2013, reapproved 2017e1.
the jurisdiction of other NFPA standards.
ASTM D5034, Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and
1.3.4 This standard shall not apply to respiratory protective Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test), 2017.
equipment other than where such equipment interfaces with
structural fire fighting protective ensembles or proximity fire ASTM E2274, Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Laundry
fighting protective ensembles with the optional liquid and Sanitizers and Disinfectants, 2016.
particulate contaminant protection. ASTM E2406, Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Laundry
1.3.5 The requirements of this standard shall not apply to
accessories attached to any element of the structural fire fight‐
ing protective ensemble unless specifically addressed herein.
tions, 2016.
Δ 2.3.3 ISO Publications. International Organization for Stand‐
L Y
Sanitizers and Disinfectants for Use in High Efficiency Washing Opera‐
1.4 Units.
1.4.1 In this standard, values for measurement are followed by
an equivalent in parentheses, but only the first stated value
O N
ardization, ISO Central Secretariat, BIBC II, Chemin de Blan‐
donnet 8, CP 401, 1214 Vernier, Geneva, Switzerland.
ISO 17011, Conformity assessment — General requirements for
accreditation bodies accrediting conformity assessment bodies, 2004.
E
shall be regarded as the requirement.
1.4.2 Equivalent values in parentheses shall not be considered ISO/IEC 17025, General requirements for the competence of testing
as the requirement because these values are approximate.
Chapter 2 Referenced Publications

U S
and calibration laboratories, 2005.
ISO/IEC 17065, Conformity assessment — Requirements for bodies
certifying products, processes and services, 2012.
2.1 General. The documents or portions thereof listed in this

chapter are referenced within this standard and shall be
considered part of the requirements of this document.
A L
2.3.4 U.S. Government Publications. U.S. Government
Publishing Office, 732 North Capitol Street, NW, Washington,
DC 20401-0001.
Δ 2.2 NFPA Publications. National Fire Protection Association,

1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471.
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1910.1030,
“Bloodborne Pathogens.”
Δ 2.3.5 Other Publications.
V I
NFPA 600, Standard on Facility Fire Brigades, 2015 edition.
NFPA 1500™, Standard on Fire Department Occupational Safety, Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, 11th edition, Merriam-
I
Health, and Wellness Program, 2018 edition. Webster, Inc., Springfield, MA, 2003.
NFPA 1951, Standard on Protective Ensembles for Technical Rescue •
Δ 2.4 References for Extracts in Mandatory Sections. (Reserved)
Incidents, 2013 edition.
D
NFPA 1971, Standard on Protective Ensembles for Structural Fire
IN
Fighting and Proximity Fire Fighting, 2018 edition. Chapter 3 Definitions
NFPA 1977, Standard on Protective Clothing and Equipment for
Wildland Fire Fighting, 2016 edition. 3.1 General. The definitions contained in this chapter shall
apply to the terms used in this standard. Where terms are not
R
NFPA 1991, Standard on Vapor-Protective Ensembles for Hazard‐
ous Materials Emergencies and CBRN Terrorism Incidents, 2016 defined in this chapter or within another chapter, they shall be
defined using their ordinarily accepted meanings within the
O
edition.
context in which they are used. Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate
NFPA 1992, Standard on Liquid Splash–Protective Ensembles and
Dictionary, 11th edition, shall be the source for the ordinarily
F Clothing for Hazardous Materials Emergencies, 2018 edition.

NFPA 1994, Standard on Protective Ensembles for First Responders
to Hazardous Materials Emergencies and CBRN Terrorism Incidents,
2018 edition.
NFPA 1999, Standard on Protective Clothing and Ensembles for
accepted meaning.
3.2 NFPA Official Definitions.
3.2.1* Approved. Acceptable to the authority having jurisdic‐
tion.
Emergency Medical Operations, 2018 edition.
3.2.2* Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). An organization,
2.3 Other Publications.
office, or individual responsible for enforcing the requirements
N 2.3.1 AATCC Publications. American Association of Textile of a code or standard, or for approving equipment, materials,
Chemists and Colorists, P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle an installation, or a procedure.
Park, NC 27709.
3.2.3 Labeled. Equipment or materials to which has been
AATCC 135, Dimensional Changes of Fabrics after Home Launder‐ attached a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of an organ‐
ing, 2004. ization that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction
and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains peri‐
AATCC 198, Horizontal Wicking of Textiles, 2013. odic inspection of production of labeled equipment or materi‐
als, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates
Shaded text = Revisions. Δ = Text deletions and figure/table revisions. • = Section deletions. N = New material. 2020 Edition
compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a 3.3.9 Certification/Certified. A system whereby a certification
specified manner. organization determines that a manufacturer has demonstrated
the ability to produce a product that complies with the require‐
3.2.4* Listed. Equipment, materials, or services included in a ments of a specific standard(s), authorizes the manufacturer to
list published by an organization that is acceptable to the use a label on listed products that comply with the require‐
authority having jurisdiction and concerned with evaluation of ments of that standard(s), and establishes a follow-up program
products or services, that maintains periodic inspection of conducted by the certification organization as a check on the
production of listed equipment or materials or periodic evalua‐ methods the manufacturer uses to determine continued
tion of services, and whose listing states that either the equip‐ compliance of labeled and listed products with the require‐
ment, material, or service meets appropriate designated ments of that standard(s).
standards or has been tested and found suitable for a specified
purpose. 3.3.10 Char. The formation of a brittle residue when material
is exposed to thermal energy.
3.2.5 Shall. Indicates a mandatory requirement.
3.2.6 Should. Indicates a recommendation or that which is
advised but not required.
3.3.11 Chemical Terrorism Agents. Liquid, solid, gaseous,
and vapor chemical warfare agents and toxic industrial chemi‐
cals used to inflict lethal or incapacitating casualties, generally
L Y
N
3.2.7 Standard. An NFPA Standard, the main text of which on a civilian population as a result of a terrorist attack.
contains only mandatory provisions using the word “shall” to 3.3.12* Cleaning. The act of removing soiling and contamina‐
O
indicate requirements and that is in a form generally suitable tion from ensembles and ensemble elements by mechanical,
for mandatory reference by another standard or code or for chemical, thermal, or combined processes.
adoption into law. Nonmandatory provisions are not to be
considered a part of the requirements of a standard and shall
be located in an appendix, annex, footnote, informational
note, or other means as permitted in the NFPA Manuals of
Style. When used in a generic sense, such as in the phrase •
combustion.
S E
3.3.12.1* Advanced Cleaning. The act of removing both soil‐
ing and contamination generally associated with products of
“standards development process” or “standards development

activities,” the term “standards” includes all NFPA Standards,
including Codes, Standards, Recommended Practices, and
Guides.
L U
3.3.12.2* Specialized Cleaning. The act of removing hazard‐
ous materials, soiling associated with body fluids, or other
forms of contamination.
N 3.3.13* Cleaning Facility. An entity, location, or site engaged
3.3 General Definitions.
3.3.1 Accessory/Accessories. An item, or items, that could be
attached to a certified product but that are not necessary for
U A in the cleaning of ensemble elements that includes an element
manufacturer verified in cleaning, a verified cleaner, a verified
organization, or a verified ISP.
the certified product to meet the requirements of the standard.
3.3.2 Advanced Cleaning. See 3.3.12.1, Advanced Cleaning.
I D 3.3.14 Coat. See 3.3.94, Structural Fire Fighting Protective
Coat, and 3.3.71, Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Coat.
I
3.3.3 Biological Terrorism Agents. Liquid or particulate
V
agents that can consist of a biologically derived toxin or patho‐
Δ 3.3.15* Contamination. The accumulation of products of
combustion and other hazardous materials on or in an ensem‐
ble element that includes carcinogenic, toxic, corrosive, or
D
gen to inflict lethal or incapacitating casualties. allergy-causing chemicals, body fluids, infectious microorgan‐
isms, or CBRN terrorism agents.
IN
3.3.4 Body Fluids. Fluids that are produced by the body,
including, but not limited to, blood, semen, mucus, feces, 3.3.16 Coverall. See 3.3.95, Structural Fire Fighting Protective
urine, vaginal secretions, breast milk, amniotic fluids, cerebro‐ Coverall, and 3.3.72, Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Cover‐
spinal fluid, synovial fluid, and pericardial fluid. all.
O R
3.3.5* Carcinogen/Carcinogenic. A cancer-causing substance
that is identified in one of several published lists, including, but
not limited to, those prepared by the U.S. National Toxicology
3.3.17 Craze. The appearance of fine cracks in the surface of
a helmet shell or other smooth surface of an ensemble
element.
F
Program, the International Agency for Research on Cancer
(IARC), the National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH), and the American Conference of Govern‐
mental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH).
3.3.18 Cross-Contamination. The transfer of contamination
from one item to another or to the environment.
3.3.19 Crown. The portion of the helmet that covers the head
above the reference plane.
3.3.6 Care. Cleaning and storage of protective clothing and
equipment. 3.3.20 Crown Straps. The part of the helmet suspension that
3.3.7 CBRN. An abbreviation for chemicals, biological agents, passes over the head.
and radiological particulate hazards. (See also 3.3.8, CBRN Δ 3.3.21* Decontamination. The act of removing contamina‐
Terrorism Agents.) tion from or neutralizing contamination in protective clothing
• and equipment. (See also 3.3.12, Cleaning.)
3.3.8* CBRN Terrorism Agents. Chemicals, biological agents,
and radiological particulates that could be released as the 3.3.22* Disinfectant. A type of antimicrobial agent that
result of a terrorist attack. (See also 3.3.3, Biological Terrorism destroys or irreversibly inactivates fungi and bacteria, but not
Agents; 3.3.11, Chemical Terrorism Agents; 3.3.81, Radiological necessarily their spores, on inanimate surfaces and objects.
Particulate Terrorism Agents; and 3.3.109, Toxic Industrial Chemi‐
cals.)
DEFINITIONS 1851-11
3.3.23* Drag Rescue Device. A component integrated within 3.3.43* Goggles. Ensemble element or component that
the protective coat element to aid in the rescue of an incapaci‐ provides limited protection to the wearer’s eyes. Goggles might
tated fire fighter. or might not provide primary protection.
3.3.24 DRD. See 3.3.23, Drag Rescue Device. N 3.3.44* Gross Decontamination. A term used in the hazard‐
ous materials response industry to indicate the partial removal
3.3.25 Ear Covers. An interface component of the protective of exterior contamination from protective clothing, usually by
helmet element that provides limited protection to the rinsing with water, sometimes with detergent, to allow for the
helmet/coat interface area. safe exit of the responder from the protective clothing in the
3.3.26 Elasticity. The ability of a material to return to its origi‐ contamination reduction zone of an emergency incident. (See
nal form after being stretched. 3.3.66, Preliminary Exposure Reduction.)
3.3.27 Elements. See 3.3.32, Ensemble Elements. 3.3.45 Hardware. Nonfabric components of the protective
clothing and equipment including, but not limited to, those
3.3.28 Embrittlement. The hardening of a material that
makes it susceptible to easy fracture.
3.3.29* Emergency Medical Operations. Delivery of emer‐
made of metal or plastic.
3.3.46* Hazardous Materials. Substances (solid, liquid, or
gas) that when released are capable of creating harm to
L Y
gency patient care, including patient transportation, provided
prior to arrival at a hospital or other health care facility.
3.3.30 Energy Absorbing System. Materials or systems used to
attenuate impact energy.
people, the environment, and property.
O N
3.3.47 Hazardous Materials Emergencies. Incidents involving
the release or potential release of hazardous materials.
E
3.3.48 Helmet. See 3.3.101, Structural Fire Fighting Protec‐
Δ 3.3.31 Ensemble. See 3.3.96, Structural Fire Fighting Protec‐ tive Helmet, and 3.3.78, Proximity Fire Fighting Protective
S
tive Ensemble, and 3.3.73, Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Helmet.
Ensemble.
3.3.49 Hood. See 3.3.103, Structural Fire Fighting Protective
3.3.32* Ensemble Elements. The compliant products that
provide protection to the upper and lower torso, arms, legs,
head, hands, and feet. U
Particulate-Blocking Hood, and 3.3.102, Structural Fire Fight‐
ing Protective Hood.
L
3.3.50 Independent Service Provider (ISP). An independent
3.3.33 Faceshield. The component of the helmet that
provides limited protection to a portion of the wearer’s face.
Not primary eye protection.
3.3.34 Field Evaluation. The nonlaboratory assessment of an
U A third party utilized by an organization to perform advanced
cleaning, advanced inspection, and repair services. In order to
comply with NFPA 1851, an ISP must be verified. [See also
3.3.115, Verified Independent Service Provider (ISP)].
ensemble, ensemble element, or item.
I
3.3.35 Fit. The quality, state, and manner in which clothing D 3.3.51 Inherent Flame Resistance. Flame resistance that is
derived from the essential characteristics of the fiber or poly‐
I
and equipment, when worn, relate to the human body.
3.3.36* Flame Resistance (Protective Clothing and Equip‐ V mer.
3.3.52 Integrity. The ability of an ensemble or ensemble
D
ment). The property of a material whereby combustion is
prevented, terminated, or inhibited following the application
element to remain intact and provide continued minimum
performance.
IN
of a flaming or nonflaming source of ignition, with or without 3.3.53 Interface Area. An area of the body where the protec‐
subsequent removal of the ignition source. (See also 3.3.51, tive garments, helmet, gloves, footwear, or SCBA facepiece
Inherent Flame Resistance.) meet. Interface areas include, but are not limited to, the coat/
R
3.3.37 Footwear. See 3.3.98, Structural Fire Fighting Protec‐
tive Footwear, and 3.3.75, Proximity Fire Fighting Protective
O
Footwear.
helmet/SCBA facepiece area, the coat/trouser area, the coat/
glove area, and the trouser/footwear area.
3.3.54* Interface Component(s). Any material, part, or subas‐
F 3.3.38 Functional. The ability of an ensemble element or sembly used in the construction of the compliant product that
component of an ensemble element to continue to be utilized provides limited protection to interface areas.
for its intended purpose. 3.3.55 Liner System. The moisture barrier and thermal
3.3.39 Garment. See 3.3.99, Structural Fire Fighting Protec‐ barrier components as used in a garment.
tive Garments, and 3.3.76, Proximity Fire Fighting Protective 3.3.56 Maintenance. The inspection, service, and repair of
Garments. protective clothing and equipment, including the determina‐
3.3.40 Gauntlet. An interface component of the protective tion for removal from service.
glove element that provides limited protection to the coat/ 3.3.57 Major A Seam. See 3.3.84.1, Major A Seam.
glove interface area.
3.3.58 Major B Seam. See 3.3.84.2, Major B Seam.
3.3.41 Glove. See 3.3.100, Structural Fire Fighting Protective
Glove, and 3.3.77, Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Glove. 3.3.59 Manufacturer. The entity that directs and controls any
of the following: compliant product design, compliant product
3.3.42 Glove Wristlet. See 3.3.119, Wristlet. manufacturing, or compliant product quality assurance; or the
entity that assumes the liability for the compliant product or
provides the warranty for the compliant product.
3.3.60 Manufacturer-Trained Organization. See 3.3.64.1, also certified as an entire ensemble to meet the optional
Manufacturer-Trained Organization. requirements for protection from liquid and particulate
contaminants.
3.3.61 Melt. A response to heat by a material resulting in
evidence of flowing or dripping. 3.3.75 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Footwear. The
element of the protective ensemble that provides protection to
3.3.62 Minor Seam. See 3.3.84.3, Minor Seam. the foot, ankle, and lower leg.
3.3.63 Moisture Barrier. The component of an ensemble 3.3.76 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Garments. The coat,
element or item that principally prevents the transfer of trouser, and coverall elements of the protective ensemble.
liquids.
3.3.77 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Glove. The element
3.3.64* Organization. The entity that provides the direct of the protective ensemble that provides protection to the
management and supervision for the emergency services hand and wrist.
personnel.
3.3.64.1 Manufacturer-Trained Organization. A non-verified
organization trained by an element manufacturer of the
same element type to conduct any one or a combination of
3.3.78 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Helmet. The
the head.
L Y
Δ
advanced cleaning, advanced inspection, and basic repair
on the organization’s elements.
3.3.64.2 Verified Organization. An organization verified by a
third-party certification organization to conduct advanced
helmet/coat interface area.
O
3.3.80 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Trouser. The
N
3.3.79 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Shroud. The compo‐
nent of the helmet that provides limited protection to the
cleaning, advanced inspection and sanitization, basic repair,

and advanced repair on any organization’s elements.
3.3.65 Outer Shell. The outermost component of an ensem‐
S E
the lower torso and legs, excluding the ankles and feet.
3.3.81* Radiological Particulate Terrorism Agents. Particles
ble element or item, not including trim, hardware, reinforcing
material, pockets, wristlet material, accessories, fittings, or
suspension systems.
L U
that emit ionizing radiation in excess of normal background
levels, used to inflict lethal or incapacitating casualties, gener‐
ally on a civilian population as a result of terrorist attack.
A
N 3.3.66* Preliminary Exposure Reduction. Techniques for 3.3.82 Retirement. The process of permanently removing an
reducing soiling and contamination levels on the exterior of ensemble element from emergency operations service in the
U
the ensemble or ensemble element following incident opera‐ organization.
tions. •
N 3.3.83* Sanitizer. A type of antimicrobial agent that is used to
N 3.3.67* Products of Combustion. The end product when
fuels, such as hydrocarbons and materials, remain after the
I D reduce, but not necessarily eliminate, microorganisms from the
inanimate environment to levels considered safe as determined
V
process of combustion in a fire. by public health codes or regulations.
I
3.3.68 Protective Clothing. See 3.3.96, Structural Fire Fight‐
ing Protective Ensemble, and 3.3.73, Proximity Fire Fighting
Protective Ensemble.
D
3.3.84 Seam. Any permanent attachment of two or more
materials in a line formed by joining the separate material
pieces.
IN
3.3.69 Protective Ensemble. See 3.3.96, Structural Fire Fight‐ 3.3.84.1* Major A Seam. Outermost layer seam assemblies
ing Protective Ensemble, and 3.3.73, Proximity Fire Fighting where rupture could reduce the protection of the garment
Protective Ensemble. by exposing the garment’s inner layers.
O R
3.3.70 Proximity Fire Fighting. Specialized fire fighting opera‐
tions that can include the activities of rescue, fire suppression,
and property conservation at incidents involving fires produc‐
ing high levels of radiant heat as well as conductive and convec‐
3.3.84.2* Major B Seam. Inner layer seam assemblies where
rupture could reduce the protection of the garment by
exposing the next layer of the garment, the wearer’s
station/work uniform, other clothing, or skin.
F
tive heat.
3.3.71 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Coat. The element
of the protective ensemble that provides protection to the
upper torso and arms, excluding the hands and head.
3.3.84.3 Minor Seam. Remaining seam assemblies that are
not classified as Major A or Major B seams.
3.3.85 Selection. The process of determining what protective
clothing and equipment (PCE) is necessary for protection of
3.3.72 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Coverall. The fire and emergency services response personnel from an antici‐
element of the protective ensemble that provides protection to pated specific hazard or other activity, the procurement of the
the torso, arms, and legs, excluding the head, hands, and feet. appropriate PCE, and the choice of the proper PCE for a
specific hazard or activity at an emergency incident.
3.3.73* Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble. Multi‐
ple elements of compliant protective clothing and equipment 3.3.86 Separate/Separation. A material response evidenced
that when worn together provide protection from some risks, by splitting or delaminating.
but not all risks, of emergency incident operations.
3.3.87 Service Life. The period for which compliant product
3.3.74 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble with can be useful before retirement.
Optional Liquid and Particulate Contamination Protection. A
compliant proximity fire fighting protective ensemble that is
PROGRAM 1851-13
3.3.88 Shank. The component of footwear that provides addi‐ 3.3.105 Suspension. The energy attenuating system of the
tional support to the instep. helmet that is made up of the headband and crown strap.
3.3.89 Shroud. See 3.3.79, Proximity Fire Fighting Protective 3.3.106 Tensile Strength. The force at which a fiber or fabric
Shroud. will break when pulled in one dimension.
Δ 3.3.90* Soiling. The accumulation of sweat, dust, dirt, debris, 3.3.107 Textile Fabric. A planar structure consisting of yarns
and other nonhazardous materials on or in an ensemble or or fibers.
ensemble element that could degrade its performance or cause
hygiene issues. 3.3.108 Thermal Barrier. The component of an ensemble
element or item that principally provides thermal protection.
3.3.91 Specialized Cleaning. See 3.3.12.2, Specialized Clean‐
ing. 3.3.109 Toxic Industrial Chemicals. Highly toxic solid, liquid,
or gaseous chemicals that have been identified as mass casualty
3.3.92 Stress Area. Those areas of the garment that are threats that could be used to inflict casualties, generally on a
subjected to more wear, including, but not limited to, crotches,
knees, elbows, and shoulders.
3.3.93 Structural Fire Fighting. The activities of rescue, fire
civilian population, during a terrorist attack.
3.3.110 Trim. See 3.3.117, Visibility Markings.
L Y
suppression, and property conservation in buildings, enclosed
structures, vehicles, marine vessels, or like properties that are
involved in a fire or emergency situation.
3.3.94 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Coat. The element
Trouser.
O N
3.3.111 Trouser. See 3.3.104, Structural Fire Fighting Protec‐
tive Trouser, and 3.3.80, Proximity Fire Fighting Protective
3.3.112* Universal Precautions. An approach to infection

of the protective ensemble that provides protection to the
upper torso and arms, excluding the hands and head.
3.3.95 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Coverall. The
S
other bloodborne pathogens.E
control in which human blood and certain human body fluids
are treated as if known to be infectious for HIV, HBV, and
U
element of the protective ensemble that provides protection to 3.3.113 Utility Sink. A separate sink used for cleaning ensem‐
the torso, arms, and legs, excluding the head, hands, and feet. bles and ensemble elements.
3.3.96* Structural Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble. Multi‐

ple elements of compliant protective clothing and equipment
that when worn together provide protection from some risks,
A L
N 3.3.114 Verified Cleaner. An independent cleaning service
verified by a third-party certification organization to conduct
advanced cleaning and sanitization.
Δ 3.3.115 Verified Independent Service
U
but not all risks, of emergency incident operations. Provider (ISP). An
3.3.97 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble with independent service provider verified by a third-party certifica‐
Optional Liquid and Particulate Contaminant Protection. A
I D
compliant structural fire fighting protective ensemble that is
tion organization to conduct advanced
cleaning and sanitization, basic repair,
service.
inspection, advanced
and advanced repair
V
also certified as an entire ensemble to meet the optional
contaminants.
D I
requirements for protection from liquid and particulate
3.3.98 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Footwear. The

3.3.116 Verified Organization. See 3.3.64.2, Verified Organi‐
zation.
3.3.117 Visibility Markings. Retroreflective and fluorescent
IN
conspicuity enhancements. Retroreflective enhancements
the foot, ankle, and lower leg. improve nighttime conspicuity, and fluorescent enhancements
3.3.99 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Garments. The improvement daytime conspicuity.
R
coat, trouser, and coverall elements of the protective ensemble. 3.3.118 Winter Liner. An optional component layer that
3.3.100 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Glove. The provides added insulation against cold.
F O
the hand and wrist.
3.3.101 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Helmet. The
3.3.119 Wristlet. The interface component of the protective
element or item that provides limited protection to the coat/
glove interface area.
the head. Chapter 4 Program

•
N 3.3.102 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Hood. The inter‐
face element of a protective ensemble that provides limited Δ 4.1 General.
protection to the coat/helmet/SCBA facepiece interface area. 4.1.1* The organization shall develop and implement a
N 3.3.103* Structural Fire Fighting Protective Particulate- program for the selection, care, and maintenance of structural
Blocking Hood. A structural fire fighting protective hood that fire fighting ensembles and ensemble elements and proximity
reduces particulate penetration. fire fighting ensembles and ensemble elements used by the
members of the organization in the performance of their
3.3.104 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Trouser. The assigned functions.
the lower torso and legs, excluding the ankles and feet. 4.1.2 This program shall have the goal of providing structural
fire fighting ensembles and ensemble elements and proximity
fire fighting ensembles and ensemble elements that are suita‐
ble and appropriate for the intended use; maintaining such element using recognized tests to determine that the accessory
protective ensembles and ensemble elements in a safe, usable does not degrade the performance of the ensemble or ensem‐
condition to provide the intended protection to the user; ble element.
removing from use such protective ensembles and ensemble
elements that could cause or contribute to user injury, illness, 4.2.3.3* In the event the organization’s written requests for
or death because of their condition; and reconditioning, permission have not received a reply from the ensemble or
repairing, or retiring such protective ensembles and ensemble ensemble element manufacturer for a specific accessory to be
elements. used on the ensemble or ensemble element, the organization
shall be permitted to evaluate the accessory for attachment to
4.1.3 Where this program for the selection, care, and mainte‐ an ensemble or ensemble element using recognized tests to
nance of structural and proximity fire fighting protective determine that the accessory does not degrade the perform‐
ensembles and ensemble elements is part of an organization’s ance of the ensemble or ensemble element.
overall program on protective clothing and protective equip‐
4.2.4* The organization shall use one or any combination
Y
ment, the portion of the organization’s overall program that
affects structural and proximity fire fighting protective ensem‐ thereof of the following to perform advanced cleaning, sani‐
L
bles and ensemble elements shall be in accordance with tization or disinfection, advanced inspection, and repair serv‐
Section 4.2. ices of ensembles and ensemble elements (see Table 4.2.4):
4.2 Program Organization for Structural Fire Fighting Ensem‐

bles and Ensemble Elements and Proximity Fire Fighting
Ensembles and Ensemble Elements.
4.2.1 The organization’s program specified in Section 4.1 shall
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Manufacturer verified in cleaning
Verified organization
Verified independent service provider (ISP)
Verified cleaner
O N
Manufacturer-trained organization for the organization’s
incorporate at least the requirements in Chapters 4 through 12
of this standard.
4.2.2* The organization shall develop written standard operat‐
(6)
E
ensembles and ensemble elements only
Ensemble or ensemble element manufacturer
S
Δ 4.2.4.1 Verified organizations, verified ISPs, manufacturers
ing procedures (SOPs) that shall identify and define the vari‐
ous parts of the program and the various roles and
responsibilities of the organization and of the members in the
program parts specified in Table 4.2.2.
L U
verified in cleaning, and verified cleaners shall meet the
requirements of Chapter 11 and shall be verified by a third-
party certification organization.
A
N 4.2.4.1.1 Manufacturers verified in cleaning shall meet the
4.2.3* The organization shall not add or permit accessories to cleaning requirements of Chapter 11 and shall be verified by a
U
be added to any ensemble or ensemble element prior to the third-party certification organization.
organization requesting approval in writing and receiving writ‐ N 4.2.4.1.2 Verified cleaners shall meet the cleaning and quality
ten approval from the ensemble or ensemble element manu‐
facturer for each specific accessory.
I D management requirements of Chapter 11 and shall be verified

by a third-party certification organization.
4.2.3.1* The organization shall not add or permit accessories
I
to be added to any ensemble or ensemble element where the
organization’s request for approval has been responded to in V 4.2.4.2* Where the organization is a verified organization,
uses a verified ISP, or uses a verified cleaner, approval from the
element manufacturer shall not be required.
element manufacturer.
D
writing with a disapproval from the ensemble or ensemble
Δ 4.2.4.3* Verified organizations and verified ISPs shall receive
IN
written verification from the third-party certification organiza‐
4.2.3.2* In the event that the organization cannot make tion to conduct garment element advanced cleaning, advanced
contact with the ensemble or ensemble element manufacturer inspection, and advanced repair services.
for a specific accessory to be used on the ensemble or ensem‐
O R
ble element, the organization shall be permitted to evaluate
the accessory for attachment to an ensemble or ensemble
Δ Table 4.2.2 Required Program Parts for Structural and

N 4.2.4.3.1* Verified cleaners shall receive written verification
from the third-party certification organization to conduct
garment element advanced cleaning.
F
Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Ensembles and Elements
Program Part
Chapter/Section
of NFPA 1851
N 4.2.4.3.2 Manufacturers verified in cleaning shall receive writ‐
•
ten verification from the third-party certification organization
to conduct garment element advanced cleaning.
4.2.4.4 All garment advanced repairs shall be conducted by
the garment manufacturer, a verified organization, or a verified
Records Section 4.3 ISP.
Protecting the public and Section 4.5 Δ 4.2.4.5* Manufacturer-trained organizations shall meet the
personnel from exposure training requirements in this section and shall be permitted to
to contaminated PPE perform the activities identified in Table 4.2.4 for
Selection Chapter 5 manufacturer-trained organizations.
Inspection Chapter 6
Cleaning Chapter 7 N 4.2.4.5.1* Training shall be provided by an element manufac‐
Repair Chapter 8 turer of the same element type, a verified ISP, a verified organi‐
Storage Chapter 9 zation, a verified cleaner, or any combination thereof.
Retirement, disposition, and Chapter 10
special incident procedures
PROGRAM 1851-15
N Table 4.2.4 Responsibilities for Garment Element Inspection, Cleaning, and Repair
Manufacturer Verified ISP or Manufacturer- Ensemble or

Verified in Verified Verified Trained Ensemble Element
Cleaning Organization Cleaner Organization User Manufacturer
Routine inspections X
(Section 6.2)
Preliminary exposure X
reduction (Section 7.2)
Advanced inspection X X X X
(Section 6.3)
Complete liner inspection X X X X
(Section 6.4)
Advanced cleaning
(Section 7.3)
X X X X
L Y
N
Sanitization or disinfection X X X X
(Section 7.4)
Specialized cleaning X X X X
(Section 7.5)
Basic repair (Sections 8.2 and X X X
O X
8.3)
Advanced repair (Sections 8.2
and 8.4)
Training for cleaning
X
X
X
X X
S E X
X
Training for repairs
Training for inspection
X
X
X
X
L U X
X
N 4.2.4.5.2* Training shall be consistent with the requirements

and information provided in this standard and shall incorpo‐
rate at least the following:
(1) Program (see Section 4.2)
U A include, but not be limited to, issues that are specific to the
ensembles or ensemble elements being used by the organiza‐
tion, the manufacturers’ instructions, and the experience of
the organization.
(2) Records (see Section 4.3)
(3) Protecting the public and personnel from exposure to
I D 4.3 Records.
4.3.1* The organization shall compile and maintain records
V
contaminated PPE (see Section 4.5)
I
(4) Selection (see Chapter 5) on its structural fire fighting protective ensembles and ensem‐
(5) Inspection (see Chapter 6) ble elements and proximity fire fighting protective ensembles
D
(6) Cleaning (see Chapter 7) and ensemble elements.
(7) Repair (see Chapter 8) 4.3.2* The records specified in 4.3.1 shall apply to fire fight‐
IN
(8) Storage (see Chapter 9) ing protective ensembles and ensemble elements that are
(9) Retirement, disposition, and special incident procedures utilized by the fire department, including rental or loaner
(see Chapter 10) protective ensembles and ensemble elements.
(10) Specific instructions, parameters or procedures applica‐
O R
ble to ensembles or ensemble elements with unique
properties or performance as necessary
N 4.2.4.5.3* The entity conducting the training shall provide
4.3.3 At least the following records shall be kept for each
protective ensemble or ensemble element:
(1) Person to whom element is issued
F documentation that the organization has received the required

training.
N 4.2.4.5.4 Organizations shall obtain and complete within one
year of the edition issuance date the training required in
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Date and condition when issued
Manufacturer and model name or design
Manufacturer’s identification number, lot number, or
serial number
Month and year of manufacture
4.2.4.5.2 each time a new edition of NFPA 1851 is issued or (6) Date(s) and findings of advanced inspection(s)
there is a change in personnel overseeing or performing the (7) Date(s) and findings of advanced cleaning, disinfection
required aspects of an organization’s program. or sanitization, or specialized cleaning
N 4.2.4.5.5 Organizations shall consult with an ensemble or (8) Reason(s) for and who performed advanced cleaning,
ensemble element manufacturer when additional training is disinfection or sanitization, or specialized cleaning
necessary for special requirements specific to products, compo‐ (9) Date(s) of repair(s), who performed repair(s), and brief
nents, or materials that are unique to a manufacturer. description of repair(s)
(10) Date of retirement
4.2.5* The organization shall develop specific criteria for (11) Date and method of disposal
removal of protective clothing and equipment from service, in
accordance with Chapter 10, Retirement, Disposition, and 4.3.4 The organization shall compile and maintain records as
Special Incident Procedure. The criteria for retirement shall required by 4.3.3 on fire fighting protective ensembles with
liquid and particulate contaminant protection. The records 4.5.4* Soiled or potentially contaminated ensembles or
shall include a list of specific required elements and interface ensemble elements shall not be brought into the home, taken
components necessary for structural fire fighting protective to public facilities, or transported in private vehicles.
ensembles with optional liquid and particulate contaminant
protection and proximity fire fighting protective ensembles 4.6 Reporting Personal Protective Equipment Health and
with optional liquid and particulate contaminant protection. Safety Concerns.
N 4.3.5* Where an organization keeps an element(s) in a rotat‐ 4.6.1* The organization shall report all personal protective
ing exchange program and does not assign it to a member, the equipment (PPE) health and safety concerns, if caused by a
organization shall develop a program to clean and inspect known or suspected element failure, to the element manufac‐
these elements and the following records shall be kept: turer and certification organization.
(1) Manufacturer and model name or designation 4.6.2* The organization shall notify the manufacturer and the
(2) Manufacturer’s identification number, lot number, or certification organization in writing.
serial number
(3) Month and year of manufacture
(4) Date(s) and findings of advanced inspection(s)
(5) Date(s) and findings of advanced cleaning, disinfection
4.6.3 The organization shall request written acknowledgment
that the report of health and safety concerns was received by
the element manufacturer and certification organization. Writ‐
L Y
or sanitization, or specialized cleaning
(6) Date(s) element is returned to rotating exchange inven‐
tory
(7) Reasons for and who performed advanced cleaning,
date of the report of health and safety concerns.
Chapter 5 Selection
O N
ten acknowledgment must be received within 30 days of the
E
disinfection or sanitization, or specialized cleaning
(8) Date(s) of repair(s), who performed repair(s), and brief 5.1* Selection and Purchase.
description of repair(s)
(9) Date of retirement
(10) Date and method of disposal
4.4 Manufacturer’s Instructions.
U S
5.1.1* Prior to starting the selection process of structural fire
fighting ensembles and ensemble elements and proximity fire
fighting ensembles and ensemble elements, the organization
shall perform a risk assessment.
4.4.1 When issuing new structural fire fighting protective
ensembles and ensemble elements or proximity fire fighting
protective ensembles and ensemble elements, the organization
A L
N 5.1.1.1 The organization shall distinguish between the use of
structural fire fighting ensembles and proximity fire fighting
ensembles based on the operating area and mission responsi‐
shall provide users with the instructions provided by the manu‐
facturer on the care, use, and maintenance of the protective
ensembles or ensemble elements, including any warnings
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U bilities of the organization. The risk assessment shall be based
on both the frequency and severity of exposure to specific
hazards as a means for determining the selection of appropri‐
provided by the manufacturer. This information shall be
permitted to be delivered from the manufacturer in various
V I ate fire fighting protective ensembles.

N 5.1.1.2 The organization shall review the risk assessment or
I
formats, including, but not limited to, printed materials or
instructions to access the information electronically/digitally. conduct a new risk assessment at least every 2 years or under
specific circumstances, including, but not limited to, the follow‐
D
4.4.2* Where the manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
care or maintenance of the protective ensembles or elements
ing:
IN
(1) When there are changes that affect the findings of the
differ from a specific requirement(s) in this standard, the current risk assessment in terms of the specific identifica‐
manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for that require‐ tion of hazards or availability of fire fighting ensemble
ment(s). Manufacturers shall not be permitted to override the product technology
R
requirements of this standard for third-party verification. (2) When there are changes in the organization’s standard
4.4.3 The organization shall retain and make accessible to fire operating procedures (SOPs) for the use of structural fire
O
department personnel a copy of manufacturers’ instructions
regarding the care, use, and maintenance of the protective
F
ensembles for reference purposes.
4.5 Protecting the Public and Personnel from Exposure to
(3)
fighting ensembles or proximity fire fighting ensembles
When any personal protective ensemble or ensemble
elements are being considered for selection and purchase
5.1.2 The risk assessment shall include, but not be limited to,
Contaminated PPE. the hazards that can be encountered by structural or proximity
fire fighters based on the following:
4.5.1 The organization shall develop written SOPs that mini‐
mize the public’s and the fire department personnel’s exposure (1)* Type of duties performed
to soiled or contaminated structural or proximity fire fighting (2) Distinguishing response activities for different potential
protective ensembles and ensemble elements. incidents
(3) Organization’s experiences
4.5.2* The SOPs shall require that protective ensembles or (4) Incident operations
ensemble elements not be worn or stored in the living areas of (5) Geographic location and climate
fire department facilities. (6)* Specific physical area of operation
(7)* Likelihood of or response to CBRN terrorism incident
4.5.3* The public shall not be exposed at any time, except (8) Need for two sets of ensemble elements or spare ensem‐
during emergency operations, to soiled or potentially contami‐ ble elements
nated protective ensembles or ensemble elements.
INSPECTION 1851-17
Δ 5.1.3* The organization shall review the current edition of 5.1.10 Organizations shall examine information supplied with
NFPA 1971, NFPA 1994, NFPA 1500, NFPA 600, and any appli‐ the products, such as instructions, warranties, and technical
cable federal or state OSHA standards relating to structural fire data.
fighting protective ensembles and ensemble elements to deter‐
mine how they affect the selection process. 5.1.11 Procedures shall be established for returning unsatis‐
factory products if the organization’s specifications are not
Δ 5.1.4* The organization shall ensure that elements under met.
consideration are certified as being compliant with NFPA 1971
by a third-party certification organization.
Chapter 6 Inspection
5.1.5* Based on the risk assessment, the organization shall
compile and evaluate information on the comparative 6.1 General.
strengths and weaknesses of the elements under consideration.
6.1.1 Universal precautions shall be observed, as appropriate,
N 5.1.5.1* Organizations shall specifically consider the tradeoffs
in the level of thermal insulation versus thermal comfort or
stress-related effects of the material composite in their selec‐
tion of protective garments.
when handling ensemble elements. At a minimum, individuals
conducting inspections shall wear examination gloves that are
certified to NFPA 1999. Consideration shall also be given to
having individuals conducting inspections of ensemble
L Y
5.1.6* The organization shall ensure the proper interface
between ensemble elements, including, but not limited to,
coat-to-hood and helmet, coat-to-pant, coat-to-glove, and pants-
to-footwear. Any other specialty equipment being used shall
N
elements wear appropriate aprons with sleeves or respirators.
Δ 6.1.2 Any ensemble elements that are found to be soiled or
O
contaminated shall be cleaned before any additional inspection
is initiated. Where ensemble elements are found to be contami‐
also be considered to ensure the equipment does not interfere
with the proper function and interface of the protective ensem‐
ble or ensemble elements.
S E
nated by CBRN agents, the ensemble shall be retired.
6.1.3* The organization shall establish guidelines for its
members to follow in determining if an element is soiled to an
N 5.1.6.1* Based on the risk assessment, the organization shall
ensure that eye and face protection components or separate
devices are specified to provide adequate eye and face protec‐
tion for each type of incident identified in the risk assessment.
L U
extent that cleaning is necessary.
Δ 6.1.4 The organization shall determine appropriate actions to
be taken if an element is found to be in need of cleaning or
repair.
5.1.7* Where a field evaluation of an ensemble or ensemble
element is conducted, the organization shall establish criteria
to ensure a systematic method of comparing products in a
manner related to their intended use and assessing their
U A Δ 6.1.4.1 At a minimum, any necessary cleaning shall be done in
accordance with the requirements specified in Chapter 7.
Where a condition exists that is beyond preliminary exposure
performance relative to the organization’s expectations.
Δ 5.1.8* Where the organization develops purchase specifica‐
I D reduction in accordance with Section 7.2, the element shall be
removed from service, tagged, and referred to personnel
responsible for advanced cleaning.
(1)
I
tions, at least the following criteria shall be included:
V
Purchase specifications shall require that the ensemble or
6.1.4.2 At a minimum, any necessary repairs shall be made in
accordance with the requirements specified in Chapter 8.
D
ensemble element(s) to be purchased shall be compliant
with the current edition of NFPA 1971. Purchasers shall
Where a condition exists that is beyond basic garment element
repair in accordance with Section 8.3, the element shall be
IN
consider that ensembles that are certified to the optional removed from service, tagged, and referred to personnel
liquid and particulate contamination protection require‐ responsible for repair.
ment are tested and certified as ensembles and must be
6.1.4.3 At a minimum, any necessary testing shall be conduc‐
R
worn as an ensemble with all elements and interface
components present as stated on the element label. ted in accordance with the methods specified in Chapter 12.
(2)* Where the organization selects criteria that exceed the
F (3)*
O minimum requirements of the current edition of
NFPA 1971, such criteria shall be stipulated in the
purchase specifications.
Purchase specifications shall require that submitted offers
or bids include substantiation of certification for each
6.2 Routine Inspection.
6.2.1 Individual members shall conduct a routine inspection
of their protective ensembles and ensemble elements upon
issue, at the beginning of each duty period, and after each use.
element and model offered. 6.2.2* The routine inspection shall include, at a minimum,
(4)* Where applicable, the purchase specifications shall define the inspections specified in 6.2.2.1 through 6.2.2.7.
the process for determining proper fit. 6.2.2.1 Coat and trouser garment elements shall be inspected
(5)* The organization shall compare each bid submittal for the following:
against purchase specifications.
(1) Soiling
5.1.9 Upon receipt, organizations shall inspect purchased (2) Contamination
protective ensemble element(s) to determine that they meet (3) Physical damage such as the following:
their specifications and that they were not damaged during (a) Rips, tears, and cuts
shipment. Organizations shall also verify the quantity and sizes (b) Damaged or missing hardware and closure systems
of the protective ensemble element(s) received. (c) Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes,
melting, or discoloration of any layer)
(4) Damaged or missing reflective trim
(5) Loss of seam integrity and broken or missing stitches (3) Contamination
(6) Correct assembly and size compatibility of shell, liner, and (4) Physical damage such as the following:
the drag rescue device (DRD) (a) Cuts, tears, punctures, cracking, or splitting
6.2.2.2 Hood elements shall be inspected for the following: (b) Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes,
melting, or discoloration)
(1) Soiling (c) Loss of seam integrity and broken or missing
(2) Contamination stitches
(3) Physical damage such as the following:
(a)
Rips, tears, and cuts 6.2.2.7 Interface components shall be inspected for the
(b)
Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes, following:
melting, or discoloration of any layer) (1) Soiling
(4) Loss of face opening adjustment (2) Contamination
(5) Loss of seam integrity and broken or missing stitches (3) Physical damage
(6)* Damage to the particulate-blocking layer (particulate-
blocking hoods only)
6.2.2.3 Helmet elements shall be inspected for the following:
(4) Loss or reduction of properties that allow component to
continue as effective interface [e.g., loss of shape or
inability to remain attached to the respective element(s)
L Y
(1)
(2)
(3)
Soiling
Contamination
Physical damage to the shell such as the following:
(a) Cracks, crazing, dents, and abrasions
(5)
where attachment is required]
N
Loss of seam integrity and broken or missing stitches
O
6.2.3 Additional Routine Inspection Requirements for Proxim‐
ity Fire Fighting Protective Ensembles and Ensemble Elements.
(4)
(b) Thermal damage to the shell (such as bubbling, soft
spots, warping, or discoloration)
Physical damage to the earflaps such as the following: (1) Loss of reflectivity
S E
6.2.3.1 Proximity fire fighting coat and trouser garment
elements shall be inspected for the following:
(a)
(b)
Rips, tears, and cuts
Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes, or
melting)
(5) Damaged or missing components of the suspension and
(2)
(3)
L U
Loss of reflective coating(s)
Delamination as evidenced by separation or peeling of
the outer shell
6.2.3.2 Proximity fire fighting helmet element overcover shall
retention systems
(6)* Damaged or missing components of the faceshield/
goggle system, including discoloration, crazing, and
scratches to the faceshield/goggle lens limiting visibility
U A be inspected for the following:
(1)
(2)
Loss of reflectivity
Loss of reflective coating(s)
(7) Damaged or missing reflective trim
(8) Loss of seam integrity and broken or missing stitches
I D (3)
(4)
Delamination as evidenced by separation or peeling of
the outer shell
Damaged or missing reflective trim, if applicable
6.2.2.4 Glove elements shall be inspected for the following:
(1) Soiling
I V (5) Damage and functionality of the overcover to helmet
attachment
D
(2) Contamination 6.2.3.3 Proximity fire fighting shrouds shall be inspected for
(3) Physical damage such as the following: the following:
IN
(a) Rips, tears, and cuts (1) Loss of reflectivity
(b) Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes, (2) Loss of reflective coating(s)
melting, or discoloration of any layer) (3) Delamination as evidenced by separation or peeling of
R
(c) Inverted glove liner the outer shell
(4) Shrinkage (4) If applicable, damage and functionality of the shroud-to-
(5) Loss of elasticity or flexibility
(6)
F O
6.2.2.5 Footwear elements shall be inspected for the following:
(1)
(2)
Soiling
Contamination
(5)
helmet attachment
Distortion of face opening resulting in gaps around the
faceshield
6.2.3.4 Proximity fire fighting helmet elements shall be
inspected for the following:
(3) Physical damage such as the following: (1) Loss of faceshield reflectivity
(a) Cuts, tears, and punctures (2) Loss of shell reflectivity, if applicable
(b) Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes,
melting, or discoloration of any layer) 6.2.3.5 Proximity fire fighting glove elements shall be inspec‐
(c) Exposed or deformed protective toe, protective ted for the following:
midsole, or shank (1) Loss of reflectivity
(4) Loss of water resistance (2) Loss of reflective coating(s)
(5) Closure system component damage and functionality
(6) Loss of seam integrity and broken or missing stitches 6.2.3.6 Proximity fire fighting footwear elements shall be
6.2.2.6 DRD components shall be inspected for the following: (1) Loss of reflectivity
(1) Installation in garment (2) Loss of reflective coating(s)
(2) Soiling
INSPECTION 1851-19
6.3 Advanced Inspection. (12) Liner attachment systems

(13) Closure system functionality
6.3.1 Advanced inspection and any necessary testing shall be (14) Accessories for compliance with 4.2.3
performed by the element manufacturer, a manufacturer- (15) Correct assembly and size compatibility of shell, liner,
trained organization, a verified organization, or a verified ISP. and DRD
6.3.2 The member(s) of the organization who has received 6.3.5.2 Hood elements shall be inspected for the following:
training in the advanced inspection of the ensembles or ensem‐
ble elements shall be responsible for performing, managing, or (1) Soiling
coordinating advanced inspections or the advanced inspection (2) Contamination
process. (3) Physical damage, including, but not limited to, the
following:
6.3.2.1* The ensemble or ensemble element manufacturer or
a verified ISP and the organization shall determine the level of (a) Rips, tears, and cuts
(b) Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes,
training required to perform advanced inspections. The
ensemble or ensemble element manufacturer or verified ISP
shall provide written verification of training. The organization
shall be trained on advanced inspection procedures by either
(4)
Damage to or separation of any material as described by
the manufacturer
L Y
an element manufacturer or a verified ISP upon each new revi‐
sion of this standard.
6.3.2.1.1 If the organization is a verified organization, it shall
be permitted to determine the level of training necessary to
(5)*
(6)
(7)
(8)
Shrinkage N
Damage to the particulate-blocking layer, where present,
as specified in Section 12.1 or Section 12.2
O
Loss of material elasticity or stretching out of shape
Loss of seam integrity or broken or missing stitches
perform the advanced inspection without any further written
verification.
6.3.3* Advanced inspections of all protective ensemble
(9)
(10)*
E
Loss of face-opening adjustment
Label integrity and legibility
S
6.3.5.3 Helmet elements shall be inspected for the following:
elements that are issued shall be conducted annually and
whenever a routine inspection determines potential damage.
6.3.3.1 Ensemble elements that have been properly stored in
accordance with Chapter 9 and are not being used are not
U
(1) Soiling
(2) Contamination
L
(3) Physical damage to the shell such as the following:
A
(a)
Cracks, dents, and abrasions
required to be subjected to advanced inspection. (b)
Thermal damage to the shell (such as bubbling,
U
6.3.4* The findings of the advanced inspection shall be docu‐ soft spots, warping, or discoloration)
mented. (4) Physical damage to the ear flaps such as the following:
Δ 6.3.5* The advanced inspection shall include, at a minimum,
the inspections specified in 6.3.5.1 through 6.3.7.3.
I D (a)
(b)
Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes,
I V
6.3.5.1* All separable layers of the garment elements shall be
individually inspected for the following:
(5) Damaged or missing components of the suspension and
retention systems
D
(6) Functionality of suspension and retention systems
(1) Soiling (7) Damaged or missing components of the faceshield/
(2) Contamination
IN
goggle system, including discoloration or scratches to
(3)* Physical damage to all layers, such as the following: the faceshield/goggle lens limiting visibility
(a) Rips, tears, cuts, and abrasions (8) Functionality of faceshield/goggle system
(b) Damaged or missing hardware (9) Damage to the impact cap
O R (c) Thermal damage (charring, burn holes, melting,

discoloration of any layer)
(4)* Loss of moisture barrier integrity as indicated by any of
the following:
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)*
Damaged or missing reflective trim
Accessories for compliance with 4.2.3
Label integrity and legibility
F (5)
(a) Rips, tears, cuts, or abrasions
(b) Discoloration
(c) Thermal damage
Evaluation of system fit and coat/trouser overlap
6.3.5.4 Glove elements shall be inspected for the following:
(1) Soiling
(2) Contamination
(3)* Physical damage such as the following:
(6) Loss of seam integrity and broken or missing stitches
(7)* Loss of material physical integrity [e.g., ultraviolet (UV) (a)
or chemical degradation] as evidenced by discoloration, (b)
Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes,
significant changes in material texture, loss of material melting, or discoloration of any layer)
strength, loss of liner material, and shifting of liner (c) Inverted glove liner
material (d) Loss of seam integrity or broken or missing stitches
(8) Loss of wristlet elasticity, stretching, runs, cuts, or burn (4) Shrinkage
holes (5) Loss of flexibility
(9)* Reflective trim integrity, attachment to garment, reflec‐ (6) Loss of elasticity and shape in wristlets
tivity, or damage (7) Accessories for compliance with 4.2.3
(10)* Label integrity and legibility (8)* Label integrity and legibility
(11) Hook and loop functionality
6.3.5.5 Footwear elements shall be inspected for the following: 6.3.6.3 Proximity fire fighting shroud components shall be
(1) Soiling inspected for the following:
(2) Contamination (1) Loss of radiant reflectivity
(3) Physical damage such as the following: (2) Loss of radiant reflective coating(s)
(a) Cuts, tears, punctures, cracking, or splitting (3) Helmet attachment system, if applicable, for damage and
(b) Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes, functionality
melting, or discoloration of any layer) (4) Distortion of face opening resulting in gaps around the
(c) Exposed or deformed steel toe, steel midsole, or faceshield
shank (5) Delamination as evidenced by separation or peeling of
(d) Loss of seam integrity, delamination, or broken or the outer shell
missing stitches 6.3.6.4 Proximity fire fighting helmet elements shall be
(4) Loss of water resistance inspected for the following:
(5)
(6)*
(7)
Closure system component damage and functionality
Excessive tread wear
Condition of lining such as the following:
(1)
(2)
Loss of faceshield radiant reflectivity
Loss of shell radiant reflectivity, if applicable
6.3.6.5 Proximity fire fighting glove elements shall be inspec‐
L Y
N
(a) Tears
(b) Excessive wear ted for the following:
(c) Separation from outer layer
O
(1) Loss of radiant reflectivity
(8) Heel counter failure (2) Loss of radiant reflective coating(s)
(9) Accessories for compliance with 4.2.3 (3) Delamination as evidenced by separation or peeling of
(10)* Label integrity and legibility
6.3.5.6 Interface components shall be inspected for the
following:
the outer shell
S E
6.3.6.6 Proximity fire fighting footwear shall be inspected for
the following:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Soiling
Contamination
Physical damage
Loss or reduction of properties that allow component to
(1)
(2)
U
Loss of radiant reflectivity
Loss of radiant reflective coating(s)
L
6.3.7 Additional Advanced Inspection Criteria for Ensembles
(5)
continue as effective interface, such as loss of shape or
inability to remain attached to the respective element(s),
if attachment is required
U A with Optional Liquid and Particulate Contaminant Protection.
6.3.7.1* Liquid and particulate contaminant protective
ensembles shall be inspected according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
(1)
6.3.5.7 DRD components shall be inspected for the following:
Installation in garment
V ID 6.3.7.2 Complete liner inspection of all garment elements

shall be conducted at a minimum after 2 years in service and
I
(2) Soiling annually thereafter or whenever advance inspections indicate
(3) Contamination that a problem might exist.
D
(4) Physical damage such as the following:
6.3.7.3 Liquid and particulate contaminant protective ensem‐
(a)
Cuts, tears, punctures, cracking, or splitting bles shall be inspected for loss of integrity, including, but not
IN
(b)
Thermal damage (such as charring, burn holes, limited to, the following:
melting, or discoloration)
(c) Loss of seam integrity and broken or missing (1) Loss of interface functionality
(2) Excessive material or component shrinkage or stretching
R
stitches
(5)* Label integrity and legibility 6.4 Complete Liner Inspection.
F O
6.3.6 Additional Advanced Inspection Criteria for Proximity
Fire Fighting Protective Ensembles and Ensemble Elements.
6.3.6.1 Proximity fire fighting garment elements shall be
6.4.1 Complete liner inspection of all garment elements shall
be performed by the garment manufacturer, a manufacturer-
trained organization, a verified organization, or a verified ISP.
6.4.2 The member(s) of the organization who has received
(1) Loss of radiant reflectivity training in the complete liner inspection of the garment
(2) Loss of radiant reflective coating(s) element shall be responsible for performing, managing, or
(3) Delamination as evidenced by separation or peeling of coordinating the complete liner inspection or the complete
the outer shell liner inspection process.
6.3.6.2 Proximity fire fighting helmet overcover components 6.4.2.1 The garment element manufacturer or a verified ISP
shall be inspected for the following: and the organization shall determine the level of training
required to perform complete liner inspections. The garment
(1) Loss of radiant reflectivity element manufacturer or verified ISP shall provide written veri‐
(2) Loss of radiant reflective coating(s) fication of training.
(3) Damaged or missing reflective trim, if applicable
(4) Helmet attachment system for damage and functionality 6.4.2.1.1 If the organization is a verified organization, it shall
(5) Delamination as evidenced by separation or peeling of be permitted to determine the level of training necessary to
the outer shell
CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION 1851-21
perform the complete liner inspection without any further writ‐ N 7.1.1.5 Soiled or contaminated elements shall not be brought
ten verification. into the home, washed in home laundries, or washed in public
laundries.
6.4.3 Complete liner inspection of all garment elements shall
be conducted as part of the advanced inspection annually and N 7.1.1.6* Commercial dry cleaning, particularly those processes
whenever a routine inspection determines potential damage. using perchloroethylene or related solvents, shall not be used
The liner system shall be opened to expose all layers for inspec‐ as a means of cleaning ensembles and ensemble elements
tion and testing. unless approved by the ensemble or ensemble element manu‐
• facturer.
6.4.4 The findings of the complete liner inspection shall be
documented. Δ 7.1.2* Approach for Deciding the Handling, Cleaning, and
Disposition of Ensemble Elements.
6.4.5 The complete liner inspection shall include, as a mini‐
mum, the inspection specified in 6.4.5.1 through 6.4.5.3. N 7.1.2.1 Ensembles and ensemble elements shall be evaluated
6.4.5.1* The moisture barrier and the thermal barrier shall be
(1) Physical damage to all layers and sides of each layer such
by the wearer or a designated individual within the organiza‐
tion for application of preliminary exposure reduction, clean‐
ing, disinfection, or sanitization after each use based on the
guidance provided in Figure 7.1.1.2(a).
L Y
as the following:
(a)
(b)
Rips, tears, cuts, and abrasions
Thermal damage (charring, burn holes, melting, or
discoloration of any layer)
N
Δ 7.1.2.2 Ensembles and ensemble elements contaminated by
O
CBRN terrorism agents shall be immediately retired after
confirmed exposure and shall not be subjected to cleaning.
E
(2) Loss of seam integrity, broken or missing stitches, and N 7.1.2.2.1 CBRN terrorism agent–contaminated ensembles and
loose or missing moisture barrier seam tape ensemble elements shall be doffed as soon as possible, bagged,
(3) Material physical integrity; UV or chemical degradation
as evidenced by discoloration, significant changes in
material texture, loss of material strength, loss of liner
material, or shifting of liner material
U S
and disposed of as hazardous waste in accordance with federal,
state, and local regulations.
N 7.1.2.3 Ensembles and ensemble elements that were used in a
hazardous materials incident shall be subject to preliminary
(4) Delamination as evidenced by separation of film from
substrate fabric, flaking, or powdering
6.4.5.2 The moisture barrier shall be tested using the hydro‐
A L
exposure reduction as specified in Section 7.2 and then
assessed by qualified members of the hazardous materials team
or other qualified experts with knowledge about the specific
exposures that took place.
U
static test to evaluate the water penetration barrier, as specified
in Section 12.3, and shall show no leakage. N 7.1.2.3.1 The information gained from the hazardous materi‐
shall be recorded.
I D
6.4.5.3 The result of each water penetration barrier evaluation als team or other experts shall be used to determine whether
cleaning is possible.
I
Chapter 7 Cleaning and Decontamination
V N 7.1.2.3.1.1 If it is determined that cleaning is possible, an
appropriate form of specialized cleaning shall be applied to the
affected ensembles and ensemble elements to remove contami‐
7.1* General.
D nation or reduce it to a safe level.
IN
Δ 7.1.1 Approach for Handling Ensemble Elements After Inci‐ N 7.1.2.3.1.2 If it is determined that cleaning is not possible or
dent Response. Organizations shall provide a means for clean‐ that the ensemble or ensemble elements have been damaged
ing ensemble elements. beyond repair, the affected ensembles and ensemble elements
shall be condemned, retired, and not subjected to cleaning.
O R
N 7.1.1.1* Cleaning capabilities shall be permitted to be conduc‐
ted in-house by a manufacturer-trained organization, a verified
organization, a verified cleaner, a manufacturer verified in
cleaning, a verified ISP, or any combination thereof.
N 7.1.2.3.2 Ensembles and ensemble elements that were conta‐
minated during a hazardous materials incident and cannot be
cleaned shall be disposed of as hazardous waste in accordance
F
N 7.1.1.2 Organizations shall use the decision tool provided in
Figure 7.1.1.2(a) and Figure 7.1.1.2(b) to assist in determining
the appropriate cleaning procedures to follow as specified in
Sections 7.2 through 7.5.
with federal, state, and local regulations.
7.1.2.4 Ensembles and ensemble elements that are known or
suspected to be contaminated with bulk chemicals, asbestos, or
other designated hazardous substances, body fluids, or other
microbial contamination, or products of combustion from a
N 7.1.1.3* With the exception of CBRN contamination or other structural or other fire shall be subject to preliminary exposure
forms of contamination, where further contact with specific reduction as specified in Section 7.2.
hazardous contaminants requires immediate removal of ensem‐
bles or ensemble elements, preliminary exposure reduction N 7.1.2.5 Ensembles and ensemble elements that are soiled but
procedures shall be applied as specified in Section 7.2 prior to not contaminated shall be subject to preliminary exposure
any cleaning. reduction as specified in Section 7.2.
N 7.1.1.4 Organizations shall develop standard operating proce‐ N 7.1.2.5.1 If the ensemble and ensemble elements have been
dures for field use that reflect the specific decision-making subjected to soiling, the ensemble and ensemble elements shall
process described in this section. be subjected to advanced cleaning as needed and as specified
in Section 7.3.
Incident/response
CBRN Yes Condemn, retire, and

event? dispose of PPE.
No No
Apply preliminary
HazMat
incident?
Yes
exposure reduction; have
PPE assessed by
HazMat team or
other expert(s).
Cleaning
possible?
Yes Apply appropriate
specialized cleaning.
L Y
No
Apply preliminary
O N
E
Yes exposure reduction;
Contamination? See Figure 7.1.1.2(b).
classify type of
S
contamination.
U
No
Soiling?
Yes Apply preliminary
exposure reduction.
Apply advanced
A
cleaning as needed.
L
No
U
V ID Conduct routine
inspection of PPE.
D I
Note: Contaminants shown in relative hierarchy of exposure risk. Multiple forms of contamination might apply.
Clean according to highest risk.
IN
N FIGURE 7.1.1.2(a) Approach for Deciding Handling, Cleaning, and Disposition of Ensemble Elements.
N 7.1.2.5.2 If the ensemble and ensemble elements are not N 7.1.3.1.2 Where multiple forms of contamination are present,
O R
soiled and do not require advanced cleaning, the ensemble
and ensemble elements shall be subjected to routine inspection
as specified in Section 6.2.
the actions for the handling and cleaning and disposition of
ensemble and ensemble elements shall be according to the
contamination posing the highest risk.
F
N 7.1.3* Approach for Addressing Specific Types of Contamina‐
tion. Where ensembles and ensemble elements have been
suspected or found to have contamination from bulk chemi‐
cals, asbestos, or other designated hazardous substances, body
fluids, or other forms of microbial contamination, or products
N 7.1.3.2 Bulk Chemical Decontamination Actions.
N 7.1.3.2.1 Ensembles and ensemble elements that are known or
suspected to be contaminated with bulk chemicals shall be
subject to preliminary exposure reduction as specified in
of combustion products from a structural or other fire, the Section 7.2 and isolated, tagged, and bagged at the incident
organization shall apply the steps shown in Figure 7.1.1.2(b). scene.
Δ 7.1.3.1 General Decontamination Actions. N 7.1.3.2.2 The type of bulk chemical contamination shall be
assessed by the organization’s hazardous materials team or
N 7.1.3.1.1 Where the form of contamination cannot be identi‐ other qualified experts to determine if cleaning or decontami‐
fied, contaminated ensembles and ensemble elements shall be nation of the ensembles and ensemble elements is possible.
subject to preliminary exposure reduction, isolated, and
removed from service until the suspected contaminant(s) is Δ 7.1.3.2.2.1 Where the contaminant and its source have been
identified and the elements can receive advanced or special‐ identified, the organization shall consult the supplier of the
ized cleaning, as necessary, to remove it. contaminant, the manufacturer of the ensemble and ensemble
elements, a verified cleaner, or a verified ISP for an appropriate
decontamination agent and process.
Contamination Apply appropriate

suspected specialized
cleaning for
contaminant type.
Yes
Yes Apply preliminary Have PPE assessed
Bulk Conduct routine
exposure reduction; by hazmat team or
chemicals? inspection of PPE.
isolate/contain PPE. other expert(s).
Cleaning/
No decontamination
possible?
Asbestos/ Apply preliminary Determine

Yes
designated exposure reduction; if exposure permits No Condemn, retire,
Y
subsa? isolate/contain PPE. cleaning and reuse.
and dispose
of PPE.
No
Body fluidsb?
Yes
Apply preliminary
exposure reduction;
No
Disinfection/
sanitization
Yes Apply disinfection
N L
O
or sanitization.
isolate/contain PPE. possible?
No
Products of
combustionc?
Yes Apply preliminary
exposure reduction;
isolate/contain PPE.
Apply advanced
cleaning.
Conduct routine
inspection of PPE.
S E
Notes:
aAnd other designated substances
L U
A
bIncludes other microbial contamination
cIncludes any significant structural fire exposure
U
N FIGURE 7.1.1.2(b) Approach for Addressing Specific Types of Contamination.
•
I
N 7.1.3.2.2.2 Based on the assessment of the type of contamina‐
D
tion conditions, if cleaning or decontamination is not possible,
N 7.1.3.4 Body Fluid and Other Microbial Contamination Disin‐
fection and Sanitization Actions.
V
then the affected ensemble and ensemble elements shall be
I
condemned, retired, and disposed of as hazardous waste in N 7.1.3.4.1 Ensembles and ensemble elements that are known or
accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. suspected to be contaminated with body fluids or other forms
D
of microbial contaminants shall be subject to preliminary expo‐
N 7.1.3.2.2.3 Based on the assessment of the contamination sure reduction as specified in Section 7.2 and isolated, tagged,
IN
conditions, if cleaning or decontamination is considered possi‐ and bagged at the incident scene.
ble, then the affected ensemble and ensemble elements shall
be subjected to specialized cleaning as specified in Section 7.5. N 7.1.3.4.2 The organization or qualified experts shall deter‐
mine if disinfection or sanitization and cleaning of the ensem‐
R
N 7.1.3.3 Asbestos and Other Designated Hazardous Substance ble and ensemble elements is possible.
Decontamination Actions.
N 7.1.3.4.2.1 Based on the assessment of the contamination
F O
N 7.1.3.3.1 Ensembles and ensemble elements that are known or
suspected to be contaminated with asbestos or other designa‐
ted highly hazardous substances shall be subject to preliminary
exposure reduction as specified in Section 7.2 and isolated,
tagged, and bagged at the incident scene.
conditions, if disinfection or sanitization and cleaning is not
possible, then the affected ensemble and ensemble elements
shall be condemned, retired, and disposed of as biological
waste in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations.
N 7.1.3.4.2.2 Based on the assessment of the contaminant, if
N 7.1.3.3.2 The organization’s hazardous materials team or disinfection or sanitization is considered possible, then the
other qualified experts shall determine if cleaning or decon‐ affected ensemble and ensemble elements shall be subjected to
tamination of the ensemble and ensemble elements is possible. disinfection or sanitization procedures, followed by advanced
cleaning procedures as specified in Sections 7.4 and 7.3,
N 7.1.3.3.2.1 Based on the assessment of the contamination respectively.
conditions, if cleaning or decontamination is not possible, then
the affected ensemble and ensemble elements shall be N 7.1.3.5 Products of Combustion Cleaning Actions.
condemned, retired, and disposed of as hazardous waste in
accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. N 7.1.3.5.1* Ensembles and ensemble elements that have been
exposed to products of combustion shall be subject to prelimi‐
N 7.1.3.3.2.2 Based on the assessment of the contamination nary exposure reduction as specified in Section 7.2 and isola‐
conditions, if cleaning or decontamination is considered possi‐ ted, tagged, and bagged at the incident scene.
ble, then the affected ensemble and ensemble elements shall
be subjected to specialized cleaning as specified in Section 7.5.
N 7.1.3.5.2* Following preliminary exposure reduction, ensem‐ N 7.2.2.5* Following dry or wet mitigation, ensemble or ensem‐
bles and ensemble elements shall be subject to advanced clean‐ ble elements shall be isolated and bagged. Where possible,
ing as specified in Section 7.3 as soon as possible following the ensemble or ensemble elements, even when bagged, shall not
event. be transported in the passenger areas of apparatus or personal
vehicles.
N 7.1.3.6 Special Provisions for Ensemble Elements. Where
elements of an ensemble are connected, the following proce‐ N 7.2.2.6 Following preliminary exposure reduction, the ensem‐
dures shall be used: ble or ensemble element(s) shall be subjected to the appropri‐
(1) When one element is connected to another element and ate cleaning procedures specified in Section 7.1.
they are not permanently attached to each other, individ‐ N 7.2.3 Additional Requirements for Preliminary Exposure
ual elements shall be disassembled from each other prior Reduction of Hood Interface Components. Following each
to beginning the cleaning process of elements and all structural fire or emergency service use, hood interface compo‐
disassembled elements shall undergo a separate cleaning nents shall be subjected to preliminary exposure reduction and
(2)
process.
When one element is connected to another element and
they are not permanently attached to each other and are
subsequently disassembled from each other prior to
advanced cleaning as specified in Section 7.3.
N 7.2.4* Additional Requirements for Preliminary Exposure
Reduction of Eye and Face Protection Components. After
L Y
beginning the cleaning process, they shall be reassembled
prior to any return to service in a like manner to their
original manufactured state.
7.2* Preliminary Exposure Reduction.
cleaned.
O
ted to preliminary exposure reduction and wiped off and N
each use, eye and face protection components that are provi‐
ded as part of the helmet or as separate devices shall be subjec‐
N 7.2.1 General.
N 7.2.1.1* Organizations shall include preliminary exposure
S E
7.2.5 Additional Requirements for Preliminary Exposure
Reduction of Proximity Fire-Fighting Ensembles and Ensemble
Elements. During preliminary exposure reduction, the use of
a brush or any other abrasive cleaning devices on radiant
U
reduction as part of their overall program for the care and
maintenance of structural fire-fighting ensembles and ensem‐ reflective outer shells and other components of proximity fire-
ble elements and proximity fire-fighting ensembles and ensem‐ fighting protective ensembles and ensemble elements shall not
ble elements.
7.2.1.2* Organizations shall be responsible for implementing
preliminary exposure reduction procedures on scene for
A
•
L
be permitted.
Δ 7.3 Advanced Cleaning.
7.3.1 Advanced cleaning shall be performed by an element
•
ensemble and ensemble elements.
7.2.2 Preliminary Exposure Reduction Procedures.
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U manufacturer verified in cleaning, a verified cleaner, a
manufacturer-trained organization, a verified organization, or a
I
verified ISP.
7.2.2.1* End users shall carry out preliminary exposure reduc‐
N 7.3.1.1 In the absence of a method to verify effectiveness of
dent where their protective ensemble or ensemble elements
could have become soiled or contaminated. V
tion immediately after exiting the emergency scene at any inci‐
I
cleaning, manufacturers of certified ensembles and ensemble
elements shall be permitted to provide advanced cleaning.
D
7.2.2.2* Upon exiting the emergency scene, the end user shall 7.3.1.2 The member(s) of the organization who has received
training in the advanced cleaning of the ensembles or ensem‐
IN
remain on self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) air.
ble elements shall be responsible for performing, managing, or
7.2.2.3 If returning to the emergency scene after an air cylin‐ coordinating advanced cleaning or the advanced cleaning
der change, any dry debris shall be brushed off the helmet, process.
•
R
facepiece, and SCBA prior to changing out the cylinder.
N 7.3.1.3* Training shall meet the requirements specified in
N 7.2.2.4* If the end user is completing their time on scene, dry 4.2.4.5.
O
or wet mitigation techniques shall be conducted prior to the
removal of any ensemble or ensemble elements.
F
N 7.2.2.4.1* The dry mitigation techniques shall be performed
by brushing debris from the exterior of ensembles and ensem‐
N 7.3.2 If the organization is a verified organization, it shall be
permitted to determine the level of training that is needed for
carrying out the advanced cleaning.
Δ 7.3.3* Ensembles and ensemble elements that are soiled or
ble elements with a soft bristle brush prior to removal.
contaminated shall receive advanced cleaning.
7.2.2.4.2* The wet mitigation techniques shall be performed
by gently rinsing the exterior of ensembles and ensemble N 7.3.3.1 Ensembles or ensemble elements that have been
elements using low-pressure and low-volume flow water. exposed to blood or other body fluids shall be subjected to
sanitization or disinfection prior to advanced cleaning as speci‐
N 7.2.2.4.2.1 A mild detergent shall be permitted to be used to fied in Section 7.4.
aid in the wet mitigation technique, followed by gentle rinsing.
N 7.3.3.2 Advanced cleaning shall be permitted prior to sanitiza‐
N 7.2.2.4.2.2 Heavy scrubbing or spraying with high-velocity tion or disinfection if the procedures for advanced cleaning
water jets such as a power washer shall not be used. have proven effective for sanitization or disinfection of the
• ensemble or ensemble elements.
N 7.2.2.4.3 If used in combination, dry mitigation shall precede
wet mitigation. N 7.3.3.3 Ensembles or ensemble elements that have been
exposed to bulk chemicals, unusual biological contaminants,
asbestos, or other substances of a highly hazardous or unusual (1)* The washer/extractor shall not be overloaded or under
nature shall be subjected to specialized cleaning as specified in loaded.
Section 7.5 in lieu of advanced cleaning. (2)* Heavily soiled or spotted areas shall be pretreated.
(3) All closures, including pocket closures, hooks and loops,
N 7.3.3.3.1 Advanced cleaning shall only be applied for the snaps, zippers, and hooks and dees, shall be fastened.
contaminants described in 7.3.3.3 if known to be effective for (4)* Water temperature shall not exceed 40°C (105°F).
removing the specific contaminants. (5)* The specific formulation for the washer/extractor shall
7.3.4* Where not subjected to prior advanced cleaning, include a series of steps for filling the wash basket, adding
ensembles and ensemble elements that are issued and used detergent, performing multiple rinses, and including
shall receive advanced cleaning at least every six months, result‐ separate extractions between wash and rinse steps.
ing in a minimum of two advanced cleanings in a 12-month (6) The element shall be inspected and rewashed if neces‐
period, with one of these advanced cleanings occurring at the sary.
time of annual advanced inspection. Δ 7.3.10* Drying Procedures.
•
7.3.5* Where the use of machine cleaning is specified for
ensembles and ensemble elements, advanced cleaning shall be
conducted using a washer/extractor with the following charac‐
N 7.3.10.1 Ensembles and ensemble elements shall be dried
using one of the following procedures in:
L Y
teristics unless specifically prohibited:
(1) The washer/extractor shall be programmable to permit
multiple formulations for adjustments of detergent appli‐
cation, water temperature, water level, cycle type/func‐
(1)* Air drying, as follows:
with good ventilation. N

(a)* Place ensembles or ensemble elements in an area
O
(b)* Do not dry ensembles or ensemble elements in
E
tion, and cycle time. direct or indirect sunlight, under fluorescent light,
(2)* The washer/extractor shall not have a g-force that or under UV light.
exceeds 100 G or shall have the capability of drum revolu‐
tions per minute (RPM) adjustment such that the g-force
can be adjusted to not exceed 100 G for all washed
ensembles and ensemble elements.
U
40°C (105°F).
S
(c) Do not allow the area used for drying to exceed
(2)* A drying cabinet, as follows:

(1) Place ensembles or ensemble elements in the
N 7.3.6* Top-loading washing machines with or without a center
post agitator shall not be used for advanced cleaning of ensem‐
bles and ensemble elements or components.
A L (2)
drying cabinet to allow good air circulation between
each ensemble or ensemble element.
Use a specific drying time and drying temperature
to provide sufficient drying of the ensembles or
N 7.3.6.1* Before using any cleaning device other than a
washer/extractor, the element manufacturer, verified cleaner,
or verified ISP shall be contacted for instructions on how to
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U (3)
ensemble elements.
Do not allow the area used for drying to exceed
40°C (105°F).
best clean the ensemble(s) or ensemble element(s) using the
respective cleaning device.
V I N 7.3.10.2* When machine drying is used, the following proce‐

dures shall be followed:
ensemble element.
D I
N 7.3.7 Detergents and other cleaning or pretreatment chemi‐
cals used in the advanced cleaning of ensembles and ensemble
elements shall be appropriate for the respective ensemble or
(1)
(2)
The recommended capacity of the machine shall not be
exceeded.
All closures, including pocket closures, hooks and loops,
IN
snaps, zippers, and hooks and dees, shall be fastened. A
N 7.3.7.1 Chlorine bleach, chlorinated solvents, or solvents shall hook that is not part of a closure shall be covered with a
not be used without the ensemble or ensemble element manu‐ piece of loop.
(3)* A “no heat” or “air dry” option shall be used, if available.
R
facturer’s or verified ISP’s approval. (See A.7.3.6.1.)
(4)* In the absence of a “no heat” or “air dry” option, the
N 7.3.7.2* For advanced cleaning, a mild detergent with a pH basket temperature shall not exceed 40°C (105°F).
F O
range of not less than 6.0 pH and not greater than 10.5 pH as
indicated on the product safety data sheet (SDS) or original
product container shall be used.
N 7.3.7.3* Selected detergents and cleaning agents shall not
(5)*
(6)*
The use of a heat cycle shall be discontinued prior to the
removal of all moisture from the ensembles or ensemble
elements.
The remainder of the drying process shall be accom‐
plished by a “no heat” machine setting or removal of the
knowingly cause significant long-term degradation of ensemble
or ensemble element performance when applied at the expec‐ ensembles or ensemble elements from the machine dryer
ted cleaning frequency over the service life of the ensemble or to air dry.
ensemble element. N 7.3.10.3 Ensembles or ensemble elements that are not
N 7.3.7.4* Any testing used in the evaluation of the cleaning completely dry shall not be returned to service.
effectiveness of specific ensembles or ensemble elements 7.3.11 Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of
subjected to advanced cleaning procedures shall account for Garment Elements.
both contaminated and cleaned sample analyses.
N 7.3.11.1 Garment elements shall be subjected to advanced
N 7.3.8* Universal precautions shall be applied in the washing cleaning using a washer/extractor with an appropriate formu‐
of all soiled or contaminated ensembles or ensemble elements. lation.
Δ 7.3.9 Where machine washing with a washer/extractor is N 7.3.11.1.1 A top loading washing machine or utility sink shall
specified, the following procedures shall be used: not be used for advanced cleaning.
N 7.3.11.1.2 Separate washer/extractor formulations shall be (3) The individual shall use a soft bristle brush to reach
permitted for garment outer shells and liners. [See A.7.3.9(5).] between components and scrub both the exterior and
interior of the helmet.
N 7.3.11.2* Where the shells and liners of protective garment (4) The helmet shall be thoroughly rinsed following washing.
elements are separable, those components shall be cleaned (5) Following rinsing, the helmet shall be air dried. It shall be
only with similar components. permitted to use a soft towel to aid in drying the helmet
N 7.3.11.2.1 Heavily soiled outer shells shall be permitted to be after cleaning.
pretreated by soaking in an appropriate solution of detergent N 7.3.12.5 Attached faceshields shall be hand washed with a soft
and water. cloth.
N 7.3.11.2.2 Separable liner systems shall be oriented such that Δ 7.3.13 Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of
the moisture barrier is on the inside for advanced cleaning for Glove Elements.
both laundering and drying.
N 7.3.11.2.3 Separate washer/extractor formulations shall be
permitted for washing garment shells versus garment liners.
N 7.3.11.3 All closures, including pocket closures, hooks and
N 7.3.13.1* Gloves shall not be machine dried using equipment
that produces mechanical action by tumbling or agitation.
N 7.3.13.2 Unless otherwise specified, gloves shall be hand
L Y
loops, snaps, zippers, and hooks and dees, shall be fastened.
7.3.11.4 If the coat element has a drag rescue device (DRD)
and the DRD is removable, the DRD shall be permitted to be
laundered with the coat shell or coat liner.
using the following procedures:
(1)
O N
washed in a utility sink or other container of sufficient size
The individual washing the gloves shall observe universal

precautions and shall put on a pair of examination
E
gloves, an apron and protective sleeves or coveralls, and a
N 7.3.11.4.1 Where recommended as being washed separately, pair of safety glasses or goggles.
S
removable DRDs shall be placed in a separate mesh bag for (2)* The utility sink shall be filled with warm water at tempera‐
advanced cleaning. ture no warmer than 40°C (105°F) and a mild detergent
U
having a pH of not less than 6.0 or more than 10.5 at the
N 7.3.11.4.2 DRDs placed in mesh bags shall be permitted to be detergent manufacturer’s recommended ratio of deter‐
washed with garment outer shells. gent to water.
•
N 7.3.11.5 If the garment includes fall protection components,
and the fall protection components are removable, the fall
protection components shall be removed prior to advanced
A L
(3) The individual shall then don the fire-fighting gloves over
the examination gloves and shall briskly rub the gloves
together, ensuring the cleaning of all surfaces. A soft bris‐
U
tle brush shall be permitted to scrub the exterior of the
cleaning. gloves.
D
N 7.3.11.5.1 If the fall protection components also require (4)* The individual shall then remove the fire-fighting gloves
cleaning, the fall protection components shall be cleaned sepa‐
rately according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
V I and refill the utility sink with clean water.

(5) The interior and exterior of the gloves shall be thor‐
oughly rinsed with clean water.
Helmet Elements.
D I
7.3.12 Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of
7.3.12.1* Detachable or separate components, such as ear

(6) Gloves shall not be wrung out, but instead slightly
squeezed to remove excess water.
(7)* Gloves shall be dried using ambient or slightly raised
temperatures no warmer than 40°C (105°F). Equipment
IN
covers, suspensions covers, and goggles, shall be removed from
the helmet and shall be washed and dried separately. that provides airflow into the interiors of gloves shall be
permitted to aid the faster drying of gloves.
N 7.3.12.2* Detachable components that are textile based shall
Δ 7.3.14 Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of
R
either be separately hand washed or washed in a washer/
extractor with other components such as garments or hoods as Footwear Elements.
O
specified in 7.3.11. N 7.3.14.1* Footwear shall not be machine cleaned or dried
using equipment that produces mechanical action by tumbling
F
7.3.12.3 Helmets shall not be machine cleaned or dried using
equipment that produces mechanical action by tumbling or or agitation.
agitation. N 7.3.14.2 Unless otherwise specified, footwear shall be hand
N 7.3.12.4* Unless otherwise specified, helmets shall be hand washed in a utility sink or other container of sufficient size
washed in a utility sink using the following procedures: using the following procedures:
(1) The individual washing the helmet shall observe universal (1) The individual washing the footwear shall observe univer‐
precautions and put on a pair of examination gloves, an sal precautions and put on a pair of examination gloves,
apron and protective sleeves or coveralls, and a pair of an apron and protective sleeves or coveralls, and a pair of
safety glasses or goggles. safety glasses or goggles.
(2)* The utility sink shall be filled with warm water at tempera‐ (2)* The utility sink shall be filled with warm water at a
ture no warmer than 40°C (105°F) and a mild detergent temperature no warmer than 40°C (105°F) and a mild
having a pH of not less than 6.0 or more than 10.5 at the detergent having a pH of not less than 6.0 or more than
detergent manufacturer’s recommended ratio of deter‐ 10.5 at the detergent manufacturer’s recommended ratio
gent to water. of detergent to water.
(3)* The individual shall first scrub the interior of the foot‐
wear with a soft bristle brush.
(4) The individual shall then scrub the exterior of the foot‐ Δ 7.3.16.2 Outer shell and other radiant reflective components
wear with a soft bristle brush, ensuring the cleaning of all of proximity fire-fighting protective ensembles and ensemble
exterior surfaces. elements shall be cleaned in accordance with the following:
(5) The interior and exterior of the footwear shall be thor‐ (1) They shall not be cleaned with a brush or other abrasive
oughly rinsed with clean water. cleaning devices.
(6)* In the absence of specialized drying equipment, the foot‐ (2) They shall not be machine washed or dried.
wear shall be suspended upside down to dry, with atten‐ (3) They shall be wiped with a moist soft cloth or sponge.
tion that water runoff does not create a slip hazard. (4) They shall be hung without any folding of the shell and
(7) If specified by the manufacturer, a sealant, conditioning, air dried without any mechanical action.
or polish shall be applied to leather footwear after the •
footwear has completely dried. 7.3.17 Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of
Ensembles Certified to the Optional Liquid and Particulate
Δ 7.3.15 Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of Contaminant Protection Requirements of NFPA 1971. The
Y
Hood Elements. manufacturer shall be consulted to determine if any special
handling procedures or the removal of interface components
L
N 7.3.15.1 Hoods shall be permitted to be hand or machine
washed, independently or with garment liners, as allowed by or other components must be undertaken prior to advanced
cleaning.
N
the hood manufacturer. The hood manufacturer’s instructions
shall be consulted for further cleaning instructions. •
N 7.4 Disinfection or Sanitization and Biological Decontamina‐
N 7.3.15.2 If hoods are hand washed in a utility sink or other
suitable container, hoods shall not be wrung out to dry, but
tion.
O
N 7.4.1 Processes for disinfecting or sanitizing, cleaning, and
E
instead slightly squeezed to remove excess water after rinsing. decontaminating protective ensembles and ensemble elements
N 7.3.15.3 Hoods shall be permitted to be air dried or machine that have been contaminated with body fluids and other poten‐
dried.
N 7.3.15.4 Special care shall be applied to the advanced clean‐
ing of particulate-blocking hoods. Advanced cleaning of
U S
tially infectious materials shall be performed by a manufacturer
verified in cleaning, a verified cleaner, a manufacturer-trained
organization, a verified organization, or a verified ISP.
L
particulate-blocking hoods shall be in accordance with proce‐
dures provided by the manufacturer. cleaning, manufacturers of certified protective ensembles and
A
ensemble elements shall be permitted to perform disinfection
N 7.3.15.5 Where hoods are subjected to hand cleaning and or sanitization and biological decontamination.
unless otherwise specified, hoods shall be hand washed in a
utility sink or other container of sufficient size using the follow‐
ing procedures:
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U N 7.4.2* Organizations and other facilities that engage in disin‐
fection or sanitization and biological decontamination of
protective ensembles and ensemble elements contaminated
(1)
I
The individual washing the hood shall observe universal
precautions and put on a pair of examination gloves, an
V
apron and protective sleeves or coveralls, and a pair of
with body fluids and other potentially infectious materials shall
comply with the applicable regulations in 29 CFR 1910.1030,
(2)
safety glasses or goggles.
I
The utility sink shall be filled with warm water at tempera‐
D
ture no warmer than 40°C (105°F) and a mild detergent
having a pH of not less than 6.0 or more than 10.5 at the
“Bloodborne Pathogens.”
N 7.4.3* Protective ensembles and ensemble elements that are
contaminated with body fluids and other potentially infectious
materials shall be subject to either disinfection or sanitization.
IN
detergent manufacturer’s recommended ratio of deter‐
gent to water. N 7.4.3.1 If not already part of an advanced cleaning process,
(3) After allowing the hood to presoak for a period of at least disinfection or sanitization shall be followed by advanced clean‐
R
10 minutes, the individual shall lightly rub the hood ing depending on the type of disinfection or sanitization, the
material together, starting with the exterior and then cleaning agents and processes that are available, and the type
and composition of the ensemble or ensemble element.
F (4)
O turning the hood inside out and similarly rubbing the
material against itself. A soft wash cloth shall be permitted
for washing the hoods.
Stretching or wringing the hood out shall be avoided
during hand washing.
N 7.4.3.2* Disinfectants and sanitizers shall be registered with
the EPA for efficacy for hard surfaces or fabrics and textiles,
whichever is applicable.
(5) The hood shall be thoroughly rinsed following washing. N 7.4.3.3* Where disinfectants and sanitizers are used, they shall
(6) Following rinsing, if using air drying, the hood shall be not degrade the performance properties of the protective
air dried by laying on a drying rack or other surface that ensemble or ensemble elements.
helps promote draining of water from the hood. N 7.4.3.4 Disinfectants and sanitizers shall be used in accord‐
7.3.16 Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of ance with the instructions provided by the supplier.
Proximity Fire-Fighting Ensembles and Ensemble Elements. N 7.4.3.5* It shall be permitted to include disinfection or sani‐
N 7.3.16.1 Except as noted in 7.3.16.2, proximity fire-fighting tization as part of the advanced cleaning process only when its
protective ensembles and ensemble elements shall be cleaned effectiveness has been demonstrated as providing the disinfec‐
in accordance with the same requirements as non-proximity tion or sanitization required for the specific ensemble or
fire-fighting protective ensembles and ensemble elements. ensemble element.
N 7.4.3.6* In cases where the area of contamination is limited
and clearly visible, spot sanitization or disinfection followed by
spot cleaning shall be permitted for the sanitization or disinfec‐ N 7.4.7.2 Subsequent advanced cleaning of footwear following
tion of the affected contaminated area of the ensemble or their sanitization shall meet the requirements specified in
ensemble element. 7.3.14.
N 7.4.4 Additional Requirements for Sanitization and Cleaning N 7.4.8 Additional Requirements for Sanitization and Cleaning
of Garment Elements. of Hood Elements.
N 7.4.4.1* Garment elements shall be subjected to a minimum N 7.4.8.1* Hoods shall be sanitized as specified in 7.4.4 for
of sanitization. garment elements.
N 7.4.4.2 The sanitizer or process used for the sanitization of the N 7.4.8.2 Subsequent advanced cleaning of hoods following
garment element shall meet the verification testing require‐ their sanitization shall meet the requirements specified in
ments in 11.3.7.5. 7.3.15.
N 7.4.4.3* Handling of garment elements shall be kept to a N 7.4.9 Additional Requirements for Sanitization and Cleaning
minimum prior to sanitization.
N 7.4.4.4 Where specific components such as the DRD or fall
protection devices are provided as part of garment elements,
of Proximity Fire-Fighting Ensembles and Ensemble Elements.
N 7.4.9.1 Any sanitizer or process used for sanitization shall not
degrade the radiant reflective outer shell or other radiant
L Y
these items shall only be removed from the garment if their
presence will interfere with the sanitization process.
N 7.4.4.5 Advanced cleaning procedures that are used in
conjunction with or that follow sanitization for removal of soils
N
reflective elements of the ensemble or ensemble elements.
O
N 7.4.9.2 Any additional cleaning of proximity fire-fighting
ensembles and ensemble elements shall meet the requirements
specified in 7.3.16.
associated with body fluids or other infectious materials shall
meet the applicable garment requirements specified in
Section 7.3.
S E
N 7.4.9.3 Nonreflective portions of the ensemble or ensemble
elements shall be treated as specified in 7.4.4.
U
N 7.4.4.6 Advanced cleaning or specialized cleaning shall be N 7.4.10 Additional Requirements for Sanitization and Cleaning
performed after sanitization. of Ensembles and Ensemble Elements Certified to the
Optional Liquid and Particulate Contaminant Protection
N 7.4.4.6.1 Advanced cleaning shall be permitted prior to sani‐
tization or disinfection if the procedures for advanced cleaning
have proven effective for sanitization or disinfection of the
A L
Requirements of NFPA 1971. The manufacturer shall be
consulted to determine if any special handling procedures exist
for the sanitization or disinfection and subsequent cleaning of
U
ensemble or ensemble elements. the elements of the protective ensemble or ensemble element.
N 7.4.5 Additional Requirements for Disinfection or Sanitization N 7.5 Specialized Cleaning.
and Cleaning of Helmet Elements.
N 7.4.5.1* Detachable or separate components shall be removed
I D N 7.5.1 Specialized cleaning of protective ensembles and ensem‐
ble elements shall be performed by a manufacturer verified in
from the helmet and shall be sanitized or disinfected sepa‐
rately.
I V cleaning, a manufacturer-trained organization, a verified
organization, a verified cleaner, or a verified ISP.
D
N 7.4.5.2 Detachable components that are textile based shall be
sanitized as specified in 7.4.4 for garment elements.
cleaning for specific types of soils or contaminants, manufac‐
IN
turers of certified ensembles or ensemble elements shall be
N 7.4.5.3* Hard surface components of the helmet shall be permitted to perform specialized cleaning.
subject to disinfection using an appropriate disinfection proc‐
ess. N 7.5.2* Organizations shall employ specialized cleaning when
O R
N 7.4.5.4 Subsequent advanced cleaning of helmets following
their disinfection or sanitization shall meet the requirements
specified in 7.3.12.
the ensemble or ensemble elements cannot be adequately
cleaned with advanced cleaning.
N 7.5.2.1 Organizations shall apply disinfection or sanitization in
F
N 7.4.6 Additional Requirements for Sanitization and Cleaning
of Glove Elements.
N 7.4.6.1* Sanitizers or processes for sanitization of gloves shall
be selected as appropriate for the materials used in the
accordance with Section 7.4 with specialized cleaning for the
removal of body fluids or other infectious materials that cannot
be removed using disinfection or sanitization with advanced
cleaning.
N 7.5.3* Organizations shall designate any specific substances or
construction of the glove. contaminants that warrant specialized cleaning and shall deter‐
N 7.4.6.2 Subsequent advanced cleaning of gloves following mine specific approaches for decontamination for these
their sanitization shall meet the requirements specified in substances, if warranted.
7.3.13. N 7.5.4 Organizations shall rely on expertise from hazardous
N 7.4.7 Additional Requirements for Sanitization and Cleaning materials teams, infection control specialists, verified independ‐
of Footwear Elements. ent service providers, or other individuals knowledgeable for
the type of contaminant and how it can be removed from
N 7.4.7.1* Sanitizers or processes for sanitization of footwear protective clothing and equipment.
shall be selected as appropriate for the materials used in the
construction of the footwear. N 7.5.4.1 The expertise described in 7.5.4 shall be relied upon
for determining whether the type of contamination can be
REPAIR 1851-29
effectively removed and for determining the procedures to be 8.1.3 Ensembles or ensemble elements shall be subjected to
used for the removal of the specific contaminant(s), if applica‐ advanced cleaning, when necessary, before any repair work is
ble. undertaken. Ensembles contaminated by CBRN terrorism
agents shall be immediately retired after CBRN exposure is
N 7.5.4.2 Where deemed appropriate for the purpose of special‐ confirmed and shall not be reused.
ized cleaning of garment elements, a maximum washer/extrac‐
tor water temperature shall be permitted to be 60°C (140°F) Δ 8.1.4* All repairs and alterations to the ensemble or ensemble
for those ensembles or ensemble elements that are specified element shall be done in a manner and using like materials
for advanced cleaning using a washer/extractor. [See and components that are compliant with NFPA 1971.
A.7.3.9(4).]
8.1.5 Due to the different methods of construction, the
N 7.5.4.3 Where it is determined that the contaminant(s) ensemble or ensemble element manufacturer shall be contac‐
cannot be sufficiently removed, the ensembles or ensemble ted if the organization or verified ISP is unsure of whether a
elements shall be condemned and disposed of in accordance repair can be accomplished without adversely affecting the
with federal, state, and local regulations for the handling and
disposal of hazardous materials.
N 7.5.4.4* Where it is determined that the contaminant(s) can
integrity of the ensemble or ensemble element.
8.1.6 Replacement interface components shall be installed in
a manner consistent with the ensemble or ensemble element
L Y
be sufficiently removed, specific procedures shall be conducted
for cleaning, treating, or decontaminating the contaminated
ensembles or ensemble elements based on one of the follow‐
ing:
manufacturer’s method of construction.
Element Repair.
O N
8.2 Requirements for Both Basic and Advanced Garment
E
(1) Evidence is provided from a documented source that the 8.2.1 All repairs and alterations shall be performed in the
applied procedures have shown effectiveness in the past same manner and using like materials as the garment element
(2)
under similar exposure circumstances and contamination
conditions.
Testing of the contaminated clothing items is performed
that provides detailed results showing the absence of any
U S
manufacturer, including, but not limited to, fabric, thread type,
seam construction, hardware, and hardware backing, unless
approved by the garment element manufacturer.
8.2.2 Repairs shall be made to all components and to all layers
residual contamination or showing levels of contaminants
that are deemed to be safe.
N 7.5.4.5* Any testing procedures that are used for assessing
A L
of the composite that have been damaged or that have been
affected by the repair.
Δ 8.2.3 Repairs of minor tears, char marks, ember burns, and
U
residual levels of contamination shall be specific to the contam‐ abraded areas shall be limited to those where the damaged
inants of concern and shall be performed by a laboratory that
area can be covered by a maximum 160 cm2 (25 in.2) patch of
D
is accredited for the specific types of analysis carried out on the
the same material that is compliant with NFPA 1971. For any
ensembles or ensemble elements.
V I
N 7.5.4.6 When specialized cleaning is applied for the cleaning
tears, char marks, ember burns, and abraded areas that require
a patch larger than 160 cm2 (25 in.2), the manufacturer or the
D I
of ensembles or ensemble elements involving highly hazardous
contaminants, consideration should be given to the disposition
of the effluent from the cleaning process and whether disposal
into the local sewer system is acceptable according to federal,
verified ISP, in conjunction with the organization, shall be
consulted.
8.2.3.1 The finished edges of the patch shall extend at least
25 mm (1 in.) in all directions beyond the damaged area.
IN
state, and local regulations.
8.2.3.2 To prevent fraying, the patch shall have no raw edges.
Chapter 8 Repair Δ 8.2.3.3 Where tears, holes, or abrasions are being repaired,
O R
8.1 Requirements for All Ensembles and Ensemble Elements.
Δ 8.1.1 All repairs shall be performed by the original manufac‐
the damaged areas shall be mended using flame-resistant (FR)
thread that is compliant with NFPA 1971 to prevent further
damage prior to application of the patch.
F Δ 8.2.3.4 Where moisture barrier tears, holes, or abrasions are

turer, a verified ISP, or a member of the organization who has
received training. being repaired, the repair tape shall be required to extend at
8.1.1.1 Training shall be provided by an element manufac‐ least 12.5 mm (1∕2 in.) in all directions beyond the edge of the
turer of the same element type or by a verified ISP in the repair repaired damage. Where the moisture barrier has a hole or
of ensembles or ensemble elements. abrasion measuring more than 12.5 mm (1∕2 in.) in diameter in
any direction or a tear greater than 75 mm (3 in.) in length, a
8.1.1.2 Requirements for garment element repair shall be patch consisting of the same moisture barrier fabric shall be
specified in Sections 8.2 through 8.4. used for repair. Where a moisture barrier manufacturer
provides repair tape in various sizes, it shall be permitted to be
8.1.2 The member(s) of the organization who has received
used for the repair.
training in the repair of the ensembles or ensemble elements
shall be responsible for performing or managing repairs.
8.2.4* Replacement hardware shall be installed in a manner contacted if the organization is unsure as to whether an area to
consistent with the garment element manufacturer’s method of be repaired contains a moisture barrier.
construction.
8.4.4* Repairs to garment thermal liners shall be permitted
8.2.4.1 When hardware is replaced, the reinforcement back‐ provided the repair does not result in any stitching through the
ing material shall be reinstalled or, if it is no longer serviceable, moisture barrier.
the backing material shall be replaced.
8.4.5* Due to labeling requirements, as well as the complexity
8.2.5 If the complexity of the repair is uncertain, the garment and specialized equipment needed to replace entire garment
element manufacturer shall be consulted. element component layers (e.g., the outer shell, moisture
barrier, or thermal liner), only the garment element manufac‐
8.2.6 Replacement visibility markings shall be installed in a turer or the garment element manufacturer’s designated veri‐
manner consistent with the garment element manufacturer’s fied ISP shall replace entire garment component layers.
method of construction, unless an alternative method is
approved by the garment element manufacturer.
8.2.6.1 Visibility markings being replaced shall be completely
removed so that no new visibility marking is sewn over an older
8.4.6 Restitching of more than 25 mm continuous (1 in.
continuous) of a Major A seam shall require consulting the
garment element manufacturer and shall be conducted in a
manner consistent with the garment element manufacturer’s
L Y
sewn visibility marking. New visibility markings shall be permit‐
ted to be applied over older visibility markings by alternative
methods where approved by the garment manufacturer.
Δ 8.2.6.2 No repair or alteration shall result in the reduction of
methods.
O N
8.4.7 Repairs to Major B seams in the moisture barrier shall
require consulting the garment element manufacturer and
shall be conducted in a manner consistent with the barrier
E
the minimum required visibility marking pattern specified in manufacturer’s recommendations.
Section 6.2 of NFPA 1971.
8.2.6.3 Visibility marking patches that do not exceed 75 mm
(3 in.) in length shall be permitted. The visibility marking
patch shall extend 25 mm (1 in.) beyond the damaged area. A
maximum of two visibility marking patches per stripe shall be
U S
8.4.7.1 Repairs to Major B seams in the thermal liner that do
not affect any moisture barrier material shall be permitted.
Restitching of more than 25 mm continuous (1 in. continuous)
of any Major B seams shall require consulting the garment
L
element manufacturer and shall be conducted in a manner
permitted. consistent with the garment element manufacturer’s methods.
8.2.6.4 Where a repair or alteration necessitates replacing visi‐
bility markings, an equal amount of visibility markings shall be
installed.
U A 8.4.8* All repaired stress areas shall be reinforced in a manner

consistent with the garment element manufacturer’s methods.
8.4.9 If replacing trim necessitates sewing into a Major A
D
8.2.6.5 Where the complexity of the visibility marking repair is seam, trim replacement shall be conducted in a manner consis‐
uncertain, the garment element manufacturer shall be consul‐
ted.
V I tent with the garment element manufacturer’s methods.

8.4.10* Replacement zippers shall be installed in a manner
D I
8.3 Additional Requirements for Basic Garment Element
Repair. The repairs specified in this section shall be
performed by the element manufacturer, the organization,
manufacturer-trained organizations, verified organizations, or
consistent with the garment element manufacturer’s method of
construction. If the complexity of the repair is uncertain, the
garment element manufacturer shall be consulted.
IN
verified ISPs. Basic repairs shall be limited to the following: 8.4.11* Replacement hook-and-loop fastener tape shall be
(1) Patching of minor tears, char marks, and ember burns to installed in a manner consistent with the garment element
a separable outer shell manufacturer’s method of construction. If the complexity of
the repair is uncertain, the garment element manufacturer
R
(2) Repairing of skipped, broken, and missing stitches to a
separable outer shell shall be consulted.
O
(3) Replacement of missing hardware, excluding positive 8.4.12* Replacement reinforcement materials shall be in‐
closure systems to a separable outer shell stalled in a manner consistent with the garment element manu‐
(4)
F
Repair.
Reclosing of the liner of a garment after inspection
8.4 Additional Requirements for Advanced Garment Element
8.4.1* The repairs specified in this section shall be conducted

facturer’s method of construction.
8.5 Helmet Element Repair.
8.5.1 In addition to the requirements in Section 8.1, all
repairs to helmet components other than as specified herein
only by the element manufacturer, a verified organization, or a shall be performed in accordance with the helmet element
verified ISP meeting the requirements as specified in Chap‐ manufacturer’s instructions.
ter 11, Verification.
8.5.2* Where there is an indication of a crack, dent, abrasion,
8.4.2 Repairs to the garment outer shell shall be performed bubbling, soft spot, discoloration, or warping in the helmet
consistent with the garment element manufacturer’s methods. shell, the helmet element manufacturer shall be contacted to
The garment element manufacturer shall be contacted if the determine serviceability.
organization is unsure of the complexity of the repair.
8.4.3* All repairs to the garment moisture barrier shall be
performed consistent with the moisture barrier manufacturer’s
methods. The original garment element manufacturer shall be
RETIREMENT, DISPOSITION, AND SPECIAL INCIDENT PROCEDURE 1851-31
8.5.3 Small surface nicks shall be repaired in accordance with 9.1.6* Issued ensembles and ensemble elements shall not be
the helmet element manufacturer’s instructions. allowed in living quarters. Contaminated or soiled clothing
shall not be transported in the cab of fire department appara‐
8.5.4 Small scratches on the helmet shell shall be permitted to tus when not being worn for operational duties unless placed
be removed by using mildly abrasive compounds recommen‐ in an airtight protective case or bag to prevent cross contamina‐
ded by the helmet element manufacturer. tion. If placed in a protective case or bag, the ensemble(s) or
8.5.5 Helmet faceshield and goggle components that become ensemble element(s) shall be removed from such environ‐
cracked or badly scratched shall be replaced. ments as soon as possible following transport. Wet ensembles
or ensemble elements shall not be stored in a protective case or
8.6 Glove Element Repair. In addition to the requirements in bag used for transport.
Section 8.1, all repairs to glove components shall be performed
in accordance with the glove element manufacturer’s instruc‐ 9.1.7* Ensembles and ensemble elements shall not be stored
tions. in contact with contaminants such as, but not limited to, oils,
Y
solvents, acids, or alkalis.
8.7 Footwear Element Repair.
L
9.1.8 Proximity fire fighting protective coat and trouser
8.7.1 In addition to the requirements in Section 8.1, all elements shall be stored by hanging to limit the damage caused
repairs to footwear components shall be performed in accord‐
N
by creasing and shall not be stored folded.
ance with the footwear manufacturer’s instructions.
N 9.1.9 Eye and face protection shall be readily accessible to the
8.7.2 Other than for the replacement of bootlaces and zipper
assemblies, the footwear manufacturer shall be contacted to
determine feasibility of the repair.
as to prevent at least the following:
O
user and, when not in use, shall be stored in such a manner so
8.7.3 All replacement bootlaces and zippers shall be provided

by the footwear element manufacturer.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Thermal damage
Mechanical damage
S E
Hazardous materials contamination
U
8.8 Structural Fire Fighting Hood and Proximity Fire Fighting 9.1.10 Ensemble and ensemble element storage areas shall be
Helmet Overcover and Proximity Fire Fighting Shroud Repair. clean, dry, and well ventilated.
In addition to the requirements in Section 8.1, all repairs to
hoods, helmet covers, and proximity shrouds shall be
performed in accordance with the element manufacturers’
instructions. Repairs of these interface components containing
A L
Chapter 10 Retirement, Disposition, and Special Incident
Procedure
U
a particulate blocking layer shall not be undertaken unless
authorized by the manufacturer. 10.1 Retirement.
8.9 Additional Requirements for Structural Fire Fighting

Ensembles and Proximity Fire Fighting Ensembles with
I D 10.1.1* The organization shall develop specific criteria for
removal of structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
V
Optional Liquid and Particulate Contaminant Protection. In
elements from service, which includes, but is not limited to,
D I
addition to the requirements in Section 8.1, all repairs to
ensembles with optional liquid and particulate contaminant
protection shall be referred to the ensemble manufacturer.
issues that are specific to the ensembles or ensemble elements
being used by the organization, the manufacturer’s instruc‐
tions, and the experience of the organization.
IN
Chapter 9 Storage 10.1.2* Structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
elements shall be retired in accordance with 10.2.1 or 10.2.2,
9.1* All Ensembles and Ensemble Elements. no more than 10 years from the date the ensembles or ensem‐
R
ble elements were manufactured.
9.1.1* Ensembles or ensemble elements not in use shall not
be exposed to lighting that emits UV rays, including, but not 10.1.3 Proximity fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
F O
limited to, fluorescent lighting, direct sunlight, and indirect
sunlight.
9.1.2* Ensembles and ensemble elements shall be clean and
dry before storage.
elements shall be retired in accordance with 10.2.1 or 10.2.2,
no more than 10 years from the date the ensembles or ensem‐
ble elements were manufactured.
10.1.3.1* In all cases, the radiant reflective outer shell of the
garment element shall be replaced no more than 5 years from
9.1.3 Ensemble and ensemble elements shall not be stored in the date the ensembles or ensemble elements were manufac‐
airtight containers unless they are new and unissued. tured.
9.1.4* Ensembles and ensemble elements shall not be stored Δ 10.1.4* Structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
at temperatures below −32°C (−25°F) or above 82°C (180°F). elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
elements that are worn or damaged to the extent that the
9.1.5 Ensembles and ensemble elements shall not be stored or organization deems it not possible or cost effective to repair
transported in compartments or trunks with sharp objects, shall be retired in accordance with 10.2.1.
tools, or other equipment that could damage the ensembles or
ensemble elements. Where ensembles or ensemble elements 10.1.5* Structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
must be transported or stored in such environments, the elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
ensemble or element(s) shall be placed in a protective case or elements that were not in compliance with the edition of the
bag to prevent damage. applicable NFPA standard that was current when the ensembles
and ensemble elements were manufactured shall be retired in and ensemble elements shall be made by qualified
accordance with 10.2.1. members of the organization or by outside experts to
determine the condition thereof.
10.1.6 Structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles and ensemble 10.3.3 The organization shall determine a specific period of
elements that are contaminated to the extent that the organiza‐ time for retaining custody of structural fire fighting ensembles
tion deems it not possible or cost effective to clean them shall and ensemble elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles
be retired in accordance with 10.2.1. and ensemble elements.
10.1.7 Structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles and ensemble Chapter 11 Verification
elements that are contaminated by CBRN terrorism agents
shall be immediately retired as specified in 10.2.1 after 11.1 General.
confirmed exposure and shall not be reused.
10.1.8* Structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
elements that are no longer of use to the organization for
11.1.1 In order for an organization, ISP, cleaner, or manufac‐
turer to be verified, it shall meet the requirements of this chap‐
ter.
L Y
emergency operations service but are not contaminated, defec‐
tive, or damaged shall be retired in accordance with 10.2.1 or
10.2.2.
10.2 Disposition of Retired Elements.
Table 11.1.1.1.
O N
11.1.1.1* Verification of the organization or ISP shall include
advanced inspection, advanced cleaning, sanitization, and
advanced repairs of garment elements only as specified in
E
N 11.1.1.1.1 Cleaning and sanitization verification of the organi‐
10.2.1 Retired structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble zation or ISP shall not apply to helmet elements, glove
elements shall be destroyed or disposed of in a manner ensur‐
ing that they will not be used in any fire fighting or emergency
activities, including live fire training.
U S
elements, footwear elements, hood elements, or optional liquid
and particulate contaminant protective ensembles.
N 11.1.1.1.2 Cleaning and sanitization verification of cleaners
and manufacturers shall not apply to helmet elements, glove
10.2.2 Retired structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
elements determined to be no longer of use in accordance with
10.1.8 shall be permitted to be used as follows:
A L
elements, footwear elements, hood elements, or optional liquid
and particulate contaminant protective ensembles.
11.1.1.2 An organization or manufacturer shall be permitted
(1) For training that does not involve live fire, provided the
ensembles and ensemble elements are appropriately
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U to be verified for any combination of advanced cleaning, sani‐
tization, advanced inspection, and repairs.
(2)
marked as being for non–live fire training only
As determined by the organization
V I N 11.1.1.2.1 An ISP shall be verified for advanced cleaning, sani‐

tization, advanced inspection, and repairs but shall not be
permitted to be verified for advanced cleaning and advanced
10.3 Special Incident Procedure.
D I
10.3.1* The organization shall have procedures for the
handling and custody of structural fire fighting ensembles and
inspection only.
N 11.1.1.2.2 A cleaner shall only be verified for advanced clean‐
ing and sanitization of garment elements.
IN
ensemble elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles and
ensemble elements that were worn by fire fighters who were N 11.1.1.2.3 Manufacturers verified in cleaning shall be verified
victims at incidents where serious injuries or fatalities to the per the verified cleaner requirements in accordance with Table
fire fighters occurred. 11.1.1.1 and shall be permitted to perform advanced inspec‐
O R
10.3.2 In the absence of any other prevailing rules of
evidence, the organization’s procedures shall include at least
the following:
tion and advanced repair.
11.1.1.3 Where an organization or ISP is verified for conduct‐
ing repairs, the organization or ISP shall also be verified for
F
advanced cleaning, sanitization, and advanced inspection.
(1) Provisions shall be made for the immediate removal from
service and preservation of all structural fire fighting 11.1.1.4 The verified organization, verified ISP, manufacturer
ensembles and ensemble elements and proximity fire verified in cleaning, or verified cleaner shall be listed.
fighting ensembles and ensemble elements utilized by the
injured or deceased fire fighter. N 11.1.1.4.1 The listing shall specify the services the listee is veri‐
(2) Custody of such ensembles and ensemble elements shall fied to conduct.
be maintained at a secure location with controlled, docu‐ N 11.1.1.4.2 Repair categories shall be garment outer shell
mented access. repairs, garment moisture barrier repairs, and garment ther‐
(3) All such structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble mal barrier repairs.
elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles and
ensemble elements shall be nondestructively tagged and 11.1.1.5 Where the certification listing includes the moisture
stored only in paper or cardboard containers to prevent barrier repair category, the listing shall include the moisture
further degradation or damage. Plastic or airtight barrier manufacturer and trade name designation, and the
containers shall not be used. repair tape manufacturer and trade name or part number.
(4) Examination of the structural fire fighting ensembles and
ensemble elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles
VERIFICATION 1851-33
N Table 11.1.1.1 ISP and Organization Verification Designation Criteria
Function/Capability Verified ISP or Verified Organization Verified Cleaner

Advanced cleaning Required Required
Heavy metals cleaning ≥70% for each metal ≥70% for each metal
efficiency
Semivolatile organic ≥50% average of all compounds ≥50% average of all
compound cleaning compounds
efficiency
Biological sanitization 3 log reduction or better 3 log reduction or better
effectiveness —
Staphylococcus aureus
Biological sanitization
effectiveness — Klebsiella
pneumoniae
3 log reduction or better 3 log reduction or better
L Y
Advanced inspection
Advanced repair
All ensembles and ensemble
elements of structural and
proximity fire fighter protective
clothing
All ensembles and ensemble
Not allowed
No repairs allowed O N
elements capable of being
repaired for structural and
proximity fire fighter protective
S E
Advanced repairs for
moisture barriers
clothing that they have been
specifically verified to repair
ISPs have a choice of which
moisture barriers to verify
L U
Not allowed
Verification testing timing
Verification facility quality

review and inspection
Every two years, or when processes
change
Every six months
U A Every two years, or when

processes change
Every six months
I
Δ 11.1.2 All verification of the organization, ISP, manufacturer D effective date for the 2020 edition, with the exception of the
I V
verified in cleaning, or verified cleaner shall be performed by a
certification organization that meets at least the requirements
specified in Section 11.2 and that is accredited for personal
requirements for demonstrating cleaning and sanitization
effectiveness specified in 11.3.7.
D
protective equipment (PPE) in accordance with ISO/IEC
17065, Conformity assessment — Requirements for bodies certifying
11.2 Verification Program.
IN
11.2.1* The certification organization shall not be owned or
products, processes and services. The accreditation shall be issued controlled by the organization or the ISP being verified.
by an accreditation body operating in accordance with ISO
17011, Conformity assessment — General requirements for accredita‐ 11.2.2 The certification organization shall be primarily
R
tion bodies accrediting conformity assessment bodies. engaged in certification work and shall not have a monetary
interest in the organization’s, ISP’s, or manufacturer’s ultimate
11.1.3 The verified organization, verified ISP, manufacturer
O
profitability.
verified in cleaning, or verified cleaner shall not use the NFPA
Δ 11.2.3 The certification organization shall be accredited for
F
name or the name or identification of this standard,
NFPA 1851, in any statements about its services unless the serv‐ PPE in accordance with ISO/IEC 17065, Conformity assessment –
ices are verified as compliant to this standard. Requirements for bodies certifying products, processes and services. The
accreditation shall be issued by an accreditation body operating
11.1.3.1* No provider of the services covered by this standard in accordance with ISO 17011, Conformity assessment — General
shall claim to be an ISP, a verified ISP, a verified organization, a requirements for accreditation bodies accrediting conformity assessment
manufacturer verified in cleaning, or a verified cleaner unless bodies.
they comply with all of the requirements in this standard and
are third-party verified in accordance with the requirements of 11.2.4 The certification organization shall refuse to verify serv‐
this chapter. ices to this standard that do not comply with all applicable
requirements of this standard.
11.1.4 The certification organization shall not issue any new
verifications to the 2014 edition of NFPA 1851 on or after the 11.2.5* The contractual provisions between the certification
NFPA effective date for the 2020 edition. organization and the organization, the ISP, or the manufac‐
turer shall specify that verification is contingent on compliance
11.1.5 Organizations, ISPs, or manufacturers verified to the with all applicable requirements of this standard.
2014 edition of NFPA 1851 shall undergo verification to the
2020 edition of NFPA 1851 within 12 months of the NFPA
11.2.6 The certification organization shall not offer or confer 11.3.3 The certification organization’s testing laboratory’s
any conditional or temporary verification. scope of accreditation to ISO 17025, General requirements for the
competence of testing and calibration laboratories, shall encompass
Δ 11.2.7* The certification organization shall have laboratory testing of PPE.
facilities and equipment available for conducting proper tests
to determine compliance. 11.3.4 The accreditation of a certification organization’s test‐
ing laboratory shall be issued by an accreditation body operat‐
11.2.8 The certification organization’s laboratory facilities ing in accordance with ISO 17011, Conformity assessment —
shall have a program in place and functioning for calibration General requirements for accreditation bodies accrediting conformity
of all instruments, and procedures shall be in use to ensure assessment bodies.
proper control of all testing.
11.3.5 A certification organization shall be permitted to utilize
11.2.9 The certification organization’s laboratory facilities conditioning and testing results conducted by an organization
shall follow good practice regarding the use of laboratory or an ISP for verification, provided the organization or the ISP
manuals, form data sheets, documented calibration and cali‐
bration routines, performance verification, proficiency testing,
and staff qualification and training programs.
testing laboratory meets the requirements specified in 11.3.5.1
through 11.3.5.5.
11.3.5.1 Where an organization or an ISP provides condition‐
L Y
11.2.10 The certification organization shall require the organ‐
ization or the ISP to establish and maintain a quality manage‐
ment program that meets the requirements of Section 11.4.
11.2.11 The certification organization and the organization,
O N
ing and testing results to the certification organization, the
organization’s or ISP’s testing laboratory shall be accredited in
accordance with the requirements of ISO 17025, General require‐
ments for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories.
E
ISP, or manufacturer verified in cleaning shall evaluate any 11.3.5.2 The organization or ISP testing laboratory’s scope of
changes affecting function of the compliant services to deter‐ accreditation to ISO 17025, General requirements for the competence
mine continued certification to this standard.
Δ 11.2.12* The certification organization shall have a follow-up
inspection program of the facilities of the compliant services
with at least one random and unannounced visit in accordance
PPE.
U S
of testing and calibration laboratories, shall encompass testing of
11.3.5.3 The accreditation of an organization’s or ISP’s testing
L
laboratory shall be issued by an accreditation body operating in
with Table 11.1.1.1. accordance with ISO 17011, Conformity assessment — General
11.2.13 The certification organization shall be permitted to
conduct additional specific testing to verify continued compli‐
ance.
U A requirements for accreditation bodies accrediting conformity assessment

bodies.
11.3.5.4 The certification organization shall also approve the
organization’s or ISP’s testing laboratory.
ID
11.2.14 The certification organization’s operating procedures
shall provide a mechanism for the organization or the ISP to
appeal decisions. The procedures shall include the presenta‐
11.3.5.5 The certification organization shall determine the
level of supervision and witnessing of the conditioning and test‐
nated appeals panel.
V
tion of information from both sides of a controversy to a desig‐
I
ing for verification conducted at the organization’s or ISP’s
testing laboratory.
D
11.2.15 The certification organization shall be in a position to
use legal means to protect the integrity of its name. The name
11.3.6 Sampling levels for testing and inspection shall be
established by the certification organization and the organiza‐
IN
shall be registered and legally defended. tion or the ISP to ensure reasonable and acceptable reliability
N 11.2.16* The certification organization shall have a procedure at a reasonable and acceptable confidence level that repair
for investigating noncompliant verified cleaning or repairs that services are compliant to this standard, unless such sampling
O R
addresses complaints related to cleaning or repairs performed
by verified ISPs or verified organizations that are not in compli‐
ance with the requirements of this standard.
levels are specified herein.
11.3.7* For ISPs, cleaners, manufacturers, and organizations
that are subject to cleaning verification, the certification organ‐
F
N 11.2.16.1 Where a complaint of noncompliant cleaning or ization shall evaluate their advanced cleaning and sanitization
repairs for a verified ISP or verified organization is received by procedures in accordance with Sections 7.3 and 7.4.
the certification organization, the validity of the report shall be N 11.3.7.1 For verification of cleaning, the certification organi‐
investigated and, if necessary, corrective action shall be taken. zation shall evaluate the effectiveness of the ISP’s, cleaner’s,
11.3 Inspection and Testing. manufacturer’s, or organization’s cleaning processes against
the requirements specified in 11.3.7.3 and 11.3.7.4.
11.3.1 For verification of the compliant services, the certifica‐
tion organization shall conduct both inspection and testing as N 11.3.7.2 For verification of the ability to sanitize and clean
specified in this section. protective garments, the certification organization shall evalu‐
ate the effectiveness of the ISP’s, cleaner’s, manufacturer’s, or
11.3.2 All inspections, evaluations, conditioning, and testing organization’s sanitization processes against the requirement
for verification of the organization, ISP, verified cleaner, or specified in 11.3.7.5.
manufacturer verified in cleaning shall be conducted by a
certification organization’s testing laboratory that is accredited N 11.3.7.3 When tested for removal of selected products of
in accordance with the requirements of ISO 17025, General combustion as specified in Section 12.4, the cleaning process
requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories. shall provide for a 50 percent or greater cleaning efficiency for
the average of all surrogate heavy metal contaminants.
N 11.3.7.4 When tested for removal of selected products of Δ 11.3.9.2 For moisture barrier pinhole repairs, the certification
combustion as specified in Section 12.4, the cleaning process organization shall inspect the pinholes in the material(s) to be
shall provide for a 50 percent or greater average cleaning effi‐ repaired and shall witness the repair of the samples to be
ciency for the average of all surrogate semi-volatile organic tested. The pinholes shall be created in the material(s) by
compounds. using a size 8 gauge sewing needle to completely puncture the
moisture barrier five times in a 25 mm (1 in.) square located in
N 11.3.7.5 When tested for the neutralization and sanitization of the center of a 305 mm × 305 mm (12 in. × 12 in.) sample. The
biological contaminants as specified in Section 12.5, the sani‐ 1 in. square shall be clearly marked to identify the damaged
tization process shall provide for at least log103 reduction of area.
challenge microorganisms.
N 11.3.9.2.1 The damaged and repaired samples specified in
11.3.8 For verification of an organization’s or an ISP’s 11.3.9.1 and 11.3.9.2 shall be prepared for the conditioning
advanced inspection services, the certification organization specified in Table 11.3.9(c).
shall evaluate the organization’s or ISP’s procedures in accord‐
ance with Sections 6.3 and 6.4 of this standard.
11.3.9 For verification of an organization’s or an ISP’s repair
services, the following series of tests shall be required for each
N 11.3.9.2.2 Samples for conditioning shall be at least 305 mm
(12 in.) square and shall consist of a composite constructed
using a layer of 3.8 oz/yd2 ± 0.3 oz/yd2 aramid needle-punched
L Y
repair category for which the organization or the ISP is veri‐
fied. Testing shall be conducted using new materials as
outlined in Table 11.3.9(a) through Table 11.3.9(c). Initial
samples submitted by the organization or ISP for verification
O N
nonwoven material, quilted to 3.4 oz/yd2 ± 0.2 oz/yd2 aramid
woven plain weave thermal barrier material, and the repaired
moisture barrier layer. The two-layer composite shall be
stitched around the entire periphery in the orientation used in
a garment.
E
shall be permitted to be prepared by that organization or ISP.
N 11.3.9.2.3 The moisture barrier layer shall be removed from
11.3.9.1 For repairs to tears in the outer shell, moisture
barrier, and thermal barrier, the certification organization shall
inspect the tear in the material(s) to be repaired in accordance
with Figure 11.3.9.1 and shall witness the repair of the samples
to be tested.
U S
the two-layer composite samples after all conditioning has been
completed and shall become the moisture barrier specimen.
Δ Table 11.3.9(a) Outer Shell Repairs
A L
Who Makes
Repair Sample
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D
Material
U Test or Evaluation
I
Organization 5 ft felled seam Outer shell material(s) utilized NFPA 1971 — 7.1.13
5 ft overedge seam by the organization
Small tear patch
I V
Patched tear made from the
outer shell material utilized
NFPA 1851 — 8.2.3
ISP 5 ft felled seam

D by the organization
7.5 osy Nomex IIIa plain weave NFPA 1971 — 7.1.13
IN
5 ft overedge seam
Small tear patch
fabric
Patched tear made from 7.5 osy NFPA 1851 — 8.2.3
R
Nomex IIIa plain weave fabric
F O
Δ Table 11.3.9(b) Thermal Liner Repairs
Who Makes
Repair Sample Material Test or Evaluation
Organization 5 ft felled seam Thermal liner material(s) utilized NFPA 1971 — 7.1.13
5 ft overedge seam by the organization
Small tear patch Patched tear made from the NFPA 1851 — 8.2.3
thermal liner material utilized
by the organization
ISP 5 ft felled seam Blended filament/spun face cloth NFPA 1971 — 7.1.13
5 ft overedge seam quilted to two layers of E89
Small tear patch Patched tear made from blended NFPA 1851 — 8.2.3
filament/spun face cloth quilted
to two layers of E89
Δ Table 11.3.9(c) Moisture Barrier Repairs
Who Makes
Repair Sample Material Test or Evaluation
Organization 5 ft seam Moisture barrier material(s) NFPA 1971 — 7.1.13
utilized by the organization
Pinhole repair Pinhole repair made from the NFPA 1851 — 8.2.3 and
moisture barrier material(s) NFPA 1851 — Section 12.3
utilized by the organization conditioning in
NFPA 1971 — 8.1.2
Tear patch Patched tear made from the NFPA 1851 — 8.2.3 and
moisture barrier material(s)
utilized by the organization
NFPA 1851 — Section 12.3
conditioning in
NFPA 1971 — 8.1.2
L Y
ISP 5 ft seam
Pinhole repair
All moisture barrier materials
repaired by the ISP
Pinhole repair made from the
moisture barrier material(s)
NFPA 1971 — 7.1.13
NFPA 1851 — 8.2.3 and

NFPA 1851 — Section 12.3 O N
Tear patch
utilized by the ISP
Patched tear made from the

conditioning in
NFPA 1971 — 8.1.2
NFPA 1851 — 8.2.3 and
S E
moisture barrier materials
repaired by the ISP
U
NFPA 1851 — Section 12.3
conditioning in
L
NFPA 1971 — 8.1.2
N 11.3.9.2.4 Testing
Section 12.3.
shall be performed as specified in
U A
11.3.9.3 Sample seams shall be prepared and submitted to the
certification organization for verification testing by an
I D
V
75 mm (3 in.)
NFPA 1971–certified manufacturer, verified organization, or
verified ISP.
D I
11.3.9.3.1 Where a verified organization or verified ISP
performs repairs for more than one garment manufacturer,
305 mm
(12 in.)
IN
then only one set of seam samples shall be required for verifica‐
tion testing.
11.3.9.3.2 For moisture barrier seam repairs, the certification
O R
organization or ISP shall damage the sample seams by cutting
multiple stitches and the seam tape to a distance of 75 mm
(3 in.) +12.5 mm/−0.00 mm (+1∕2 in./−0 in.). The certification
organization shall inspect the damaged seams and witness the 305 mm (12 in.)
F
repair of the samples to be tested.
11.3.9.3.3 For outer shell and thermal barrier seam repairs,
the certification organization or ISP shall damage the sample
seams by cutting multiple stitches to a distance of 75 mm
FIGURE 11.3.9.1 Tear Repairs.
11.3.11 For verification of an organization’s or ISP’s advanced

(3 in.) +12.5 mm/−0.00 mm (+1∕2 in./−0 in.). The certification cleaning services, the documentation and measurements speci‐
organization shall inspect the damaged seams and witness the fied in Table 11.3.11 shall be evaluated and verified to be
repair of the samples to be tested. compliant by the certification organization.
11.3.9.4 The certification organization shall not allow test 11.3.12 The organization or the ISP shall maintain all inspec‐
samples that have been conditioned and tested for one method tion and test data from the certification organization used in
to be reconditioned and tested for another test method unless the verification of the organization’s or the ISP’s services. The
specifically permitted in the test method. organization or ISP shall provide such data, upon request, to
11.3.10 For verification of an organization’s or ISP’s advanced the purchaser or authority having jurisdiction.
inspection services, the documentation and measurements
specified in Table 11.3.10 shall be evaluated and verified to be
compliant by the certification organization.
Δ Table 11.3.10 Advanced Inspection Evaluation 11.3.13 All repair categories that are verified in accordance
with this standard shall undergo verification on an annual
NFPA 1851 Clause Method of basis.
to Be Evaluated Evaluation 11.4 Organization or ISP Quality Management Program.
6.3.2 Audit or review of organization’s or 11.4.1 The organization’s or the ISP’s management shall
ISP’s procedures and documentation define and document its policy and objectives for and commit‐
by certification organization ment to quality and shall ensure that this policy is understood,
6.3.4 Audit or review of organization’s or implemented, and maintained at all levels in the organization
ISP’s procedures and documentation or the ISP.
by certification organization
6.3.5.1 (1)–(4) and Audit or review of organization’s or 11.4.2 The organization or the ISP shall operate an effective
quality system appropriate to the type, range, and volume of
(6)–(15) ISP’s procedures and documentation
6.3.5.7
Audit or review of organization’s or
ISP’s procedures and documentation
work performed.
11.4.3 The management of the organization or the ISP shall
designate a person who, irrespective of other duties, shall have
L Y
6.3.6.1
6.4.2
same person.
O N
defined authority and responsibility for quality assurance
within the organization or ISP. The quality system shall be
maintained relevant and current under the responsibility of the
E
11.4.3.1 If the verified ISP or verified organization changes
ISP’s procedures and documentation the designated person, the verified ISP or verified organization
S
by certification organization shall notify the certification organization.
6.4.4 Audit or review of organization’s or
11.4.4 The quality system shall be fully documented. There
6.4.5
L U
shall be a Quality Manual, which shall contain at least the
following information:
(1) General information (name, addresses, phone numbers,
Δ Table 11.3.11 Advanced Cleaning Evaluation

U A and legal status)
(2) Management statement on the organization’s or ISP’s
policy on, objectives for, and commitment to quality
(3) Management statement assigning a responsible person
NFPA 1851 Clause
to Be Evaluated
I
Method of
EvaluationD for quality assurance
(4) Description of the organization’s or ISP’s areas of activity
and competence
7.3.4
I V
Audit or review of organization’s or ISP’s
procedures and documentation by
(5) Organization chart(s)
(6) Relevant job descriptions
(7) Policy statement on qualification and training of person‐
7.3.5
D
certification organization
nel
(8) Procedures for control of documents
IN
procedures and documentation by (9) Procedures for internal audits
certification organization (10) Procedures for feedback and corrective action
7.3.6 Audit or review of organization’s or ISP’s (11) Procedures for management review of the quality system
O R
7.3.9(1)–(3) and
7.3.9(5)–(6)
(12) Distribution list for the Quality Manual
(13) Work instructions or process manuals
(14) Procedure for handling returns and complaints
F
11.4.5 The organization or ISP shall maintain a system for
certification organization control of all documentation relating to its activities and shall
7.3.9(4) Direct measurement or observation by a ensure the following:
representative of the certification
organization (1) That the current revisions of the appropriate documenta‐
7.3.11 Audit or review of organization’s or ISP’s tion are available at all relevant locations and to all rele‐
vant staff
(2) That all amendments to documents are authorized and
processed in a manner that will ensure timely availability
7.3.16 Audit or review of organization’s or ISP’s at the appropriate location
procedures and documentation by (3) That superseded documents are removed from use
certification organization throughout the organization but that one copy is filed for
7.3.10 Audit or review of organization’s or ISP’s a determined period
procedures and documentation by (4) That other parties, as necessary, are notified of changes
7.3.10.1(1)(c), Direct measurement or observation by a 11.4.6 The organization or the ISP shall carry out a system of
7.3.10.1(2)(c), representative of the certification planned and documented internal quality audits to verify
or 7.3.10.2(4) organization compliance with the criteria of this standard and the effective‐
ness of the quality system. The personnel performing the

audits shall be suitably qualified and independent from the
functions being audited.
11.4.7 The organization or the ISP shall have documented
procedures for dealing with feedback and corrective action TEST
whenever discrepancies are detected in the quality system or in AREA
the performance of inspections.
11.4.8 The management of the organization or the ISP shall
review the quality system at least annually to ensure its continu‐
ing suitability and effectiveness. The results of such reviews Maximum distance
of 62 mm (2.5 in.)
shall be recorded.
Chapter 12 Test Procedures
N 12.1 Light Evaluation of Hood Particulate-Blocking Layers.

L Y
N 12.1.1* Application. This evaluation method shall apply to
particulate-blocking protective hood interface components that
are in service.
O N
E
N 12.1.2 Evaluation Areas.
N 12.1.2.1 All portions of the hood interface component that
contain a particulate-blocking layer, including seams, shall be
evaluated.
N 12.1.2.2 As a minimum, four areas of the hood shall be evalu‐
U S
ated as follows:
(1) The left side of the hood with the edge of the test area
within 62 mm (2.5 in.) of the hood opening [see Figure
12.1.2.2(a)]
A L
N FIGURE 12.1.2.2(a) Minimum Light Evaluation Areas on
Left Front Side of Particulate-Blocking Hood.
(2) The right side of the hood with the edge of the test area
within 62 mm (2.5 in.) of the hood opening [see Figure
I
12.1.2.2(b)]
(3) The back of the hood [see Figure 12.1.2.2(c)]
(4) The middle of any seam area joining two pieces of the
particulate-blocking layer
I V
D
N 12.1.2.3 Other hood areas subject to 12.1.2.1 shall be permit‐
ted to be evaluated.
IN
N 12.1.3 Evaluation Apparatus. Maximum distance
of 62 mm (2.5 in.)
N 12.1.3.1* An apparatus that consists of a clear head form
combined with a bright enough light source to show the
R
changes in density of the liner materials when viewed shall be
used. The light source shall be mounted at the center of the
O
head form interior and have a means for turning the light on
and off and for its replacement.
TEST
AREA
F
N 12.1.3.2* A special fixture shall be permitted to be used that
allows portions of the hoods that measure at least 75 mm
(3 in.) in diameter to be nondestructively clamped on a holder
where a light source is placed below the viewing area.
N 12.1.4 Procedure.
N 12.1.4.1 The evaluation procedure shall be conducted indoors
in an area that can be darkened so as to provide for optimum
viewing of potential damage to the particulate-blocking layer of
the hood interface component.
N FIGURE 12.1.2.2(b) Minimum Light Evaluation Areas on
Right Front Side of Particulate-Blocking Hood.
TEST PROCEDURES 1851-39
N 12.2.2.2 As a minimum, four areas of the hood shall be evalu‐

ated as follows:
(1) The left side of the hood with the edge of the test area at
least 62 mm (2.5 in.) away from the hood opening [see
TEST Figure 12.2.2.2(a)]
AREA
(2) The right side of the hood with the edge of the test area
at least 62 mm (2.5 in.) away from the hood opening [see
Figure 12.2.2.2(b)]
(3) The back of the hood [see Figure 12.1.2.2(c)]
(4) The middle of any seam area joining two pieces of the
particulate-blocking layer
N 12.2.2.3 Other hood areas subject to 12.2.2.1 shall be permit‐
Y
TEST
AREA ted to be evaluated.
N 12.2.3* Evaluation Apparatus.
N 12.2.3.1 Approaches.
N
N 12.2.3.1.1 Qualitative. The overall evaluation apparatus for
L
O
the qualitative approach shall consist of a sample clamping
device, a smoke generator, and a flowmeter.
S E
N 12.2.3.1.2 Quantitative. The overall evaluation apparatus for
the quantitative approach shall include a light transmission
meter in addition to the same equipment used for the qualita‐
tive approach listed in 12.2.3.1.1.
N FIGURE 12.1.2.2(c) Minimum Evaluation Areas on Back of

Particulate-Blocking Hood. (1)
L U
N 12.2.3.2* A sample clamping device shall be used that has the
following characteristics:
The device shall provide a transparent cylindrical reser‐
N 12.1.4.2 The evaluation shall be conducted using the follow‐

U A voir of a diameter of 100 mm ± 25 mm (4.0 in. ± 1.0 in.),
a height of 140 mm ± 50 mm (5.5 in. ± 2.0 in.), and a wall
thickness of at least 6 mm (0.25 in) and shall have a mini‐
mum volume of 800 mL (50 in.3).
ing procedure:
(1)
I
Don the hood on the head form or position the area ofD (2) A cylinder cap shall be placed on top of the reservoir that
provides a minimum viewing area of 60 mm (2.4 in.) in
V
diameter and shall provide a clamping surface that
the hood to be examined on the fixture.
(2)
(3)
(4)
D I
Turn on the light inside the head form or fixture.
Evaluate areas of the hood that have a particulate-
blocking layer in place, including seams.
For comparison purposes, use a new, unused hood to
(3)
includes a rubber gasket between the cylinder cap and
the reservoir.
The device shall have a means of clamping the portion of
the hood interface component on top of the open cylin‐
IN
drical reservoir with a clamp such that all areas of the
distinguish the normal appearance of light through an hood interface component incorporating the particulate-
undamaged hood. blocking layer can be evaluated and which creates an
effective seal between the clamping mechanism and the
R
N 12.1.5 Results. Results shall be determined by evaluating
areas where the light is brighter through some areas than clamping surface of the transparent cylindrical reservoir.
others. (4) The device’s transparent cylindrical reservoir shall have a
O
N 12.1.6* Interpretation. Brighter areas shall be considered a
F possible indication of a defect or other damage that compromi‐

ses the hood’s performance.
(5)
fitting that permits a leak-free connection with a hose
connected to the smoke generator.
A leak-free connection shall also be provided to the trans‐
parent cylindrical reservoir for the measurement of pres‐
sure inside the reservoir using a pressure gauge in kPa
N 12.2 Smoke Evaluation of Hood Particulate-Blocking Layers.
(psi).
N 12.2.1 Application.
N 12.2.3.3* A smoke generator shall be used that has the follow‐
N 12.2.1.1 This evaluation method shall apply to particulate- ing characteristics and capabilities:
blocking protective hood interface components that are in (1) The smoke generator shall have the capability of provid‐
service. ing smoke through an orifice that establishes a direct,
N 12.2.1.2* This evaluation method shall be conducted either leak-free connection between the smoke generator and
qualitatively or quantitatively. the sample clamping device.
(2) The smoke generator shall have the ability to adjust the
N 12.2.2 Evaluation Areas. flow of smoke and shall have the capability to produce
smoke at a rate of at least 1.0 to 2.5 L/min.
N 12.2.2.1 All portions of the hood interface component that
contain a particulate-blocking layer, including seams within
areas having a particulate-blocking layer, shall be evaluated.
(3) The smoke generator shall generate visible smoke based

on a cosmetic grade mineral oil or an aqueous-based
smoke-generating agent that provides smoke particles
ranging from 1 to 10 microns.
(4) When connected to the sample clamping device, the
TEST smoke generator shall not create a pressure greater than
AREA 1.0 kPa (0.15 psi) when operating for a period of
1 minute.
N 12.2.3.4 A flowmeter, or a rotometer or other flow measure‐
Minimum distance ment device capable of measuring air flow rate in L/min to the
of 62 mm (2.5 in.) nearest 0.1 L/min, shall be placed in the connection line from
the smoke generator to the device’s transparent cylindrical
Y
reservoir.
L
N 12.2.3.5* A light transmission meter that consists of a light
source and light receiver with the following characteristics shall
N
be used for quantitative evaluation approaches:
(1) The light source shall be a light-emitting diode (LED)
(2)
O
source that generates a continuous tight beam of light.
The light receiver shall be a photoresistor capable of
reporting light transmission from 0 to 100 percent on a
(3)
S E
digital display with an optional RS232 port for recording
measurements.
The light transmission device shall be capable of being
mounted on the sample clamping device such that the
N FIGURE 12.2.2.2(a) Minimum Smoke Evaluation Areas on

Left Front Side of Particulate-Blocking Hood.
U
light beam is generated and received parallel to the test
hood surface at a height of 34 mm ± 3 mm (1.3 in.
L
± 0.1 in.) and that there is a distance between the light
source and light receiver of 90 mm ± 10 mm (3.5 in.
U A ± 0.3 in.).
N 12.2.4 Procedure.
D
N 12.2.4.1 The evaluation procedure shall be conducted indoors
V I in a well-lit area that is free from air currents and provides
good visibility.
D I N 12.2.4.2 The qualitative evaluation approach shall be conduc‐

ted using the following procedure:
(1) The smoke generator shall be operated in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions by adding the
IN
appropriate smoke-generating liquid and any other
supplies for its operation.
(2) Prior to testing, the smoke generator shall be turned on
R
Minimum distance and allowed to generate smoke for 5 minutes.
of 62 mm (2.5 in.) (3) After 5 minutes, the smoke generator shall be switched
O
to air to clean out the remaining smoke-generating
TEST liquid in the hose and to prepare for testing.
F (4) With the smoke generator still generating air and the
AREA
hose not connected to the cylindrical reservoir, the hose
shall be connected to the flowmeter and the flow rate
shall be adjusted to 1.7 L/min ± 0.1 L/min.
(5) Following adjustment of the flow rate, the smoke genera‐
tor shall be switched to smoke and the hose shall be
securely attached to the transparent cylindrical reservoir.
(6) The hood shall be inverted (i.e., turned inside out) and
the portion of the hood to be tested shall be positioned
over the top of the transparent cylindrical reservoir and
securely clamped into position.
(7) The viewing area within the cylindrical clamping fixture
shall be observed for up to 120 seconds for the presence
of smoke coming through the clamped area of the hood
N FIGURE 12.2.2.2(b) Minimum Smoke Evaluation Areas on interface component.
Right Front Side of Particulate-Blocking Hood. (8) After 120 seconds, the smoke generator shall be turned
off and the cylindrical chamber shall be flushed with air.
(9) The hood interface component shall be removed from 12.3.2.1.1 Moisture barrier material areas shall be from high-
the sample clamping device, inspected, and subjected to abrasion areas of the garment elements, including, but not
an advanced cleaning, if necessary. limited to:
(10) The interior of the cylindrical reservoir shall be wiped to (1) Broadest part of the shoulders
remove any chemical residue and the hose shall be (2) Back waist area of the coat
detached and turned upside down to clear out any resid‐ (3) Knees
ual smoke or smoke-generating liquid. (4) Crotch area
(11) Each area of the hood specified in 12.2.2 shall be evalu‐ (5) Seat area
ated.
(12) The level of smoke-generating liquid shall be checked at 12.3.2.1.2 In addition to the areas listed in 12.3.2.1.1 where
the conclusion of testing to ensure that it has not potential damage to the garment outer shell or the thermal
decreased more than 50 percent, in which case addi‐ barrier has been detected, the evaluation shall be conducted
tional smoke-generating liquid shall be added to bring on the corresponding area of the moisture barrier. Where
the liquid reservoir up to its full capacity.
(13)* Following testing, the hood interface component shall
be cleaned to remove any residue remaining from the
smoke content.
potential damage to the garment moisture barrier has been
detected, the evaluation shall also be conducted on that area of
the moisture barrier.
L Y
N 12.2.4.3 The quantitative evaluation approach shall be
conducted using the same procedures in 12.2.4.2 with the
following additional procedures:
O N
12.3.2.2 Moisture barrier material areas shall be positioned in
the evaluation apparatus such that the side of the barrier that is
against the outer shell faces the water in the evaluation appara‐
tus.
E
(1)* The light transmission meter shall be calibrated before 12.3.2.3 Moisture barrier material areas with seams shall be
each set of measurements using a standard reference positioned on the evaluation apparatus so that the seam divides
material that provides a range of light transmission from
40 percent to 90 percent.
(2) Light transmission readings shall be taken every
10 seconds for the last 60 seconds of the 120 seconds
U S
the specimen into two equal halves.
12.3.3 Evaluation Apparatus.
12.3.3.1* The apparatus used to evaluate water penetration
L
required in 12.2.4.2(7). shall have the following characteristics:
N 12.2.5 Results.
A
(1) The apparatus shall consist of a means of clamping the
N 12.2.5.1 For the qualitative evaluation approach, observations area to be evaluated in a horizontal position, providing a
U
of smoke coming out of each evaluated area of the hood inter‐ watertight seal with the pressurized portion of the appara‐
face component shall be reported. tus and water reservoir.
D
(2) The apparatus shall accommodate evaluations of mois‐
N 12.2.5.2 For the quantitative evaluation approach, the meas‐
V I
ured light transmission values recorded from 60 to 120 seconds
shall be reported and the average transmission value for each (3)
ture barriers and seams without the removal of the speci‐
mens.
The apparatus shall have a clamping area that provides a
hood shall be calculated.
N 12.2.6 Interpretation.
D I
N 12.2.6.1 For the qualitative evaluation approach, any observed
(4)
water exposure and viewing area that is at least 50 mm
(2 in.) in diameter.
The apparatus shall have a water reservoir containing
sufficient water for carrying out the evaluation.
IN
smoke coming out of the test hood relative to an unused, pris‐ (5) The apparatus shall provide for the pressurization of
tine hood shall be considered as a possible indication of a water against the garment element moisture barrier area
defect or other damage that compromises the hood’s perform‐ at a pressure of 6.9 kPa (1 psi) for at least 15 seconds. The
R
ance. 6.9 kPa (1 psi) pressure shall be achieved within
10 seconds.
N 12.2.6.2* For the quantitative evaluation approach, any
O
(6) The apparatus shall be equipped with a pressure gauge
decrease in a light transmission value of 5 percent or more rela‐ that is accurate to the nearest 0.2 kPa (0.1 psi).
F
tive to an unused, pristine hood shall be considered as possible (7) The apparatus shall be equipped with a means of bleed‐
evidence of a defect or other damage that compromises the ing air pressure and permit the drainage of water from
hood’s performance. the pressurized portion of the apparatus.
12.3 Water Penetration Barrier Evaluation. 12.3.3.2 A stopwatch or other timer shall be used to ensure
12.3.1 Application. This evaluation method shall apply to that pressure is applied for the specified duration of
moisture barrier materials and moisture barrier seams found in 15 seconds.
structural or proximity fire fighting protective garment 12.3.4 Procedure.
elements that are in service.
12.3.4.1 The evaluation shall be conducted using the follow‐
12.3.2 Evaluation Areas. ing procedure:
12.3.2.1 A minimum of three moisture barrier material areas (1) The selected area of moisture barrier shall be placed in
and a minimum of three moisture barrier areas with a seam the apparatus and clamped to provide a watertight seal
shall be tested on each garment element. with the apparatus.
(2) A water pressure of 1 psi shall be introduced against the
moisture barrier for a period of not less than 15 seconds.
(3) The visible side of the moisture barrier shall be visually N 12.4.3 Specimen Preparation.
inspected after 15 seconds to determine if water penetra‐
tion has occurred. N 12.4.3.1 The garment outer shell used for specimens shall be
an undyed 60 percent para-aramid/40 percent polybenzimida‐
12.3.5 Results. zole (PBI) base fabric with a reinforcement grid meeting the
following specifications:
12.3.5.1 If any water passes through the moisture barrier or
moisture barrier seam, the liner shall be removed from service (1) The outer shell fabric shall have a unit area weight of 240
and repaired or replaced. to 268 g/m2 (7.1 to 7.9 oz/yd2).
(2) The outer shell fabric shall have a thickness of 0.584
12.3.5.2 If no water passes through the moisture barrier or ± 0.254 mm (0.023 ± 0.10 in.).
moisture barrier seam, the liner shall be allowed to dry (3) The outer shell fabric shall have a water absorption resist‐
completely before being returned to service. ance of less than 5 percent when tested in accordance
N 12.4 Chemical Decontamination Efficacy Test. with Section 8.25 of NFPA 1971.
N 12.4.1* Application. This test method shall determine the

chemical decontamination efficacy for outer shell materials in
protective garments that are subjected to advanced cleaning
N 12.4.3.2 Outer shell fabric used for testing shall be prepared
by laundering for 10 cycles as specified in AATCC 135, Dimen‐
sional Changes of Fabrics after Home Laundering.
L Y
procedures by a cleaning facility for the removal of products of
combustion from structural fire-fighting protective garments.
N 12.4.2* General Procedures.
N 12.4.3.3 Semivolatile Organic Compounds.
O N
N 12.4.3.3.1 A minimum of six specimens shall be contaminated
with selected semivolatile organic compounds as specified in
E
N 12.4.2.1 The certification organization or its designated labo‐ 12.6.1 and 12.6.2.
ratory shall contaminate separate sets of selected outer shell N 12.4.3.3.1.1 The number of contaminated specimens required
material specimens with semivolatile organic compounds and
heavy metals.
N 12.4.2.2 Chemically contaminated and noncontaminated
specimens of the selected outer shell material shall be
U S
by 12.4.3.3.1.1 shall be permitted to be reduced from six to five
specimens if the certification organization can demonstrate
that the transportation of the specimens to the cleaning facility
does not affect the travel specimen’s condition or the contami‐
prepared, appropriately packaged, and sent by the certification
organization to the respective cleaning facility with the supplies
necessary for subjecting the specimens to the cleaning facility’s
A L
nant concentrations.
N 12.4.3.3.2 Four additional specimens shall be prepared as
specified in 12.4.3.2 but not contaminated.
U
advanced cleaning procedures.
N 12.4.3.3.2.1 The number of noncontaminated specimens
N 12.4.2.3 Under the supervision of a representative from the required by 12.4.3.3.2 shall be permitted to be reduced from
certification organization, ISP personnel shall insert the chemi‐
cally contaminated and noncontaminated outer shell speci‐
I D four to three specimens if the certification organization can
demonstrate that the transportation of the specimens to the
V
mens into surrogate clothing samples that shall then be receiving facility does not affect the travel specimen’s condi‐
load.
D I
specially placed with designated ballast materials in the clean‐
ing facility’s advanced cleaning equipment to form the wash
N 12.4.2.4 The surrogate clothing samples with chemically

tion.
N 12.4.3.3.3 One contaminated specimen and one noncontami‐
nated specimen shall remain at the certification organization
IN
or its designated laboratory.
contaminated and noncontaminated outer shell specimens and
designated ballast material shall be subjected to one full cycle N 12.4.3.4 Heavy Metals.
of the cleaning facility’s advanced cleaning procedures. N 12.4.3.4.1 A minimum of six specimens shall be contaminated
O R
N 12.4.2.5 Following the completion of the cleaning facility’s
advanced cleaning procedures and under the supervision of a
representative from the certification organization, the washed
with selected heavy metals as specified in 12.7.1 and 12.7.2.
N 12.4.3.4.1.1 The number of contaminated specimens required
by 12.4.3.4.1 shall be permitted to be reduced from six to five
F
chemically contaminated and noncontaminated outer shell specimens if the certification organization can demonstrate
specimens shall be removed by cleaning facility personnel, that the transportation of the specimens to the cleaning facility
placed in suitable containers, and shipped back to the certifica‐ does not affect the travel specimen’s condition or the contami‐
tion organization or its designated laboratory. nant concentrations.
N 12.4.2.6 The certification organization or its designated labo‐ N 12.4.3.4.2 Four additional specimens shall be prepared as
ratory shall analyze the washed chemically contaminated and specified in 12.4.3.2 but not contaminated.
noncontaminated specimens as well as control specimens (i.e.,
contaminated but not laundered) and determine the cleaning N 12.4.3.4.2.1 The number of noncontaminated specimens
efficiency of the cleaning facility’s advanced cleaning proce‐ required by 12.4.3.4.2 shall be permitted to be reduced from
dures for each of the specified chemical contaminants. four to three specimens if the certification organization can
demonstrate that the transportation of the specimens to the
N 12.4.2.7 The certification organization shall separately inter‐ receiving facility does not affect the travel specimen’s condi‐
pret the cleaning efficiency results for both heavy metals and tion.
semivolatile organic compounds to determine compliance with
the criteria for the respective cleaning facility cleaning effi‐
ciency specified in 11.3.7.
N 12.4.3.4.3 One contaminated specimen and one noncontami‐ unpacked with the following disposition as related separately to
nated specimen shall remain at the certification organization both semivolatile organic compounds and heavy metals:
or its designated laboratory. (1) One contaminated specimen and one noncontaminated
N 12.4.4 Specimen Handling, Sample Wash Load Assembly, and specimen shall remain in their containers, untouched at
Cleaning. the receiving facility, and shall be identified as the “travel
specimens.” These specimens shall be permitted to be
N 12.4.4.1 General. Each individual contaminated and noncon‐ excluded if the certification organization can demon‐
taminated specimen shall be placed in a separate strate that the transportation of the specimens to the
contamination-free container with a label identifying the speci‐ cleaning facility does not affect the specimen’s condition
men and shipped overnight by the certification organization or or the contaminant concentrations.
its designated laboratory to the cleaning facility for receipt on (2) One noncontaminated specimen shall be inserted in
the scheduled day of testing. Specimen Pocket 1 of the surrogate coat; one individual
contaminated specimen shall be inserted in Specimen
N 12.4.4.2 Surrogate Garments.
N 12.4.4.2.1 The certification organization or its designated
laboratory shall provide surrogate garments that have been
Pocket 2 of the surrogate coat, while a second individual
Pocket 3 of the surrogate coat.
L Y
prepared as specified in 12.9.1.
N 12.4.4.2.2 The surrogate garments shall be permitted to be
provided separately from the contamination and noncontami‐
nated specimens.
(3)
O N
One noncontaminated specimen shall be inserted in
Specimen Pocket 1 of the surrogate pant; one individual
Pocket 2 of the surrogate pant, while a second individual
N 12.4.4.3 Ballast Material Panels.
N 12.4.4.3.1 The certification organization shall either provide
or have the cleaning facility use a white, plain weave,
S E
Pocket 3 of the surrogate pant.
N 12.4.4.4.2 The individual handling the specimens shall be
wearing clean disposable gloves and shall use either metal
100 percent polyester ballast fabric that conforms to the follow‐
ing specifications:
(1) The ballast fabric shall have a unit area weight of 346
± 34 g/m2 (10.2 ± 1.0 oz/yd2).
L U
tweezers for semi-volatile organic compound–contaminated
specimens or plastic tweezers for heavy metal–contaminated
specimens provided by the certification organization for insert‐
ing the specimens into the surrogate clothing item pockets.
(2)
(3)
The ballast fabric shall have a construction of at least 35
threads in the warp direction and at least 20 threads in
the fill or weft direction.
The ballast fabric shall be uncoated and have a durable
U A N 12.4.4.4.3 The tweezer surfaces that contact the specimens
shall be cleaned with an alcohol solution–based disposable
wipe between uses.
I D
water repellent finish that results in a horizontal wicking
of less than 10 mm (0.40 in.) in any direction when tested
N 12.4.4.5 Assembly of Wash Load and Application of Wash
Load.
I V
as specified in AATCC 198, Horizontal Wicking of Textiles,
after the fabric has been washed a total of 5 cycles as
specified in AATCC 135, Dimensional Changes of Fabrics
N 12.4.4.5.1 The wash load shall be assembled as specified in
12.9.3 and adjusted according to the cleaning facility’s proce‐
dures for load size.
(4)
after Home Laundering.
D
The ballast fabric shall have a tensile strength of at least N 12.4.4.5.2 If the cleaning facility’s procedures for advanced
IN
1560 N (350 lb) when tested as specified in ASTM D5034, cleaning involve a pretreatment, such as a presoaking of cloth‐
Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of ing prior to placement in a washer/extractor or other type of
Textile Fabrics (Grab Test). laundering machine, then it shall be permitted to subject only
the surrogate clothing with inserted outer shell specimens to
R
(5) The ballast fabric shall have a tear strength of at least
116 N (26 lb) when tested as specified in ASTM D2261, the pretreatment without the ballast materials.
Standard Test Method for Tearing Strength of Fabrics by the
F O Tongue (Single Rip) Procedure (Constant-Rate-of-Extension

Tensile Testing Machine).
N 12.4.4.3.2 An alternative ballast material shall be permitted if
it is shown to have at least the same weight range specified in
N 12.4.4.5.3 The wash load consisting of the surrogate clothing
items with inserted outer shell fabric specimens, along with the
specified number and types of ballast fabric–based wash panels,
shall be subject to the cleaning facility’s advanced cleaning
procedures for which verification is being performed.
12.4.4.3.1(1) and meets the horizontal wicking requirement in N 12.4.4.5.4 To shorten the drying time, the surrogate clothing
12.4.4.3.1(3). items with inserted outer shell specimens shall be allowed to
N 12.4.4.3.3 A sufficient number of different cut and shaped dry without the ballast fabric–based wash panels.
ballast fabric–based wash panels for creating the wash load N 12.4.4.6 Removal and Shipping. Following the advanced
shall be prepared in advance of the testing as specified in cleaning and under the supervision of a representative from
12.9.2. the certification organization, the specimens shall be removed
N 12.4.4.4 Handling and Disposition of Contaminated Speci‐ from the surrogate clothing items using tweezers, placed in
mens. labeled, contamination-free containers, and packaged for over‐
night shipment to the certification organization or its designa‐
N 12.4.4.4.1* Under the supervision of a representative from the ted laboratory for evaluation.
certification organization, the chemically contaminated and
noncontaminated outer shell fabric test specimens shall be
N 12.4.5 Specimen Evaluation. N 12.5.2.4 The surrogate clothing samples with biologically
contaminated and noncontaminated outer shell specimens and
N 12.4.5.1 Test specimens for semivolatile organic compound designated ballast material shall be subjected to one full cycle
contamination removal shall be subject to the extraction and of the cleaning facility’s sanitization procedures.
analysis procedures specified in 12.6.3 through 12.6.5.
N 12.5.2.5 Following completion of the cleaning facility’s sani‐
N 12.4.5.2 Test specimens for heavy metal contamination tization cleaning procedures and under the supervision of a
removal shall be subject to the extraction and analysis proce‐ representative from the certification organization, the washed
dures specified in 12.7.3 and 12.7.4. biologically contaminated and noncontaminated outer shell
N 12.4.6 Report. The following information shall be reported specimens shall be removed by cleaning facility personnel,
for each contaminant: placed in suitable containers, and shipped back to the certifica‐
tion organization or its designated laboratory.
(1) Contaminant concentration in the contaminated speci‐
men that stayed at the certification organization or its N 12.5.2.6* The certification organization or its designated labo‐
(2)
designated laboratory
Contaminant concentration in the contaminated, travel‐
ing specimen, if applicable
ratory shall analyze the washed biologically contaminated and
noncontaminated specimens as well as control specimens
(contaminated but not laundered) and determine the log
L Y
N
(3) Contaminant concentration in the unwashed, traveling reduction of the cleaning facility’s advanced sanitization proce‐
specimen, if applicable dures for each of the specified biological contaminants.
O
(4) Contaminant concentration in each of the washed speci‐
mens N 12.5.2.7 The certification organization shall separately inter‐
(5) Average contaminant concentration of the washed speci‐ pret the log reduction results for each selected microorganism
E
mens to determine compliance with the criteria for the respective
(6) Contaminant concentration in the washed, blank speci‐ cleaning facility sanitization efficiency specified in 11.3.7.
(7)
(8)
men
Calculated cleaning efficiency by contaminant
The average calculated cleaning efficiency for all contam‐
inants
N 12.5.3 Specimen Preparation.
U S
N 12.5.3.1 The garment outer shell material used for specimens
shall be an undyed 60 percent para-aramid/40 percent PBI
L
base fabric with a reinforcement grid and shall meet the follow‐
N 12.4.7 Interpretation. ing specifications:
N 12.4.7.1 Overall compliance with the requirement for chemi‐
cal decontamination involving semivolatile organic compound
contaminants shall be based on the average calculated cleaning
efficiency for all chemical contaminants.
U A (1)
(2)
The outer shell fabric shall have a unit area weight of 240
to 268 g/m2 (7.1 oz/yd2 to 7.9 oz/yd2).
The outer shell fabric shall have a thickness of 0.584 mm
± 0.254 mm (0.023 in. ± 0.10 in.).
N 12.4.7.2 Overall compliance with the requirement for chemi‐
cal decontamination involving heavy metals shall be based on
I D (3) The outer shell fabric shall have a water absorption resist‐
ance of less than 5 percent when tested in accordance
V
with Section 8.25 of NFPA 1971.
the average calculated cleaning efficiency for all chemical
contaminants.
N 12.5 Biological Decontamination Efficacy Test.
D I N 12.5.3.2 A total of two specimens shall be prepared for each

bacterium as specified in Section 12.8, and outer shell fabric to
be used for testing shall be prepared by laundering for 10
cycles as specified in AATCC 135, Dimensional Changes of Fabrics
IN
N 12.5.1* Application. This test method shall determine the
biological decontamination efficacy for outer shell materials in after Home Laundering.
protective garments that are subjected to cleaning facility N 12.5.3.3 A minimum of six specimens shall be contaminated
procedures for the disinfection or sanitization of structural fire-
R
with each bacterium as specified in 12.8.2.
fighting protective garments.
N 12.5.3.3.1 The number of contaminated specimens required
O
N 12.5.2* General Procedures. by 12.5.3.3 shall be permitted to be reduced from six to five
N 12.5.2.1 The certification organization or its designated labo‐ specimens if the certification organization can demonstrate
F
ratory shall contaminate sets of selected outer shell material
specimens with the two specific microorganisms.
N 12.5.2.2 Biologically contaminated and noncontaminated
specimens of the selected outer shell material shall be
that the transportation of the specimens to the cleaning facility
does not affect the travel specimen’s condition or the bacterial
contamination level.
N 12.5.3.4 Four additional specimens shall be prepared for each
prepared, appropriately packaged, and sent by the certification type of bacteria as specified in 12.5.3.2 but not contaminated.
organization to the respective ISP with the supplies necessary N 12.5.3.4.1 The number of noncontaminated specimens
for subjecting the specimens to the cleaning facility’s sanitiza‐ required by 12.5.3.4 shall be permitted to be reduced from
tion procedures. four to three specimens if the certification organization can
N 12.5.2.3 Under the supervision of a representative from the demonstrate that the transportation of the specimens to the
certification organization, cleaning facility personnel shall cleaning facility does not result in the inadvertent biocontami‐
insert the biologically contaminated and noncontaminated nation of the travel specimen.
outer shell specimens into surrogate clothing samples that shall N 12.5.3.5 One contaminated specimen and one noncontamina‐
then be specially placed with designated ballast materials in the ted specimen shall remain at the certification organization or
cleaning facility’s sanitization equipment to form the wash its designated laboratory.
load.
N 12.5.4 Specimen Handling, Sample Load Assembly, and Sani‐ N 12.5.4.4 Handling and Disposition of Contaminated Speci‐
tization. mens.
N 12.5.4.1 General. Each individual contaminated and noncon‐ N 12.5.4.4.1* Under the supervision of a representative from the
taminated specimen shall be placed in a separate sterile certification organization, the biologically contaminated and
container with a label identifying the specimen and shipped noncontaminated outer shell fabric test specimens shall be
overnight by the certification organization or its designated unpacked with the following disposition as related separately to
laboratory to the cleaning facility for receipt on the scheduled both types of bacteria:
day of testing. (1) One contaminated specimen and one noncontaminated
N 12.5.4.1.1 Specimens shall be shipped in a manner to main‐ specimen shall remain in their containers, untouched at
tain their temperature at 4°C (39°F) prior to testing at the the cleaning facility, and shall be identified as the “travel
cleaning facility. specimens.” These specimens shall be permitted to be
excluded if the certification organization can demon‐
N 12.5.4.2 Surrogate Garments.
N 12.5.4.2.1 The certification organization or its designated
laboratory shall provide surrogate garments that have been
(2)
strate that the transportation of the specimens to the
cleaning facility does not affect the travel specimen’s
condition or the biological contamination level.
One noncontaminated specimen shall be inserted in
L Y
prepared as specified in 12.9.1.
N 12.5.4.2.2 Prior to shipping, each surrogate garment shall be
autoclaved for 90 minutes at 121°C (250°F) and then packaged
in a manner to maintain the garments’ sterility prior to use at
O N
Specimen Pocket 1 of the surrogate coat; one individual
Pocket 2 of the surrogate coat, while a second individual
E
the cleaning facility. Pocket 3 of the surrogate coat.
(3) One noncontaminated specimen shall be inserted in
N 12.5.4.2.3 The surrogate garments shall be permitted to be
provided separately from the contamination and noncontami‐
nated specimens.
N 12.5.4.3 Ballast Material Panels.
U S
Specimen Pocket 1 of the surrogate pant; one individual
Pocket 2 of the surrogate pant, while a second individual
L
Pocket 3 of the surrogate pant.
N 12.5.4.3.1 The certification organization shall either provide
N 12.5.4.4.2 The individual handling the specimens shall be
A
or have the cleaning facility use a white, plain weave,
100 percent polyester ballast fabric that conforms to the follow‐ wearing clean disposable gloves and shall use tweezers provided
by the certification organization for inserting the specimens
U
ing specifications:
into the surrogate clothing item pockets.
(1) The ballast fabric shall have a unit area weight of
(2)
346 g/m2 ± 34 g/m2 (10.2 oz/yd2 ± 1.0 oz/yd2).
I D
The ballast fabric shall have a construction of at least 35
threads in the warp direction and at least 20 threads in
N 12.5.4.4.3 The tweezer surfaces that contact the specimens
shall be cleaned with an alcohol solution–based disposable
wipe between uses.
(3)
the fill or weft direction.
I V
The ballast fabric shall be uncoated and have a durable N 12.5.4.5 Assembly of Sanitization Load and Application of
Sanitization.
D
water repellent finish that results in a horizontal wicking
of less than 10 mm (0.40 in) in any direction when tested N 12.5.4.5.1 The sanitization load shall be assembled as speci‐
IN
as specified in AATCC 198, Horizontal Wicking of Textiles, fied in 12.9.3 and adjusted according to the cleaning facility’s
after the fabric has been washed a total of 5 cycles as procedures for load size.
specified in AATCC 135, Dimensional Changes of Fabrics
after Home Laundering. N 12.5.4.5.2 If the cleaning’s procedures for sanitization involve
(4)
O R
The ballast fabric shall have a tensile strength of at least
1560 N (350 lb) when tested as specified in ASTM D5034,
Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of
Textile Fabrics (Grab Test).
a pretreatment, such as a presoaking of clothing prior to place‐
ment in a washer/extractor or other type of laundering
machine, then it shall be permitted to subject only the surro‐
gate clothing with inserted outer shell specimens to the
F (5) The ballast fabric shall have a tear strength of at least

116 N (26 lb) when tested as specified in ASTM D2261,
Standard Test Method for Tearing Strength of Fabrics by the
Tongue (Single Rip) Procedure (Constant-Rate-of-Extension
Tensile Testing Machine).
pretreatment without the ballast materials.
N 12.5.4.5.3 The sanitization load consisting of the surrogate
clothing items with inserted outer shell fabric specimens, along
with the specified number and types of ballast fabric–based
wash panels, shall be subject to the cleaning facility’s sanitiza‐
N 12.5.4.3.2 An alternative ballast material shall be permitted if tion procedures for which verification is being performed.
it is shown to have at least the same weight range specified in N 12.5.4.5.4 To shorten the drying time, the surrogate clothing
12.4.4.3.1(1) and meets the horizontal wicking requirement in items with inserted outer shell specimens shall be allowed to
12.4.4.3.1(3). dry without the ballast fabric–based wash panels.
N 12.5.4.3.3 A sufficient number of different cut and shaped
ballast fabric–based wash panels for creating the wash load
shall be prepared in advance of the testing as specified in
12.9.2.
N 12.5.4.5.5 Following the sanitization process and under the N 12.6.2.5 Alternative techniques for contaminating the speci‐
supervision of a representative from the certification organiza‐ mens shall be permitted if it can be demonstrated that the
tion, the specimens shall be removed from the surrogate cloth‐ selected technique provides a specimen concentration of the
ing items using tweezers, placed in labeled, contamination-free specific contaminant(s) that are ±20 percent of the target
containers, and packaged for overnight shipment to the certifi‐ concentration following the application of the technique.
cation organization or its designated laboratory for evaluation.
N 12.6.3 Extraction of Specimens.
N 12.5.5 Specimen Evaluation. Test specimens for determining
sanitization shall be subject to the extraction and analysis N 12.6.3.1 All labware, jars, or extraction vessels made of glass or
procedures specified in 12.8.3. other degradation-resistant and contamination-free materials
shall be thoroughly cleaned, rinsed, and dried.
N 12.5.6 Report. The following information shall be reported
for each bacterial contaminant in each outer shell material: N 12.6.3.1.1 Where specified, other types of labware shall be
substituted if it can be demonstrated that the labware will not
Y
(1) Original bacterial count applied to each specimen contribute to cross contamination of the extraction liquids.
(2) Post-cleaning bacterial count for the unwashed, traveling
(3)
(4)
specimen, if applicable
Post-cleaning bacterial count for each of the washed
specimens, if applicable
Average post-cleaning bacterial count for the washed
N 12.6.3.2 An extraction solvent of 50 percent methylene chlor‐
ide, 25 percent acetonitrile, 25 percent cyclohexane shall be
prepared.
N
N 12.6.3.3 A PAH/phthalate/phenols dilution solution of a 1:1
L
(5)
specimens
Post-cleaning bacterial count for the washed, blank speci‐
men O
ratio of benzene and methylene chloride shall be prepared.
N 12.6.3.4 The specimen to be analyzed shall be cut into eight
(6) Calculated log10 reduction
N 12.5.7 Interpretation. Overall compliance with the require‐
ments for biological decontamination shall be based on the
vessel with a lid.
S E
smaller pieces and placed in a 300 mL (10.1 oz) extraction
N 12.6.3.5 Six 16 mm (5∕8 in.) polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)

individual reported log10 reduction for each biological contami‐
nant.
N 12.6 Semi-Volatile Organic Compound Contained Specimen
L U
bearing balls shall be placed in the extraction vessel with the
cut specimen pieces.
N 12.6.3.6 A volume of 50 mL (1.7 oz) of the extraction solvent
A
Preparation, Extraction, and Analysis. prepared per 12.6.3.2 shall be added to the extraction vessel.
N 12.6.1 Selection of Contaminants. The following semivolatile N 12.6.3.7 The extraction vessel shall be placed on a platform
organic compounds shall be prepared at a concentration of
200 ppm in a 1:1 mixture of benzene and methylene chloride:
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U shaker set at 230 RPM ± 10 RPM and shall be shaken for
30 minutes.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Acenaphthene (CAS No. 83-32-9)
Anthracene (CAS No. 120-12-7)
Diethyl phthalate (CAS No. 84-66-2)
V I N 12.6.3.8 The extraction vessel shall be removed from the plat‐

form shaker and shall be placed in a sonicator for 20 minutes
at a “no heat” condition.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Di-n-octyl phthalate (CAS No. 117-84-0)
Fluorene (CAS No. 86-73-7)
Phenanthrene (CAS No. 85-01-8)
Pyrene (CAS No. 129-00-0)
D I N 12.6.3.9 Immediately after sonification has been concluded,
the extraction vessel shall be vented by lifting the lid to prevent
the creation of a vacuum within the vessel.
IN
(8) 2-Nitrophenol (CAS No. 88-75-5) N 12.6.3.10 The specimens shall be allowed to rest in the extrac‐
(9) Phenol (CAS No. 108-95-2) tion vessel until it has returned to room temperature after
(10) 2,4,6-Trichlorophenol (CAS No. 88-06-2) approximately 10–15 minutes.
O R
N 12.6.2 Procedures for Contamination of Specimens.
N 12.6.2.1 Outer shell fabric prepared as specified in 12.4.3.2
shall be cut into 75 mm × 150 mm (3 in. × 6 in.) specimens.
N 12.6.3.11 The resulting solution in the extraction vessel shall
be filtered using a glass vacuum filtration flask assembly, with a
45 mm (1.77 in.) glass fiber filter placed on the fritted surface
F
N 12.6.2.2 Using a gastight syringe, a volume of 300 µL of the
polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH)/phthalate/phenols
contamination mixture specified in 12.6.1 shall be dispensed
uniformly onto each specimen by drawing the solution into the
of the filtration apparatus and the apparatus then clamped to
the flask and connected to a laboratory vacuum line.
N 12.6.3.12 The glass filtration flask and specimen pieces shall
be rinsed with 5 mL of extraction solvent.
syringe and slowly depressing the plunger onto the specimen N 12.6.3.13 Any excess solvent shall be squeezed from the speci‐
while gently rubbing the end of the syringe onto the specimen. men pieces into the filtration flask.
N 12.6.2.3 Contaminated specimens shall be permitted to dry N 12.6.3.14 The liquid content of the vacuum filtration flask
under ambient laboratory conditions for no more than shall be transferred to an oil tube or other graduated conden‐
30 minutes following the application of the PAH/phthalate/ sation vessel suitable for measuring extract evaporation using a
phenols mixture. small glass funnel.
N 12.6.2.4 The specimen shall be placed in a labeled jar or other
container and kept in a refrigerator at 4°C (39°F) until ready
for shipping.
N 12.6.3.15 Modifications to the specimen extraction proce‐ ing with the percentage removal based on the calibration
dures provided in 12.6.3.1 through 12.6.3.13 shall be permit‐ curves.
ted, provided that extraction recovery average efficiencies of
80 percent or better can be demonstrated. N 12.6.5.3.1 The concentration in each specimen shall be repor‐
ted in μg/g specimen.
N 12.6.4 Preparation of Extract for Analysis.
N 12.6.5.4 Cleaning efficiency shall be calculated for each
N 12.6.4.1* The condensation vessel and contents prepared as contaminant with the following equation and as specified in
specified in 12.6.3 shall be placed on the rack under a minia‐ 12.6.5.4.1 and 12.6.5.4.2:
ture evaporator/concentrator that is connected to ultra-high-
purity nitrogen, and the contents shall be evaporated to less
than or equal to 2 mL. [12.6.5.4]
 (C − C M ) − (CW − C P ) 
N 12.6.4.2 After reconstitution, the condensation vessel shall be cleaning efficiency = 1 −  C  × 100
(CC − C M )
placed in a vortex tube and vortexed 10–15 seconds to incorpo‐
rate any solids that have dried on the side of the tube.
N 12.6.4.3 The contents of the vortex tube shall be measured
where:
CC = contaminated specimen
 
L Y
using a disposable sterile pipette and the volume shall be recor‐
ded.
N 12.6.4.4 The contents of the vortex tube shall be returned to
the oil tube with an appropriate amount of solvent to increase
O
CP = material specimen (washed, not contaminated)N
CM = material specimen (unwashed, not contaminated)
CW = contaminated specimen (washed)
N 12.6.5.4.1 The actual masses used in the calculation of clean‐
E
the final volume to 2 mL.
ing efficiency shall be the specific measured concentration of
N 12.6.4.5 The oil tube shall be vortexed and the contents shall
S
contaminant.
be transferred with a disposable glass pipette into 10 mL glass
beaker. N 12.6.5.4.2 If the measured mass is below the detection limit, a
N 12.6.4.6 The contents from the beaker shall be removed using

a 3 mL syringe with an attached polyvinylidene fluoride
(PVDF) 0.45 µm syringe.
L U
value of “0” shall be used.
N 12.6.5.5 The average cleaning efficiency shall be determined
for all contaminants.
N 12.6.4.7 The contents of the syringe shall be filled into auto-

sampler vial.
N 12.6.4.8* Alternative procedures for preparing the extract for
U A N 12.6.5.5.1 If any cleaning efficiencies are indicated as being
above 100 percent, a cleaning efficiency of 100 percent shall be
used for the purpose of calculating the average cleaning effi‐
ciency.
ID
analysis shall be permitted, provided that extraction recovery
average efficiencies of 80 percent or better can be demonstra‐ N 12.6.5.5.2 If any cleaning efficiencies are indicated as being
below 0 percent, a cleaning efficiency of 0 percent shall be
V
ted.
I
used for the purpose of calculating the average cleaning effi‐
N 12.6.5 Analysis of Specimens. ciency.
D
N 12.6.5.1 Calibration curves shall be prepared for each contam‐
inant by applying known concentrations to specimen fabrics
N 12.6.5.5.3 If any analytical anomaly that cannot be rational‐
ized on the basis of the data set and other measurements is
IN
and extracting the specimens using the procedures specified in encountered for the analysis of a specific contaminant, discard‐
12.6.3 and 12.6.4 using the analysis conditions specified in ing one contaminant from the calculation of the average clean‐
12.6.5.2. ing efficiency shall be permitted.
O R
N 12.6.5.2 Extracts prepared as specified in 12.6.4 shall be
analyzed using gas chromatography and mass spectroscopy
using the following analysis parameters:
N 12.6.5.6* Alternative procedures for the analysis of specimens
specified in 12.6.5.1 through 12.6.5.3 shall be permitted, provi‐
ded that the procedures take the concentrations of the controls
into account by providing sufficient sensitivity to allow for the
F
(1) A fused silica nonpolar 30 m, 0.25 mm ID, 0.50 µm mass
spectroscopy column with a guard column that has been measurement of a 1.0 percent difference or lower in cleaning
deactivated but not coated with stationary phase efficiency.
(2) Inlet temperature of 200°C (392°F) N 12.7 Heavy Metal Contaminated Specimen Preparation,
(3) Transfer line temperature of 300°C (572°F) Extraction, and Analysis.
(4) Ion source temperature of 300°C (572°F)
(5) Oven temperature of 60°C (140°F); held for 2 minutes N 12.7.1 Selection of Contaminants.
(6) Temperature ramp of 7°C (44.6°F) per minute to 310°C
(590°F); held for 10 minutes N 12.7.1.1 A certified solution shall be obtained that contains
(7) A carrier gas of ultra-high-purity helium at 1.2 L/min the following metals, each at a concentration of 100 ppm:
(40.6 oz) (1) Antimony
(8) 1 μL sample splitless injection via autosampler into inlet (2) Arsenic
containing split/splitless straight with wool topaz liner (3) Cadmium
(4) Chromium
N 12.6.5.3 The output from the gas chromatography and mass (5) Cobalt
spectroscopy shall be used to integrate and calculate the (6) Lead
concentration of each chemical per mass of specimen remain‐
N 12.7.1.2 Alternative techniques for preparing a mixture of the N 12.7.3.1.3 Each PFA reaction vessel shall be microwaved at
target heavy metal contaminants shall be permitted if it can be 1600 W, 90 percent power, for 20 minute at 170°C (338°F) and
demonstrated that the heavy metal concentrations are 100 ppm held for 30 minutes for a total 50-minute cycle.
± 10 ppm.
N 12.7.3.1.4 The specimens in the PFA reaction vessels shall be
N 12.7.2 Procedures for Contamination of Specimens. allowed to cool for approximately 30 minutes.
N 12.7.2.1 All handling of specimens and metal solutions shall N 12.7.3.1.5* Modifications to the specimen acid digestion
be performed while wearing disposable gloves. Use of glassware procedures provided in 12.7.3.1.1 through 12.7.3.1.4 shall be
for contamination or extraction shall not be permitted as the permitted, provided that extraction recovery average efficien‐
use of these items can lead to cross contamination. cies of 90 percent or better can be demonstrated.
N 12.7.2.2 Outer shell fabric prepared as specified in 12.4.3.2 N 12.7.3.2 Filtration.
shall be cut into 25 mm × 50 mm (1 in. × 2 in.) specimens, and
N 12.7.3.2.1 The gravitation filtration system shall be set up
the weight of each specimen shall be recorded in grams to the
nearest 0.001 g.
N 12.7.2.3* Using tweezers, one specimen shall be horizontally
using a grade 40 quantitative ashless (0.007 percent ash maxi‐
mum) filter paper and plastic beakers for the filter solution.
N 12.7.3.2.2 The PFA microwave reaction vessel shall be care‐
L Y
placed on a wire rack or other suitable support structure that
minimizes the contact of the bottom surface of the specimens
with the table or counter service.
N 12.7.2.4 A volume of 1.0 mL of a 100 ppm metals standard
O N
fully opened in the vent hood away from lab technicians due to
the potential release of nitric acid fumes.
N 12.7.3.2.3 A volume of 10 mL (1∕3 oz) deionized water shall be
added to the microwave reaction vessel and the reaction vessel
E
solution shall be pipetted onto each fabric specimen.
shall be turned over three times.
N 12.7.2.4.1 The operator shall ensure that the specimen is at
the bottom of the plastic tube and sufficiently wetted by the
metals standard solution.
N 12.7.2.4.2 A total volume of 500 µL of the metals standard
U S
N 12.7.3.2.3.1 The reaction vessel shall be permitted to
“breathe” if needed by opening the lid to off-gas.
N 12.7.3.2.4 Deionized water and the acid-digested sample
mixture shall be poured into the filter setup.
solution shall be pipetted and allowed to dry before pipetting
the remaining 500 µL.
N 12.7.2.4.3* The operator shall ensure that all applied metals
A L
N 12.7.3.2.5 The addition of deionized water shall be repeated
to microwave reaction vessel two more times, for a total of
30 mL deionized water rinsed through microwave reaction
U
standard solution remains on the specimen.
vessel.
N 12.7.2.4.4 Contaminated specimens shall be dried in an oven
at 50°C ± 5°C for 5 minutes, −0/+2 minutes to complete their
drying.
I D N 12.7.3.2.6 The resulting solution shall be filtered thoroughly
once, then a second time, rinsing the filter paper with a small
amount (<5 mL) of deionized water both times.
N 12.7.2.5 The weight of the contaminated specimens shall be
recorded in grams to the nearest 0.001 g.
I V N 12.7.3.2.7 Each sample solution shall be brought to a volume
of 40 mL (1.35 oz) volume using deionized water.
D
N 12.7.2.6 After the specimens have been allowed to fully dry,
plastic tweezers shall be used to insert specimens into metal- N 12.7.3.2.8 The sample solution shall be vortexed.
IN
free plastic tubes. N 12.7.3.2.9* Modifications to the specimen filtration proce‐
N 12.7.2.7 The amount of standard solution on the specimen dures provided in 12.7.3.2.3.1 through 12.7.3.2.8 shall be
shall be verified using the following equation: permitted, provided that extraction recovery average efficien‐
O R
amount of standard solution applied ( µg ) =
[12.7.2.7]
cies of 80 percent or better can be demonstrated.
N 12.7.3.3 Instrument Sample Preparation.
N 12.7.3.3.1 An internal standard shall be prepared in a 100 mL
F
 final specimen weight ( g ) − initial specimen weight ( g )  ×1000 µg g
N 12.7.3 Extraction of Specimens.

N 12.7.3.1 Acid Digestion.
(3.38 oz) volumetric flask to receive 10 ppb using the following
constituents:
(1)
(2)
2 percent nitric acid
0.2 mL of 100 ppm Ga
(3) 0.2 mL of 100 ppm In
N 12.7.3.1.1 Each specimen shall be added to an individual PFA (4) 0.2 mL of 100 ppm La
microwave reaction vessel.
N 12.7.3.3.2 A 1 mL volume of the extracted sample and a 25 µL
N 12.7.3.1.2 A volume of 10 mL (1∕3 oz) concentrated nitric acid, volume of the internal standard shall be added to a 10 mL volu‐
approximately 70 percent weight/volume, shall be added to metric flask and diluted to volume with 2 percent nitric acid,
each PFA reaction vessel. and the resultant sample shall be vortexed.
N 12.7.3.3.3 A 10 mL (1∕3 oz) sample of each instrument calibra‐ N 12.7.4.2.3 The calculated concentration in ppb shall be used
tion standard shall be prepared at the following concentrations to calculate the mass in μg of each metal in the original 40 mL
using 2 percent nitric acid to bring volume to 10 mL (1∕3 oz): vial described in 12.7.3.3.3.
(1) 0 ppb (to serve as blank) N 12.7.4.2.3.1 A correction factor of 0.401 shall be used as calcu‐
(2) 100 ppb lated by the two dilution factors in the following equation:
(3) 1 ppm
(4) 10 ppm
(5) 100 ppm [12.7.4.2.3.1]
0.010025 L × 0.040 L = 0.000401 L
N 12.7.3.3.4 The internal standard shall be added.
N 12.7.3.3.4.1 Once the test method recovery is established, the N 12.7.4.2.4 The blank and blank specimen from each contami‐
use of the internal standard shall be permitted to be optional. nated specimens shall be subtracted.
N 12.7.3.3.5 All samples shall be vortexed.

N 12.7.3.3.6 Alternative sample preparation up procedures in
lieu of 12.7.3.3.2 and 12.7.3.3.3 shall be permitted if a suitable
N 12.7.4.2.5 The cleaning efficiency shall be calculated using
the following equation:
L Y
scheme for demonstrating calibration of the respective metals
achieved a linear correlation coefficient of 0.90 or better.
N 12.7.4 Analysis of Specimens.
cleaning efficiency =
O N
µg metals1 − µg metals f
µg metalsi
[12.7.4.2.5]
× 100 percent
N 12.7.4.1 Instrumentation Set-Up.

N 12.7.4.1.1 An inductively coupled plasma-mass spectrometer
(ICP-MS) shall be prepared using the following method param‐ reported.
S E
N 12.7.4.2.5.1 If any cleaning efficiencies are indicated as being
above 100 percent, a cleaning efficiency of 100 percent shall be
U
eters to include those metals of interest: N 12.7.4.2.5.2 If any cleaning efficiencies are indicated as being
(1) Sweeps/readings: 20 below 0 percent, a cleaning efficiency of 0 percent shall be
reported.
L
(2) Readings/replicates: 1
(3) Number of replicates: 3 N 12.7.4.2.5.3 If any analytical anomaly that cannot be rational‐
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Dwell time: 50.0 ms
Mode: KED
RPq: 0.25
Detector mode: Dual
U A ized on the basis of the data set and other measurements is
encountered for the analysis of a specific contaminant, discard‐
ing one contaminant from being reported and interpreted for
the determination of heavy metal cleaning efficiencies shall be
(8)
(9)
(10)
Measurement units: Counts
Automatic lens: On
Spectral peak processing: Sum
I D permitted.
N 12.7.4.2.6 The percent recovery shall be calculated using the
(11)
(12)
(13)
Signal profile processing
Baseline readings: 0
Smoothing: Yes, Factor 5
I V following equation:
D
N 12.7.4.1.2 The blank, all samples, and instrument calibration µg extracted
[12.7.4.2.6]
IN
standards shall be run on ICP-MS. ×100 percent
µg deposited onto individual fabric swatch
N 12.7.4.1.3* An alternative analytical technique shall be permit‐
ted if it demonstrates sensitivity to the respective metals to a N 12.8 Bacterial Contaminated Specimen Preparation, Extrac‐
O R
minimum of 100 ppb, provides for a linear calibration for
determining each metal concentration with a correlation coef‐
ficient of 0.90 or better, and permits the ability for discerning a
difference of 1.0 percent or lower in cleaning efficiency.
tion, and Analysis.
N 12.8.1 Preparation of Test Microorganisms. Testing shall be
performed in accordance with ASTM E2274, Standard Test
F
N 12.7.4.2 Data Analysis.
N 12.7.4.2.1 The slope, intercept, and regression coefficient
shall be calculated using standard metal solutions (0 ppb–100
Method for Evaluation of Laundry Sanitizers and Disinfectants, with
the following modifications:
(1)
(2)
The test microorganisms shall be Klebsiella pneumoniae
(ATCC 4352) and Staphylococcus aureus (ATCC 6538).
A soil load shall not be added to the inoculum.
ppm).
N 12.7.4.2.2 The calculated slope and intercept shall be used to N 12.8.2 Procedures for Contamination of Specimens.
calculate the concentration of each individual metal each
N 12.8.2.1 All handling of specimens and metal solutions shall
digested fabric swatch (ppb) in the 10 mL vial described in
be performed while wearing disposable gloves.
12.7.3.3.1 using the following equation:
N 12.8.2.2 Outer shell fabric prepared as specified in 12.5.3.2
shall be cut into 25 mm × 38 mm (1 in. × 1.5 in.) specimens.
[12.7.4.2.2]
metal ion counts − metal ion intercept N 12.8.2.2.1 An additional outer shell specimen shall be
metal concentration ( ppb ) = prepared as specified in 12.8.2.2 for the verification of the steri‐
metal ion slope
lization process specified in 12.8.2.3 and subjected to suitable
sterilization assurance procedures.
N 12.8.2.3 The outer shell specimens shall be wrapped in alumi‐ N 12.9 Preparation and Handling of Contaminated Specimens
num protective foil and autoclaved for 90 minutes at 121°C and Surrogate Clothing.
(250°F).
N 12.9.1 Preparation of Surrogate Garments.
N 12.8.2.4 Each specimen to be contaminated shall be inocula‐
ted with 0.03 mL of the prepared inoculum for the respective N 12.9.1.1 Surrogate garment outer shells shall be made from
type of bacteria by dispersing the inoculum in such a way that an undyed 60 percent para-aramid/40 percent polybenzimida‐
covers as much of the specimen area as possible. zole (PBI) base fabric with a reinforcement grid meeting the
following specifications:
N 12.8.2.4.1 Individual specimens shall be inoculated with only (1) The outer shell fabric shall have a unit area weight of
one type of bacteria. 240 g/m2 to 268 g/m2 (7.1 oz/yd2 to 7.9 oz/yd2).
N 12.8.2.5 The contaminated specimens shall be placed in an (2) The outer shell fabric shall have a thickness of 0.584 mm
individual petri dish and incubated at 37°C (98.6°F) for ± 0.254 mm (0.023 in. ± 0.10 in.).
Y
30 minutes. (3) The outer shell fabric shall have a water absorption resist‐
ance of less than 5 percent when tested in pristine condi‐
N 12.8.2.6 Following incubation, the specimen shall be kept in a
refrigerator at 4°C (39°F) until ready for shipping.
N 12.8.3 Analysis of Specimens for Bacterial Contamination.
tion in accordance with Section 8.25 of NFPA 1971.
N
N 12.9.1.2 Fabric used for the creation of the sample mesh pock‐
ets on each garment shall be an aramid-based, warp-knit, mesh-
L
O
N 12.8.3.1 Specimens shall be analyzed for bacterial contamina‐ style fabric having an open area of 40 to 60 percent and a unit
tion in accordance with Sections 12.12, 13, 14.2, and 15 of area weight ranging from 220 g/m2 to 270 g/m2 (6.5 oz/yd2 to
ASTM E2274, Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Laundry 8.0 oz/yd2).
Sanitizers and Disinfectants, with the following modifications:
(1) Ultra-pure, microbial-free water shall be used as the water
wash control.
and surrogate pants. E
N 12.9.1.3 Surrogate garments shall consist of a surrogate coat
S
N 12.9.1.4 Surrogate coats shall be made from a single layer of
(2)
(3)
A suitable neutralizer broth qualified in accordance with
Section 14.2 of ASTM E2274 shall be used.
A 5-hour threshold shall be used to calculate the initial
concentration of viable bacterial cells attached to the
L U
outer shell fabric using appropriate seams, finished edges, and
mesh pockets with thread that complies with the respective
requirements of NFPA 1971, and shall be fabricated as shown
in Figure 12.9.1.4 with the following additional specifications:
(4)
specimen that could not be estimated at the initial inocu‐
lation.
A polymerase chain reaction (PCR) detection method
shall be used to identify and quantify the levels of micro‐
U A (1)
(2)
Surrogate coats shall be prepared with a 117 cm (46 in.)
chest diameter and an 81.3 cm (32 in.) sleeve length.
Surrogate coats shall not have front closures, collars, coat
(5)
organisms present on the test specimens.
Viable bacterial levels shall be determined by colony-
counting techniques for establishing the number of
I D (3)
sleeve end reinforcements, hardware, or any other mate‐
rials not specified in this section.
Each surrogate coat shall have a 254 mm × 254 mm
(6)
colony forming units (CFU).
I
A minimum average of 1.0 × 104 CFU/carrier shall be
recovered for a valid test. V (10 in. × 10 in.) outer shell pocket positioned on the
front lower left side of the garment, approximately
50 mm (2 in.) from the bottom hem and 50 mm (2 in.)
(7)
D
A minimum average of 1.0 × 104 CFU/mL in the wash
water control shall be recovered for a valid test.
from the left side seam, that is secured using a double
needle seam and has a top finished edge with a 152 mm
IN
(6 in.) strip of hook-and-loop closure to secure the top of
N 12.8.3.2 Percent reduction and log10 reduction shall be calcu‐ the pocket.
lated as shown in the equations below: (4) Each surrogate coat shall have a 75 mm (3 in.) wide strip
O R
percent reduction (%) =
[12.8.3.2a]
average water-washed swatches − average fabric sanitizer-washed swatches

of reflective trim compliant with the respective require‐
ments of NFPA 1971 attached circumferentially around
the garment at 75 mm (3 in.) above the bottom hem of
the coat and circumferentially around each sleeve at
F
log10 reduction =
average water-washed swaatches
×100
[12.8.3.2b]
(5)
75 mm (3 in.) above the bottom edge of the sleeve end.
Each surrogate coat shall have three 152 mm × 152 mm
(6 in. × 6 in.) sample mesh pockets in accordance with
the following requirements:
(a) The pockets shall be positioned on the front of the
log10 ( average water-washed swatches ) − log10 ( average sanitizer-washed swatches ) garment.
(b) One pocket shall be positioned on top of the lower
N 12.8.3.3 Modifications to the analysis procedures provided in left side pocket, a second pocket shall be positioned
12.8.3.1 and 12.8.3.3 shall be permitted if the alternative meth‐ on the top right side, and a third pocket shall be
ods are able to achieve viable bacterial counts in specimens positioned on the upper right sleeve.
subjected to both the sanitization process and the water wash (c) The openings of all three pockets shall be oriented
for determination of log10 reductions. toward the top, as shown in Figure 12.9.1.4.
(d) The pockets shall include a 101 mm (4 in.) strip of
12 mm (0.5 in.) hook-and-loop tape for securing
the open end of the pocket.
N FIGURE 12.9.1.4 Design and Locations of Sample Mesh

Pockets on Surrogate Coats.
L Y
N 12.9.1.5 Surrogate pants shall be made from a single layer of
outer shell fabric using appropriate seams, finished edges, and O N
mesh pockets with thread that complies with the respective
requirements of NFPA 1971, and shall be fabricated as shown
in Figure 12.9.1.5 with the following additional specifications:
Pockets on Surrogate Pants.
S E
N FIGURE 12.9.1.5 Design and Locations of Sample Mesh
(1)
(2)
Surrogate pants shall be prepared with a 102 cm (40 in.)
waist diameter and 81.3 cm (32 in.) inseam length.
Surrogate pants shall not have fly closures, suspender
hardware, pant hem reinforcements, other hardware, or
L U
N 12.9.2 Preparation of Ballast Fabric-Based Wash Panels.
N 12.9.2.1 Four different ballast fabric–based wash panels —
Panel A, Panel B, Panel C, and Panel F — shall be prepared
(3)
any other materials not specified in this section.
Each surrogate pant shall have a 254 mm × 254 mm
(10 in. × 10 in.) outer shell pocket positioned in the
middle of the upper right leg of the garment that is
U A from the ballast materials specified in 12.4.4.3 according to the
instructions provided in 12.9.2.2 through 12.9.2.5. All panel
edges shall be unfinished. Panel D shall be the surrogate coat
and Panel E shall be the surrogate pants prepared according to
secured using a double needle seam and has a top
loop closure to secure the top of the pocket.
I D
finished edge with a 152 mm (6 in.) strip of hook-and-
12.9.1.
N 12.9.2.2 Panel A shall be a 686 mm × 686 mm (27 in. × 27 in.)
(4) Each surrogate pant shall have a 254 mm × 254 mm
I V
(10 in. × 10 in.) outer shell reinforcement in the middle
of left leg that is secured using a double needle seam on
square with two 508 mm (20 in.) slits set 152 mm (6 in.) from
each edge as shown in Figure 12.9.2.2.
(5)
all four sides.
D
Each surrogate pant shall have a 75 mm (3 in.) wide strip
N 12.9.2.3 Panel B shall be a 686 mm × 1500 mm (27 in. ×
59 in.) rectangle with two bisecting 560 mm (22 in.) slits origi‐
IN
of reflective trim compliant with the respective require‐ nating from opposite sides on the shorter dimensions of the
ments of NFPA 1971 attached circumferentially around shape as shown in Figure 12.9.2.3.
each lower leg of the garment at 75 mm (3 in.) above the N 12.9.2.4 Panel C shall be a 686 mm × 1500 mm (27 in. ×
(6)
O R
bottom hem of the leg.
Each surrogate pant shall have three 152 mm × 152 mm
(6 in. × 6 in.) sample mesh pockets in accordance with
the following requirements:
59 in.) rectangle with two sets of two bisecting 560 mm (22 in.)
slits originating from opposite sides on the shorter dimensions
of the shape, spaced at 229 mm (9 in.) intervals from each
edge and from each other, as shown in Figure 12.9.2.4.
F (a) The pockets shall be positioned on the front of the

garment.
(b) One pocket shall be positioned in the middle
approximately 101 mm (4 in.) from the waistline, a
second pocket shall be centered on top of the right
N 12.9.2.5 Panel F shall be a total of three rectangular panels
that measure 228 mm × 750 mm (9 in. x 29.5 in.) as shown in
Figure 12.9.2.5.
N 12.9.2.6 Panel D shall be depicted as shown in Figure 12.9.2.6.
leg pocket, and a third pocket shall be centered on
top of the left knee. N 12.9.2.7 Panel E shall be depicted as shown in Figure 12.9.2.7.
(c) The openings of all three pockets shall be oriented N 12.9.3 Preparation of Wash Load.
toward the top, as shown in Figure 12.9.1.5.
(d) The pockets shall include a 101 mm (4 in.) strip of N 12.9.3.1 Panel A shall be folded and placed into the wash load
12 mm (0.5 in.) hook-and-loop tape for securing as shown in Figure 12.9.3.1.
the open end of the pocket. N 12.9.3.2 Panel B shall be folded and placed into the wash load
N 12.9.1.6 Surrogate garments shall be subjected to an advanced as shown in Figure 12.9.3.2.
cleaning by the verification organization prior to use by the N 12.9.3.3 Panel C shall be folded and placed into the wash load
cleaning facility. as shown in Figure 12.9.3.3.
686 mm (27 in.)
508 mm 508 mm
(20 in.) (20 in.)
1500 mm (59 in.)
L Y
O N
E
152 mm 318 mm 152 mm
(6 in.) (15 in.) (6 in.)
Panel A
Weight 181.4 g
(0.4 lb)
U S
N FIGURE 12.9.2.2 Specifications and Photograph for Panel A.
N 12.9.3.4 Panel D shall be folded and placed into the wash load
A L
N 12.9.3.8* The sequencing of panels shall be as follows:
as shown in Figure 12.9.3.4.
N 12.9.3.5 Panel E shall be folded and placed into the wash load
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U (1) The sequencing shall be repeated for attaining a load
with the mass capacity specified by the cleaning facility.
I
as shown in Figure 12.9.3.5. (2) Panel D and Panel E shall be alternated in the sequenc‐
ing.
V
N 12.9.3.6 Panel F shall be folded and placed into the wash load (3) A total of three panels each shall be used for Panel D and
as shown in Figure 12.9.3.6.
D I
N 12.9.3.7 The panels shall be placed in the washer/extractor
according to the sequence provided in Figure 12.9.3.7(a), start‐
ing at the bottom, and depicted in Figure 12.9.3.7(b) through
Panel E.
N 12.9.3.9* Adjustments to the use and sequencing of the panels
is permitted to attain proper load capacity where the panels
IN
open during the cleaning process.
Figure 12.9.3.7(f).
O R
F
686 mm (27 in.)
343 mm 343 mm
(13.5 in.) (13.5 in.)
560 mm
(22 in.)
L Y
1500 mm (59 in.)
O N
S E
L U
560 mm
U A
D
(22 in.)
V I
D I
IN Panel B
Weight 354 g
R
(0.78 lb)
N FIGURE 12.9.2.3 Specifications and Photograph for Panel B.
F O
686 mm (27 in.)

229 mm 229 mm 229 mm
(9 in.) (9 in.) (9 in.)
560 mm
(22 in.)
1500 mm (59 in.)

L Y
O N
E
560 mm
(22 in.)
U S
A L
Panel C
Weight 354 g
D U
N FIGURE 12.9.2.4
(0.78 lb)
V I
Specifications and Photograph for Panel C.
229 mm
(9 in.)
D I
IN
750 mm
O R
F
(29.5 in.)
Panel F
Weight 181 g
(0.4 lb)
N FIGURE 12.9.2.5 Specifications and Photograph for Panel F.
Panel D
Weight 354 g
(0.78 lb)
L Y
N FIGURE 12.9.2.6 Diagram and Photograph for Panel D.
O N
S E
L U
U A
I D
I V
D
IN
O R
F
Panel E
Weight 354 g
(0.78 lb)
N FIGURE 12.9.2.7 Diagram and Photograph for Panel E.
L Y
O N
E
Note: Panel is to be placed flat and folded in half from side to side.
N FIGURE 12.9.3.1 Steps for Folding and Placing Panel A into Wash Load.
U S
A L
V I
D I
IN
O R
F
Note: Panel B is to be divided in thirds. Using these reference points,
Panel B is to be grabbed at each line above and the left fold is to be
pulled under the right fold until material is flat on itself.
N FIGURE 12.9.3.2 Steps for Folding and Placing Panel B into Wash Load.
L Y
O N
S E
L U
U A
I D
Note: The panel is to be divided in thirds. Using these reference points,
Panel B is to be grabbed at each line above, and the right fold is to be
N FIGURE 12.9.3.3
I V
pulled under the left fold until material is flat on itself.
Steps for Folding and Placing Panel C into Wash Load.
D
IN
O R
F
L Y
O N
S E
L U
Note: The panel is to be turned perpendicular and placed flat on a
surface. The panel is to be divided in half, noting the reference point.
The panel is to be folded in half onto itself, keeping coat arms in
U A
D
place as shown in the drawing.
N FIGURE 12.9.3.4
I
Steps for Folding and Placing Panel D into Wash Load.
V
D I
IN
O R
F
L Y
O N
S E
L U
U A
I D
I V
D
IN
O R
Note: The panel is to be perpendicular and placed flat on a surface.
The panel is to be divided in half, noting the reference point.
The panel is to be folded in half onto itself.
F
N FIGURE 12.9.3.5 Steps for Folding and Placing Panel E into Wash Load.
L Y
O N
S E
L U
Note: The panels are to be laid flat and placed across the preceding
U A
ballast sample, oriented from front to back of the wash load.
N FIGURE 12.9.3.6
I D
Steps for Folding and Placing Panel F into Wash Load.
I V
D
Panel
IN
R
D
A
F
O
A
C
F
A
F
A
A
B
A
C
F
N FIGURE 12.9.3.7(a) Sequence for Placing Panels in Washer/Extractor Drum.
L Y
O N
N FIGURE 12.9.3.7(b) Placement of Panel F (3 Pieces) into Washer/Extractor Drum.
S E
L U
U A
I D
I V
D
IN
O R
F
N FIGURE 12.9.3.7(c) Placement of Panel C into Washer/Extractor Drum.
L Y
O N
E
N FIGURE 12.9.3.7(d) Placement of Panel A into Washer/Extractor Drum.
U S
A L
V I
D I
IN
O R
F
N FIGURE 12.9.3.7(e) Placement of Panel D into Washer/Extractor Drum.
ANNEX A 1851-63
L Y
N FIGURE 12.9.3.7(f) Placement of Panel E into Washer/Extractor Drum. O N
Annex A Explanatory Material
Annex A is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is
S E
should utilize the system employed by the listing organization
to identify a listed product.
included for informational purposes only. This annex contains explan‐
atory material, numbered to correspond with the applicable text para‐
graphs.
•
U
N A.3.3.5 Carcinogen/Carcinogenic. Lists of carcinogens can be
found in the following sources:
L
(1) U.S. National Toxicology Program (NTP): https://
A.3.2.1 Approved. The National Fire Protection Association
does not approve, inspect, or certify any installations, proce‐
dures, equipment, or materials; nor does it approve or evaluate
testing laboratories. In determining the acceptability of installa‐
U A ntp.niehs.nih.gov/pubhealth/roc/index-1.html#toc1
(2) International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC):
http://monographs.iarc.fr/ENG/Classification/
(3) National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
tions, procedures, equipment, or materials, the authority
having jurisdiction may base acceptance on compliance with
NFPA or other appropriate standards. In the absence of such
I D (NIOSH):
npotocca.html
https://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/cancer/
(4) American Conference of Governmental Industrial
I V
standards, said authority may require evidence of proper instal‐
lation, procedure, or use. The authority having jurisdiction
Hygienists (ACGIH): 2016 Threshold Limit Values (TLVs)
and Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs)
D
may also refer to the listings or labeling practices of an organi‐ Each organization classifies specific substances or activities as
zation that is concerned with product evaluations and is thus in being carcinogenic in different ways.
IN
a position to determine compliance with appropriate standards
for the current production of listed items. The products of combustion (smoke and fire gases) at a typi‐
cal residential structural fire are a common source of carcino‐
A.3.2.2 Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The phrase gens for fire fighters. As of 2007, IARC has classified
R
“authority having jurisdiction,” or its acronym AHJ, is used in occupational exposure as a fire fighter as a Class 2B carcinogen
NFPA documents in a broad manner, since jurisdictions and (possibly carcinogenic to humans).
O
approval agencies vary, as do their responsibilities. Where
public safety is primary, the authority having jurisdiction may A.3.3.8 CBRN Terrorism Agents. Chemical terrorism agents
include solid, liquid, and gaseous chemical warfare agents and
F be a federal, state, local, or other regional department or indi‐

vidual such as a fire chief; fire marshal; chief of a fire preven‐
tion bureau, labor department, or health department; building
official; electrical inspector; or others having statutory author‐
ity. For insurance purposes, an insurance inspection depart‐
toxic industrial chemicals. Chemical warfare agents include,
but are not limited, to GB (Sarin), GD (Soman), HD (sulfur
mustard), VX, and specific toxic industrial chemicals. Many
toxic industrial chemicals (e.g., chlorine and ammonia) are
identified as potential chemical terrorism agents because of
ment, rating bureau, or other insurance company
representative may be the authority having jurisdiction. In their availability and the degree of injury they could inflict.
many circumstances, the property owner or his or her designa‐ Biological terrorism agents are bacteria, viruses, or toxins
ted agent assumes the role of the authority having jurisdiction; derived from biological material. The CBRN ensemble protects
at government installations, the commanding officer or depart‐ against biological particles dispersed as aerosols and liquid-
mental official may be the authority having jurisdiction. borne pathogens. Airborne biological terrorism agents could
A.3.2.4 Listed. The means for identifying listed equipment be dispersed in the form of liquid aerosols or solid aerosols
may vary for each organization concerned with product evalua‐ (e.g., a powder of bacterial spores). Liquid-borne pathogens
tion; some organizations do not recognize equipment as listed could be encountered during a terrorism incident as a result of
unless it is also labeled. The authority having jurisdiction deliberate disposal or from body fluids released by victims of
other weapons (e.g., explosives, firearms).
CBRN ensembles protect from radiological particulates (e) Substituted phenols (e.g., 2-methylphenol and
dispersed as aerosols. The protection is defined for blocking or pentachlorophenol)
filtering airborne particulate matter and liquid and solid aero‐ (3) Hazardous particulates (e.g., soot, asbestos, silica, lead
sols but not for radiological gases or vapors. Airborne particu‐ dust)
lates have the ability to emit alpha and beta particles and
ionizing radiation from the decay of unstable isotopes. In contrast, many volatile organic chemicals such as formal‐
dehyde and benzene, while hazardous, easily evaporate unless
N A.3.3.12 Cleaning. Cleaning is considered separate from the bound in the materials used in the element. In addition,
use of disinfectants and sanitizers; however, some cleaning carbon particles that make up the majority of smoke actually
processes might also effectively remove biological contamina‐ absorb and hold many products of combustion, resulting in
tion. Removal of biological contamination is covered under persistent contamination.
disinfection and sanitization (see Section 7.4).
Certain materials, components, or portions of an ensemble
A.3.3.12.1 Advanced Cleaning. Advanced cleaning usually element or ensemble might be more susceptible to contamina‐
requires that ensemble elements be temporarily taken out of
service. Examples include hand washing and machine washing,
depending on the type of protective element involved. It
tion. For example, the textile fabric components of a protective
helmet might be more easily contaminated than the hard
surface of the helmet shell.
L Y
N
should be noted that advanced cleaning might not remove all
contaminants. N A.3.3.21 Decontamination. Decontamination is specific to the
• removal or neutralization of contamination whereas cleaning
A.3.3.12.2 Specialized Cleaning. This level of cleaning
involves specific procedures and specialized cleaning agents
O
can remove both soiling and contamination. Decontamination
might also apply to certain types of specialized cleaning where
particular procedures are used to remove or neutralize contam‐
E
and processes primarily for the removal of hazardous materials
such as bulk chemicals and other designated substances but inants other than products of combustion that are found on
S
excluding disinfection or sanitization of microbial contamina‐ protective ensembles or elements.
tion. Different approaches can be used for removing specific
Decontamination might involve mechanical, chemical, ther‐
U
types of contamination. Specialized cleaning can also be an
enhanced form of advanced cleaning. mal, or combined processes for removing or neutralizing
contaminants. An example of a mechanical process is where
N A.3.3.13 Cleaning Facility. This term is used within the stand‐
ard to collectively refer to any facility that can be subject to veri‐
fication for advanced cleaning, sanitization, or both.
A L
brushing or wiping removes an exterior contaminant from the
surface of the element. Chemical processes involve the use of
detergents or other cleaning agents that react with or aid in the
removal of contaminants from element materials. Heating is
N A.3.3.15 Contamination. Ensembles and ensemble elements
can be exposed to products of combustion and other hazard‐
ous materials in several ways through contact with gases/
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U one type of a thermal process where higher temperatures could
cause certain contaminants to evaporate out of the element
materials. Laundering is a form of a combined process where
vapors, liquids, or particulates. A fire in which the fire fighter
wears SCBA and is exposed to fire smoke, other particulates,
and fire gases represents a common source of contamination.
V I the machine agitation, use of a detergent, and heated water all

work together to remove contaminants from the element.
D I
The extent and persistency of the contamination in the
ensemble or ensemble element will vary with the type of
contaminant, the length of the contamination period, and the
N A.3.3.22 Disinfectant. Disinfectants as an antimicrobial agent
are considered a pesticide and thus subject to regulations estab‐
lished by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). All
disinfectants must be registered with the EPA and meet specific
IN
means by which the ensemble or ensemble elements are conta‐ labeling requirements. A listing of currently registered disinfec‐
minated. In general, contamination that is persistent repre‐ tants can be found at www.epa.gov/pesticide-registration/
sents the greatest concern since these forms of contaminants selected-epa-registered-disinfectants.
R
might remain in the clothing for extended periods of time and
provide continued exposure to the fire fighter. Disinfectants are required to be used as specified on the
product label as determined by the EPA registration process.
(1)
(2)
O
Examples of common contaminants found in fires include,
but are not limited to, the following:
F Heavy inorganic metals (e.g., arsenic, antimony,

cadmium, chromium, mercury)
Semi-volatile organic compounds, including but not limi‐
Disinfectants can either be used on hard surfaces such as
helmet shells and eye and face protection devices, or be used as
a presoak treatment for fabrics and textiles. Appropriately
labeled and registered disinfectants can also be used for disin‐
ted to, the following: fecting laundry. The specific requirements for demonstrating
acceptable performance are found in the following EPA Office
(a) Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs) (e.g., of Chemical Safety and Pollution Prevention (OCSPP) product
anthracene, chrysene, fluoranthene, naphthalene, performance test guidelines:
pyrene)
(b) Phthalate plasticizers [e.g., benzyl butyl phthalate (1) OCSPP 810.2200, “Disinfectants for Use on Hard Surfaces
(BPP), bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate (DEHP), — Efficacy Data Recommendations”
dimethyl phthalate] (2) OCSPP 810.2400, “Disinfectants and Sanitizers for Use on
(c) Polybrominated diphenyl ether flame retardants Fabrics and Textiles — Efficacy Data Recommendations”
(PBDEs) [e.g., pentabromodiphenyl ether (BDE Both of these documents provide for different classifications
99), hexabromodiphenyl ether (BDE 153)] of disinfectants for their intended use. Classification types
(d) Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) (e.g., include limited (primarily for household use), general or
2,2,3,3,4,4,5,5-Octachlorobiphenyl) broad spectrum (used in commercial areas), and hospital or
ANNEX A 1851-65
health care. Specific procedures and target microorganisms are the spread of that contamination to apparatus, vehicles, and
utilized to demonstrate the effectiveness of the respective disin‐ the outside environment. Preliminary exposure reduction tech‐
fectant. In general, a disinfectant must kill all target microor‐ niques for the outside of the ensemble and ensemble elements
ganisms. include brushing off dry debris with a soft bristle brush, rinsing
off debris with a low-pressure, low-volume water hose, and spot
See A.7.4.3 for more information on registered disinfectants. cleaning for non-aluminized elements. Only a soft cloth or
A.3.3.23 Drag Rescue Device. The drag rescue device (DRD) sponge should be used to remove debris on aluminized
is intended solely to assist in pulling or dragging an incapacita‐ element surfaces.
ted fire fighter and is not intended for vertical rescue opera‐ These actions, conducted by an individual with assistance,
tions where the victim fire fighter would be raised or lowered. are intended to begin the removal of soiling and contamina‐
A.3.3.29 Emergency Medical Operations. Patient care tion as soon as practically possible following the exposure of
includes, but is not limited to, first aid, cardiopulmonary resus‐ the individual on the fireground or at the emergency scene.
Y
citation, basic life support, and advanced life support. The goal of preliminary exposure reduction is reducing
contamination for the exposed ensemble or ensemble
A.3.3.32 Ensemble Elements. The proximity fire fighting
protective ensemble includes, but is not limited to, garments,
helmets, shrouds, gloves, and footwear. The structural fire
fighting protective ensemble includes, but is not limited to,
elements prior to leaving the scene. These techniques should
be applied while the member is still wearing their SCBA and is
N
still on air to prevent respiratory exposure from any off-gassing
of contaminants or to dust from airborne debris. It is realized
L
O
garments, helmets, hoods, gloves, and footwear. that circumstances might not allow for this immediate action
A.3.3.36 Flame Resistance (Protective Clothing and Equip‐ due to limitation of resources (e.g., spare ensembles or ensem‐
ble elements), inclement weather, and other factors. There‐
E
ment). Flame resistance can be an inherent property of the
textile material, or it can be imparted by specific treatment. fore, preliminary exposure reduction can take place some time
or distance away from the specific exposure event.
A.3.3.43 Goggles. To provide primary protection, goggles
must be certified to ANSI/ASSE Z87.1, Occupational and Educa‐
tional Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices.
U S
In the hazardous materials industry, these actions are often
referred to by the term gross decontamination, indicating the
rinsing of the first responder or the actions to partially remove
N A.3.3.44 Gross Decontamination. In this standard, the term
preliminary exposure reduction is used in lieu of the more
common industry term gross decontamination because it more
accurately describes the activities specified by NFPA 1851 for
A L
chemical residues or other hazardous substances after leaving
the hot (contaminated) zone and before entering the cold
(clean) zone during a hazardous materials incident. NFPA 1851
uses the term preliminary exposure reduction because the term
initially addressing contaminated fire-fighting protective
ensembles and ensemble elements. It is understood that while
preliminary exposure reduction is likely to remove some
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U decontamination suggests removal of contaminant. While there is
an expectation that some of the surface contamination could
be removed from protective ensembles or ensemble elements,
contamination from the surface of the protective ensemble or
ensemble elements, it does not guarantee full cleaning or
V I gross decontamination or preliminary exposure reduction does

not guarantee full cleaning or decontamination for all parts of
I
decontamination for the removal of all contaminants. The use the protective ensembles or ensemble elements.
of the term preliminary exposure reduction reduces the possible
N A.3.3.67 Products of Combustion. Normal products of
D
inference that gross decontamination might be the only activity
needed to render clothing safe for reuse and free from contam‐ combustion during fires include smoke (carbon particulates)
and fire gases such as carbon dioxide, water, carbon monoxide,
IN
ination. In hazardous materials operations, the types of protec‐
tive clothing might be better designed to resist contamination hydrogen chloride, nitric oxide, and a large number of other
and allow for easily cleaning given the clothing design and chemicals at different concentrations. The type and quantities
materials. This is not necessarily the case for structural or prox‐ of combustion products produced during a fire extensively vary
R
imity fire-fighting protective clothing, particularly after expo‐ with the type of fuels and fire conditions. The majority of fires
sure to products of combustion. are highly complex and entail a myriad of different materials
O
that serve as fuels and create a large number of chemicals that
A.3.3.46 Hazardous Materials. Hazardous materials are any are carcinogenic, are toxic, are corrosive, or create allergic
F solid, particulate, liquid, gas, aerosol, or mixture thereof that

can cause harm to the human body through respiration, inges‐
tion, skin absorption, injection, or contact.
A.3.3.54 Interface Component(s). Interface components are
evaluated and tested individually or are evaluated and tested as
reactions. Many products of combustion could include chemi‐
cal substances that are persistent due to their low relative vola‐
tility or their adsorption onto soot or carbon particles created
during combustion.
A.3.3.73 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble. A prox‐
a part of the protective element. imity fire fighting protective ensemble includes, but is not limi‐
ted to, garments, helmets, shrouds, gloves, and footwear.
A.3.3.64 Organization. Examples of organizations include,
but are not limited to, fire departments, police and other law A.3.3.81 Radiological Particulate Terrorism Agents. This
enforcement departments, rescue squads, EMS providers, and standard addresses protective ensembles that provide only
hazardous materials response teams. partial protection from certain radiation sources. By their
nature, these ensembles provide protection from alpha parti‐
N A.3.3.66 Preliminary Exposure Reduction. The primary cles; the element materials and distance will significantly
purposes for preliminary exposure reduction actions are to attenuate beta particles. These ensembles do not provide any
reduce the exposure of the individual end users to soiling, protection from ionizing radiation such as gamma- and X-rays
products of combustion, and persistent contamination during other than to keep the actual radiological particulates from
doffing of ensembles and ensemble elements and to minimize direct skin contact.
N A.3.3.83 Sanitizer. Like disinfectants (see A.3.3.22), sanitizers Protective ensembles and ensemble elements are important
are considered a pesticide and thus subject to regulations estab‐ tools that enable fire fighters to perform their jobs in a safe
lished by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). All and effective manner. Organizations need to recognize that
sanitizers must be registered with the EPA and meet specific these items do not have an indefinite life span and that regular
labeling requirements. A listing of currently registered sani‐ inspections are a necessary part of any protective equipment
tizers can be found at https://www.epa.gov/pesticide- program.
registration/selected-epa-registered-disinfectants. Sanitizers are
required to be used as specified on the product label as deter‐ Δ A.4.2.2 The following sample outline for an SOP is provided
mined by the EPA registration process. as a guide to aid organizations in the development of their
program SOPs. Organizations should consider addressing each
Sanitizers can either be used on hard surfaces such as point in the outline based on their types of protective clothing,
helmet shells and eye and face protection devices, or be used as operations, situation, needs, and so forth. The SOP should also
presoak treatments or laundry additives for fabrics and textiles. include the responsibilities of the organization and of the indi‐
Y
The specific requirements for demonstrating acceptable vidual members for each of the following points in the outline:
performance are found in the following EPA Office of Chemi‐ (1) Records, as follows:
cal Safety and Pollution Prevention (OCSPP) product perform‐
ance test guidelines:
(1) OCSPP 810.2300, “Sanitizers for Use on Hard Surfaces —
Efficacy Data Recommendations”
(a) Issued
(b) Manufacturer information
(c) Maintenance
N L
O
(d) Retirement
(2) OCSPP 810.2400, “Disinfectants and Sanitizers for Use on (2) Protecting the public and personnel from exposure to
Fabrics and Textiles — Efficacy Data Recommendations” contaminated PPE, as follows:
Both of these documents provide for different classifications
of disinfectants for their intended use. Classification types
include sanitizers for food contact products and non–food
contact products. Specific procedures and different target
(a)
(b)
(c)
Risk assessment
S E
Contamination containment
Public access
U
(d) Procedures, as follows:
microorganisms are utilized to demonstrate the effectiveness of
the respective sanitizer. In general, a sanitizer must reduce the i. Public areas
number of microorganisms by 99.9 percent (a 3 log10 reduc‐
tion).
See A.7.4.3 for more information on registered sanitizers.
A L ii.
iv.
v.
Living areas
iii. Food preparation and eating areas
Training areas
Other
A.3.3.84.1 Major A Seam. Outermost layer seam assemblies
include outer shell seams. Rupture of the outer shell could
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U (3) Selection, as follows:
(a) Risk assessment
I
reduce the protection of the garment by exposing inner layers (b) Compliance with NFPA 1971
such as the moisture barrier and the thermal barrier. (c) Element evaluation
I
A.3.3.84.2 Major B Seam. Inner layer seam assemblies include
moisture barrier and thermal barrier seams.
V (4) Inspection, as follows:
(a) Routine inspection
(b) Routine inspection procedure points
D
N A.3.3.90 Soiling. Soiling excludes contaminants that could
adversely affect the wearer such as products of combustion and
(c) Advanced inspection
(d) Advanced inspection procedure points
IN
other hazardous materials, including toxic, corrosive, or sensi‐ (5) Cleaning, as follows:
tizing chemicals, potentially infectious body fluids, other infec‐ (a) Preliminary exposure reduction
tious microorganisms, and CBRN terrorism agents. Since many (b) Preliminary exposure reduction procedure points
O R
fireground exposures with entry into a structure will involve
exposure to combustion products that contain hazardous
chemicals and other substances including carcinogens, any
exposure to these conditions could result in contamination. (6)
(c) Advanced cleaning
(d) Advanced cleaning procedure points
(e) Drying procedures points
Repair, as follows:
F
A.3.3.96 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble. A
structural fire fighting protective ensemble includes, but is not
limited to, garments, helmets, hoods, gloves, and footwear.
N A.3.3.103 Structural Fire Fighting Particulate Blocking Hood. (7)
(a) Basic repairs
(b) Advanced repairs
(c) Moisture barrier repairs
Storage, as follows:
These protective hoods have been designed to reduce the (a) Unissued storage
penetration of particulate contamination from reaching the (b) Issued storage
end user. Hoods are required to meet NFPA 1971 and require‐ (8) Retirement, disposition, and special incident procedures,
ments for particulate blocking hoods. as follows:
A.3.3.112 Universal Precautions. Under circumstances in (a) Condition
which differentiation between body fluids is difficult or impos‐ (b) Age
sible, all body fluids should be considered potentially infectious (c) Disposal method
materials. Δ A.4.2.3 Emergency response organizations are cautioned that
Δ A.4.1.1 NFPA 1500 and NFPA 1581 also provide requirements accessories could degrade the protection or performance of
and information on cleaning and decontamination. the certified ensemble or ensemble element; interfere with
ANNEX A 1851-67
form, fit, or function of the certified ensemble or ensemble Δ Table A.4.2.3.2 Evaluating Possible Negative Effects of
element; or become a hazard to the wearer. Accessory Attachments on Ensembles or Ensemble Elements
Accessories are not part of the certified ensemble or ensem‐
ble element but could be attached to a certified ensemble or Ensemble and Ensemble Applicable Sections
ensemble element by means not engineered, manufactured, or Element Properties of NFPA 1971
authorized by the certified ensemble or ensemble element Garments
manufacturer. If an accessory or its means of attachment causes Flame resistance 8.2
the structural integrity of the certified ensemble or ensemble
Heat resistance 8.6
element to be compromised, the certified ensemble or ensem‐
Whole-garment liquid integrity 8.48
ble element might not be compliant with the standard with
which it was originally certified. Helmets
Flame resistance 8.3
Additionally, if an accessory or the accessory’s means of Heat resistance 8.6
attachment is not designed and manufactured from suitable
materials for the hazardous environments of emergency inci‐
dents, the failure of the accessory or the means of attachment
Top-impact resistance
Impact resistance
Electrical insulation
8.15
L
8.16
8.30Y
N
could cause injury to the emergency responder. Gloves
Users are also cautioned that the means of attachment for an Flame resistance 8.4
accessory that fails to safely and securely attach the accessory to
a certified ensemble or ensemble element can allow the acces‐
sory to become inadvertently dislodged from the certified
Heat resistance
Overall liquid integrity
Glove–hand function O 8.6
8.32
8.37
ensemble or ensemble element, possibly posing a risk to emer‐
gency response personnel in the vicinity.
Organizations should consider evaluating the ensemble with
Grip
Footwear
Flame resistance
S E 8.38
8.5
tests provided in NFPA 1971 in which the accessory could nega‐
tively impact the performance of the ensemble element, when
in place. One test that is not part of NFPA 1971 but could be
used to evaluate the performance of an externally placed acces‐
L U
Heat resistance
Electrical insulation
Slip resistance
Overall liquid integrity
8.6
8.31
8.40
8.27.9
sory is ASTM F1930, Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Flame
Resistant Clothing for Protection Against Flash Fire Simulations Using
an Instrumented Manikin. This test provides a simulation of a
flash fire exposure using a static manikin. The effects of the
U A Hoods
Flame resistance
Heat resistance
Liquid and particulate
8.2
8.6
flash fire on the accessory can be determined and compared to

I D
an ensemble that does not have the accessory in place. A mini‐
contamination protective
ensembles
V
mum exposure time of 10 seconds is recommended for evaluat‐ Particle inward leakage 8.66
I
ing structural or proximity fire fighting ensembles. While this
test provides a demonstration of ensemble/accessory perform‐
D
ance under emergency conditions, it does not simulate all fire
ground hazards, and other evaluations should be considered.
Whole ensemble liquid integrity 8.48
IN
A.4.2.4 A manufacturer-trained organization receives training
A.4.2.3.1 See A.4.2.3. from an element manufacturer or a verified ISP in cleaning,
inspection, and repair services for that organization’s own
Δ A.4.2.3.2 Organizations should consider evaluating the ensem‐
elements. For garment elements, this entity has not received
R
ble or ensemble element with tests provided in NFPA 1971 in
any formal verification from a third-party certification organiza‐
which the accessory could negatively affect the performance of
tion. If an organization has received training in cleaning,
the ensemble or ensemble element, depending on how the
F O
element might be affected by the attachment of the accessory
(see Table A.4.2.3.2).
Another test that can be used to evaluate the performance of
an externally placed accessory is ASTM F1930, Standard Test
inspection, and repair of elements, it can be permitted to
utilize another organization's equipment to conduct cleaning,
inspection, or repair. For example, if organization A purchases
a washer/extractor and neighboring organization B wishes to
utilize this washer/extractor, it can be permitted to do so;
Method for Evaluation of Flame Resistant Clothing for Protection however, organization B must use its trained personnel to
Against Fire Simulations Using an Instrumented Manikin. This test conduct the laundering. If organization B wishes to use organi‐
simulates a flash fire exposure using a static manikin. The zation A’s equipment and personnel to conduct the launder‐
effects of the flash fire on an ensemble or ensemble element ing, then organization A must be a verified organization [see
with the accessory can be determined and compared to the 4.2.4(2)].
effects on an ensemble or ensemble element that does not have
A verified organization has demonstrated the ability to
the accessory in place. A minimum exposure time of
conduct cleaning, inspection, and repairs to a third-party certif‐
10 seconds is recommended when evaluating structural or
ication organization in accordance with this standard and is not
proximity fire-fighting ensembles. While this test demonstrates
required to have the approval of the element manufacturer to
ensemble/accessory or ensemble element/accessory perform‐
perform these services. Verified organizations are permitted to
ance under emergency conditions, it does not simulate all fire‐
conduct these services for other organizations.
ground hazards, and other evaluations should be considered.
A.4.2.3.3 See A.4.2.3.2.
A verified ISP has demonstrated the ability to conduct clean‐ it might be necessary to consult a manufacturer who has been
ing, inspection, and repairs to a third-party certification organi‐ verified in cleaning.
zation in accordance with this standard and is not required to
have the approval of the element manufacturer to perform N A.4.2.4.5.3 Written documentation of training should include:
these services. (1) Organization name
(2) Personnel names
A manufacturer verified in cleaning has demonstrated the (3) Date trained
ability to conduct cleaning to a third-party verification organi‐ (4) Entity providing the training
zation in accordance with this standard. A verified cleaner has (5) Edition of NFPA 1851 enforced at the time of the training
demonstrated the ability to conduct cleaning to a third-party (6) Elements of NFPA 1851 for which the organization has
certification organization in accordance with this standard. been trained
Δ A.4.2.4.2 Although approval from a manufacturer is not a (7) If applicable, indication that the organization received
requirement of this standard, it might be advantageous for the additional hands-on training necessary to conduct basic
specific element manufacturer to be consulted when there is
any question concerning the appropriate cleaning, inspection,
or repair of a specific element. NFPA 1971 requires that every
garment repairs
A.4.2.5 Retirement criteria should be based on a number of
factors, including, but not limited to, the overall condition of
L Y
N
certified element contain the name and address of the element the item, specific deterioration of materials or components
manufacturer so this information is readily available and each beyond their repair economically, or the inability to adequately
manufacturer will be able to offer the best possible practical
knowledge of its product.
A.4.2.4.3 The end user should always request the list of repair O
remove hazardous materials and other contaminants. Physical
damage from use or improper cleaning are other factors that
can affect when an item should be retired. The actual service
categories for which the verified ISP is approved to perform.
N A.4.2.4.3.1 Verified cleaners have received verification from a
third-party verification organization to conduct garment
S E
life of ensembles and ensemble elements varies, depending on
the amount of their use and the care they receive.
A.4.3.1 Records are an important part of an overall protective
element advanced cleaning services. Verified cleaners are not
third-party verified to conduct advanced inspections or repairs.
N A.4.2.4.5 This training is not required for every member of
L U
ensemble management program. Records can be used to
provide information about the life cycle of protective ensem‐
bles and ensemble elements, to document cleaning and repair
efforts, and to compare the effectiveness of elements that are
the organization. Organizations are allowed to determine the
personnel who will receive this training. Typically, organizations
require only the personnel who are involved in their PPE
program to receive this training. In some cases organizations
U A made of different materials or by different manufacturers.
These records can be compiled and maintained by the organi‐
zation, a verified ISP, a verified cleaner, another third party
selected by the organization, or any combination thereof.
choose to also train selected personnel from each shift. Safety
I
officers, training officers, and risk managers could also find this
training beneficial. D A.4.3.2 Some departments utilize rental or loaner gear.
Records should also be maintained on these ensembles and
I
For organizations that wish to perform basic garments
repairs, additional hands-on training from the garment manu‐ V ensemble elements in order to maintain a history on the care
and maintenance of the products. The fire department should
require that the entity providing the gear provide the records
D
facturer or verified ISP is necessary. In addition, equipment
and materials are needed to conduct basic garment repairs.
of prior care and maintenance at the time of rental.
IN
N A.4.3.5 Organizations might place some elements in a rotating
Organizations might be able to conduct some types of exchange program rather than assign them to a member. For
decontamination. Decontamination processes are dependent example, some organizations keep an inventory of clean hoods
on the type of contaminate and could require specialized they exchange after each contamination exposure. The
O R
processes performed by a verified ISP. Additional information
is provided in Chapter 7.
N A.4.2.4.5.1 All ISPs, manufacturers, and verified cleaners
member keeps a hood until it is contaminated and then
exchanges it for a clean hood. The hood is never assigned to a
specific member. Other elements might also be placed in a
similar rotating exchange program.
F
performing advanced garment cleaning are required to
successfully verify the effectiveness of cleaning for garment
elements. If a department wants more in-depth information or
specifics on how to perform garment cleaning, they should
consult with an ISP or a manufacturer who has been third-party
A.4.4.2 It should be noted that the intent of this requirement
is not to allow manufacturers to dictate which verified ISP an
organization must use. The organization is allowed a choice in
service providers for cleaning, inspection, and repairs. Also,
verified in cleaning. this paragraph is not intended to imply that any of the require‐
N A.4.2.4.5.2 Training should explain the activities that organi‐ ments in this standard can be circumvented. The intent is to
zations are required to perform in order to comply with this allow manufacturers to provide instructions that could differ
standard, as well as provide information and options in regard from this standard, if necessary, due to a specific design
to how organizations can accomplish them. This training does feature, component, or material that requires special care or
not negate the need for organizations to consult with manufac‐ when an issue is not addressed by this standard. Any variations
turers on specific instructions for performing inspections or should be limited to the method of inspection, cleaning, or
basic repairs on proprietary products, individual ensemble repair, not to the frequency.
elements, fabrics, or components with unique attributes or A.4.5.2 Living areas include kitchen and dining areas,
performance that require special consideration. For cleaning, dayrooms, sleeping areas and dormitories, dedicated fitness
ANNEX A 1851-69
rooms, bath and shower areas, office areas, and meeting and Δ A.5.1.1 In general, some hazards that can be encountered
conference rooms. include, but are not limited to, physical, environmental, ther‐
mal, chemical, biological, electrical, radiation, operational, and
A.4.5.3 Extra caution should be practiced to avoid exposing ergonomic hazards. The organization should also consider the
children to soiled protective equipment because they usually frequency and severity of the identified hazards when conduct‐
are more interested in actually touching or handling the equip‐ ing the risk assessment.
ment than are adults. Children are also less likely to wash off
any dirt or soot that they might pick up from handling ensem‐ The safety officer is the logical individual to perform this
bles or ensemble elements. Departments should consider dedi‐ function since that is his or her role in the organization. The
cating PPE solely for use at public education events, to safety officer should consider national trends when performing
minimize public exposure to soils and contaminants. this task. NFPA 1500 substantiates OSHA’s regulations as
follows:
Fire fighters often have a need to enter public facilities such
as restaurants, grocery stores, and other businesses as part of (1) Section 4.3: Mandatory evaluation of safety and health
their routine activities. PPE should not be worn during those
times.
N A.4.5.4 Public facilities include, but are not limited to, the
(2)
(3)
programs
Subsection 4.4.2: Mandatory compliance with state and
federal laws
L
Section 4.7: Safety officer’s responsibilities also defined in
Y
home, home laundries, public laundries, commercial laun‐
dries, dry cleaners, stores, offices, private cars, and private
homes. All efforts must be made to prevent exposing the public
to soil and contaminants.
(4)
NFPA 1521
N
Section 7.1: Requirements for ensembles and ensemble
elements
O
In the identification of hazards, the organization should
A.4.6.1 The purpose of this subsection is to require notifica‐
tion to the manufacturer and the certification organization of
all health and safety concerns related to PPE identified
through use or inspection. If a known or suspected failure of
S E
consider those hazards that fire fighters are likely to encounter.
A list of hazards is provided in Table A.5.1.1. In determining
risk, the organization should consider the frequency or likeli‐
hood of exposure to the hazard along with its potential severity
an ensemble element is identified, the element manufacturer
and certification organization are the appropriate parties to be
notified.
L U
(consequence) if exposure occurs.
A.5.1.2(1) In performing the risk assessment, the organization
should consider all of its responsibilities. In some departments
(1)
PPE health and safety concerns include, but are not limited
to, the following:
An occurrence resulting in loss of life or that which is
likely to cause loss of life
U A there might be stations or units that require different types of
ensembles.
Δ A.5.1.2(6) Examples of physical areas of operations include
ID
but are not limited to:
(2) An injury resulting in permanent bodily damage, which
can be instantaneous or cause a life-limiting disease or (1) One of the hazards faced by fire fighters is being struck
by vehicular traffic. The high-visibility materials required
V
disorder eventually resulting in death
I
(3) An injury that requires hospitalization or medical or on fire fighter PPE effectively enhance visual conspicuity
surgical treatment and that is not likely to result in a during the variety of fireground operations. The continu‐
D
permanent disorder but is likely to necessitate loss of ous use of high-visibility garments is one component of a
work for more than one day strategy to mitigate risks from struck-by hazards, which
IN
are known to cause serious fire fighter injuries and fatali‐
A.4.6.2 The manufacturer and the certification organization ties on an annual basis. Additional high-visibility require‐
information can be found on the product label. ments for fire fighters on or near roadways are regulated
by the Federal Highway Administration's Manual on
R
A.5.1 The organization should consider establishing a
committee to oversee the process of selecting ensembles or Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). It is the responsi‐
ensemble elements. The committee should consist of interes‐ bility of the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) to specify
F O
ted individuals representing a cross section of the organization
(i.e., from both labor and management who collectively have
several years of experience in fire fighting activities). The role
of the committee should be to set and define goals and require‐
ments and identify areas of responsibility for each member,
appropriate high-visibility apparel from the available
garment options, if any, and based on a risk assessment,
to establish policies for use in accordance with prevailing
regulations (the MUTCD) and in compliance with appli‐
cable standards (e.g., NFPA 1971, ANSI/ISEA 107, Ameri‐
plus provide recommendations to the authority making the can National Standard for High Visibility Safety Apparel and
final decisions. Accessories, ANSI/ISEA 207, American National Standard for
High Visibility Public Safety Vests).
Copies of specifications on the organization’s current ensem‐ (2) The use of personal flotation devices might need to be
bles and ensemble elements should be distributed to the considered for operations near waterways.
committee as a point of reference. The committee should (3) Fire fighters operating at elevation might need some
consider if there are possible areas for improvement to the form of fall protection, which might or might not be
existing specifications. Examples of improvement criteria over incorporated into their protective clothing.
existing specifications include heat stress, weight, design, style,
interface with other components, durability, comfort, flexibil‐ Δ A.5.1.2(7) In determining the need for CBRN protection, the
ity, safety, performance, price, customer service, delivery, organization should determine homeland security priorities for
compliance, reliability, and warranty. its jurisdiction, including, but not limited to, whether the
organization would be responding to a CBRN terrorism inci‐
dent, the specific roles and missions to be undertaken in
response to a CBRN terrorism incident, the expected types of being certified as compliant with NFPA 1971. Finally, the organ‐
hazards that might be encountered for its members during a ization can check the legitimacy of the certification organiza‐
CBRN terrorism incident, and the capabilities of the organiza‐ tion by asking for documentation that shows that the
tion to provide sufficient training and support for the use of certification organization has been accredited to ISO/IEC
CBRN protective ensembles (e.g., decontamination for safe 17065, Conformity assessment — Requirements for bodies certifying
doffing of ensemble elements). If it is determined that CBRN products, processes and services.
protection is needed, the organization should review the differ‐
ent classes of ensembles addressed in NFPA 1994 and the Δ A.5.1.5 The majority of tests in NFPA 1971 provide quantita‐
protective ensemble defined in NFPA 1991, together with its tive results; however, some tests are established on the basis of
intended CBRN terrorism agent response or action plan, to pass or fail results and cannot be readily compared. Specific
determine the suitability of obtaining separate ensembles that tests that offer comparative performance results include, but
comply with specific classes of ensembles for NFPA 1994 or are not limited to, the following:
ensembles meeting NFPA 1991. (1) Protective garment elements
Δ A.5.1.3 These standards provide minimum requirements. In
order to fully utilize this standard, organizations should be
familiar with the performance requirements in NFPA 1971.
(a) Thermal protective performance of the material
composite
(b) Total heat loss of the material composite
L Y
Additional requirements can be necessary. Organizations
should also solicit information from and exchange information
with other organizations.
Δ A.5.1.4 Certification of protective elements can be checked by
reinforcements
O N
(c) Conductive and compressive heat resistance of
(d) Thermal shrinkage of the material layers (outer

shell, moisture barrier, thermal barrier)
(e) Flame resistance of material layers and other
examination of the product label for the mark of the certifica‐
tion organization. The organization should further check the
certification of the specific protective element by contacting
the certification organization and asking if the item is listed as
S E
components (outer shell, moisture barrier, thermal
barrier, other material layers and components)
(f) Tear resistance of the material layers (outer shell,
moisture barrier, thermal barrier)
Table A.5.1.1 List of Potential Fire Ground and Other Related

Emergency Hazards
L U
(g) Cleaning shrinkage of the material layers (outer
shell, moisture barrier, thermal barrier)
(h) Water absorption resistance of the outer shell
(i) Tensile strength of the outer shell
Physical Hazards
Falling objects
Flying debris
Chemical Hazards
Inhalation
Skin absorption or contact
U A (j) Seam strength of outer shell, moisture barrier, and
thermal barrier layers
(k) Visibility properties of the trim
(l) Radiant reflectance of the outer shell (for proxim‐
ID
ity fire fighting protective clothing)
Projectiles or ballistic objects Chemical ingestion or
injection (2) Protective helmet elements
Abrasive or rough surfaces
Sharp edges
Pointed objects
I V
Liquefied gas contact
Chemical flashover
Chemical explosions
(a) Impact resistance (top and acceleration) after selec‐
ted preconditions
(b) Flame resistance
Slippery surfaces
Excessive vibration
D
Electrical Hazards
High voltage (3)
(c) Heat resistance (level of sagging)
Protective glove elements
IN
Environmental Hazards Electrical arc flashover (a) Thermal protective performance of glove body and,
High heat and humidity Static charge buildup if present, wristlet
Ambient cold Radiation Hazards (b) Conductive heat resistance of glove body
Wetness
High wind
O R
Insufficient or bright light
Excessive noise
Ionizing radiation
Non-ionizing radiation
Person–Position Hazards
Daytime visibility
(c) Thermal shrinkage of glove and innermost material
(d) Cut resistance of glove body
(e) Puncture resistance of glove body
(f) Burst strength of wristlet material
F
Thermal Hazards
High convective heat
Low radiant heat
High radiant heat
Nighttime visibility
Falling
Drowning
Person–Equipment Hazards
(4)
(g) Dexterity of whole gloves
(h) Grip of whole gloves
Protective footwear elements
(a) Flame resistance
Flame impingement Material biocompatibility (b) Radiant heat resistance of upper
Steam Ease of contamination (c) Conductive heat resistance of sole and upper
Hot liquids Thermal comfort (d) Puncture resistance of sole and upper
Molten metals Range of motion (e) Cut resistance of upper
Hot solids Hand function (f) Abrasion resistance of sole
Hot surfaces Ankle and back support (5) Protective hood interface elements
Biological Hazards Vision clarity (a) Thermal protective performance of hood material
Bloodborne pathogens Communications ease (b) Flame resistance of hood material
Airborne pathogens Fit (poor) (c) Thermal shrinkage of hood material
Biological toxins Ease of donning and (d) Burst strength of hood material
doffing (e) Cleaning shrinkage of hood material
Biological allergens (f) Particulate contamination blocking layer
ANNEX A 1851-71
Additional testing can also be specified for performance composites is 35.0 cal/cm2/sec. Higher values of TPP indicate
properties not addressed in NFPA 1971 based on the organiza‐ composites offering greater thermal insulation.
tion's hazard and risk assessment. When additional testing is
specified, standard test methods should be used when availa‐ A total heat loss (THL) test is used to measure how well
ble, and testing should be conducted at accredited, independ‐ garments allow body heat to escape. The test assesses the loss of
ent laboratories. heat, both by the evaporation of sweat and the conduction of
heat through the garment layers. As clothing is made more
Organizations should consider the use of a request for infor‐ insulative to high heat exposures, there is a tradeoff with how
mation (RFI) or a request for proposal (RFP) format when well the heat build-up in the fire fighter’s body (that can lead
soliciting quotations for structural or proximity fire fighting to heat stress) is alleviated. Differences in the weight and other
protective ensemble elements. The advantage of an RFI or an characteristics of garment material composites including the
RFP proposal is that it allows manufacturers the option of type of moisture barrier will affect the transmission of sweat
providing all of the most current technologies for organization moisture, which carries much of the heat away from the body.
Y
review (the offering is then not limited to the requirements of If this heat is kept inside the ensemble, the fire fighter’s core
the specification). The organization can then choose among temperature can rise to dangerous levels if other efforts are not
proposals for offered items finally accepted. Typically an RFI
and an RFP have the following characteristics:
(1) Minimum requirements, such as NFPA product certifica‐
tion, required materials, or available options
undertaken (i.e., limiting time on scene, rotating fire fighters,
and providing rehabilitation at the scene). NFPA 1971 specifies
N
that garment composites have a minimum THL of 205 W/m2.
Higher THL values indicate composites that provide greater
L
(2) Inclusion of current specifications and a requirement
that each manufacturer explain how its offering differs
O
heat loss. The validation and origin of this requirement is
discussed in ASTM STP1386, Field Evaluation of Protective Cloth‐
ing Effects on Fire Fighter Physiology: Predictive Capability of Total
E
from the currently specified product
(3) Background on the offering firm's finances, capabilities, Heat Loss Test.
(4)
and references
Field test procedures and results (see 5.1.6) of offered
products
Using this approach, the organization can then employ a
S
There are also limitations in the application of THL testing.
Just as TPP testing only evaluates the base three-layer fabric
U
system for thermal insulation, THL testing is a material test and
does not evaluate the entire capability of the garment to dissi‐
rating system that assigns values and weights to several factors,
including, but not limited to, product design, manufacturer
references, and field test results.
A L
pate heat. Areas of garments with additional layers such as trim,
pockets, and reinforcements have less breathability. In contrast,
these same areas of the garment have greater thermal insula‐
tion. The specifications of garment design must account for
In this approach, a separately sealed cost proposal is opened
only after the point ratings have been assigned to each offer‐
U which areas of the garment need reinforcement and other
materials and how these additional materials and reinforce‐
ID
ing. The organization can then apply separate criteria consider‐ ments could contribute to stress.
ing both technical merits and cost. This approach allows fire
departments to compare prices and product acceptability. Organizations should be aware that small differences in TPP
I V
Organizations should also consider integrated PPE programs
that address various levels of care and maintenance as provided
and THL values might not represent significant differences
that will translate into differences in field performance of
garments. There is variation in the test results for both TPP
D
by or coordinated by the manufacturer of the fire fighter
personal protective equipment. These programs can address
and THL where values of ±3 cal/cm2 in TPP and values of
±20 W/m2 in THL might be due to variation in results
IN
many of the aspects of care and maintenance that are produced by the materials rather than true differences in the
addressed in this standard, including, but not limited to, clean‐ garment composite materials.
ing, inspection, and repairs, in addition to the offer of program
In general, as garment material composite thickness increa‐
R
guidance and reporting and documentation of procedures.
ses, higher levels of thermal insulation (measured using TPP
N A.5.1.5.1 Tradeoffs exist between the levels of thermal insula‐ testing) are obtained. At the same time, thicker composites
F O
tion provided by garment composite materials and the ability
of those materials to trap heat that potentially leads to heat
stress of the fire fighter. In NFPA 1971, thermal protective
performance (TPP) testing measures the amount of heat trans‐
fer through the clothing composite (i.e., the combination of
typically create more stress on the fire fighter. By also examin‐
ing the results of THL testing, organizations can choose to opti‐
mize the selection of their composites by balancing composite
THL values with TPP values, while still meeting the minimum
performance for both areas of performance. For TPP testing,
the primary garment clothing layers — the outer shell, the thermal barriers usually have the greatest impact, but like THL,
moisture barrier, and the thermal barrier) when exposed to a the TPP value for a composite is based on the contribution
combination of convective heat and thermal radiation. The from each layer.
exposure level is intended to simulate the heat energy associ‐
ated with a flashover. The test uses a calorimeter to measure Other measurements can be introduced to characterize
the time-to-burn. The reported TPP rating is this time-to-burn garment material composite thermal insulation or heat stress
multiplied by the exposure energy (2.0 cal/cm2/sec). It is effects. For example, the evaporative resistance test (referred to
important to recognize that TPP testing simulates only one as Ret), which is also performed on the three base layers, offers
condition among an unlimited set of clothing exposure condi‐ a means for measuring the ability of the garment composite to
tions. However, the TPP test is the primary measurement for allow the heat associated with sweat evaporation to pass
qualifying garment composite material for thermal insulation. through the material. Like THL, this test is associated with
The minimum TPP value specified by NFPA 1971 for garment demonstrating the breathability of the garment material
composite. In this test, different environmental conditions
provide a different way of ranking composite performance,
although there are no established performance requirements (3) A large black UV flashlight for viewing any fluorescent
for Ret within NFPA 1971. Specific research conducted by aerosol. Alternatively, a bank of long black UV fluores‐
North Carolina State University using a physiological manikin cent lights can be used in a darkened room.
and reported by the Fire Industry Education Resource Organi‐ (4) An area that can be darkened for examining the fire
zation (F.I.E.R.O.) have shown that Ret provides discrimination fighter test subject under black light. This area can be a
of the composite materials’ impact on wearer core tempera‐ closet or other room where the light can be fully blocked
ture, skin temperature, and sweating rate with a higher correla‐ out.
tion than THL over three different environmental conditions (5) An area for spraying the liquid onto the fire fighter test
— hot, mild, and warm. This information means that Ret might subject.
provide a more reliable prediction and discrimination of the (6) Optionally, the fire fighter test subject can wear black
stress effects of different material composites on the protective witness garments such as body wear underneath the
clothing wearer as compared to THL. Unlike THL, the repor‐ ensemble to provide a uniform viewing surface. If this
ted Ret measurement is a resistance having units of Pa m2/W approach is used, synthetic material–based black body
where lower values are associated with more breathable mate‐
rial composites.
Organizations should be aware that the measurements of
wear consisting of a full long-sleeved top and pants are
useful. However, such garments must be totally free of lint
as ascertained by being checked under a black light.
L Y
garment material composite thermal insulation and heat stress
effects are performed on the principal three-layer composite
used in the construction of the garment and do not account
for other layers that might be on the garment such as trim,
pockets, outer shell reinforcements, and liner reinforcements.
following steps:
(1)
O N
The basic procedures for conducting this test involve the
Spray a very small portion of fluorescent solution (1 sec)

onto either the black witness garment or the individual’s
E
skin to determine how it appears under the selected black
While necessary to meet the requirements of the standard and light observation conditions. This will serve as a visual
assist fire fighters in performing their duties, these additional
layers increase overall thermal insulation and decrease breatha‐
bility, resulting in potentially higher heat stress effects. Conse‐
quently, when deciding on the target levels of composite
thermal insulation and breathability (i.e., total heat loss or
(2)
U S
control for determining if penetration has occurred.
The fluorescent solution should rinse off the individual’s
skin with thorough soap-and-water washing. It should also
be readily removed from the black witness garments by
L
conventional washing.
evaporative resistance), organizations should take into account (3) If the fire fighter test subject wears the black witness
the garment design and how both thermal insulation and heat
stress effects will be affected by both mandatory (e.g., trim,
shoulder reinforcements, knee reinforcements) and optional
(e.g., pockets) garment design features. Results for the investi‐
gation of these effects is provided in “The Cost of a Pocket: the
U A (4)
garments, then the garments should be washed and free
of lint.
Put the fluorescent liquid in the sprayer reservoir and
adjust the sprayer settings to deliver a light, circular spray
Impact of Reinforcements on the TPP and THL.”
N A.5.1.6 Organizations are able to assess the effectiveness of
I D (5)
pattern of liquid mist.
Have the fire fighter test subject put on the complete
ensemble to be evaluated.
ensemble interfaces, interface components and proper
I
donning for reducing the penetration of particulate contami‐
V (6) Spray the fluorescent liquid onto the fire fighter ensem‐
ble using a spray time of 5 to 10 seconds in each location.
Ideally, have the test subject perform motions that are
D
nation by conducting a simple test. In this test, a fire fighter
wears their ensemble consisting of protective garments, a designed to challenge the interfaces, such as reaching
above their head with their arms, bending over, and cross-
IN
helmet, gloves, footwear, a hood, and self-contained breathing
apparatus (SCBA). A fluorescent agent–based solution is body reaches.
sprayed as an aerosol onto the exterior of the protective ensem‐ (7) Following the spraying of fluorescent liquid, use extreme
ble worn by the fire fighter, while the fire fighter carries out care removing the ensemble from the fire fighter test
O R
stationary exercises. When applied as a fine mist, the aerosol
can approximate the small particles of smoke created in a
structural fire. After carefully removing the ensemble, the
underlying skin and clothing are examined under a black UV
(8)
subject to prevent contaminant transfer to the interior
and skin/clothing of the subject.
After the ensemble is removed, check the surfaces on the
black witness garments or test subject’s skin under a black
F
light to show any evidence of aerosol penetration. This infor‐
mation can then be used by the organization to judge how well
interfaces are maintained between elements, the overall protec‐
tive capabilities of specific interface components such as partic‐
ulate blocking hoods, and the efficacy of donning methods.
(9)
UV light in a darkened area to determine if there is any
visual evidence of fluorescence that might have penetra‐
ted from the spraying process.
Make notes or draw a diagram to show where underlying
fluorescence has penetrated portions of the ensemble or
the test subject’s skin.
For performing this test, the following supplies, equipment,
and facilities are needed: Based on this test method, information gained from the eval‐
uation of different ensembles can show their relative effective‐
(1) A commercial fluorescent liquid solution that is typically ness in preventing particulate penetration. However, it is
applied in hand washing. A supply of 3.8 L (1 gal) will be important to note that this evaluation technique might not
sufficient to evaluate multiple ensembles. show all avenues of particulate penetration and can also
(2) An ordinary paint spray with a variable control. An inex‐ provide results that might be difficult to interpret unless
pensive electric-powered sprayer can be obtained for less specific penetration pathways are identified. It is important to
than $100 from a home improvement supply store. carry out these procedures with a high level of advance plan‐
ning and scrutiny to ensure consistent and comparable results.
For example, conducting the evaluation with the same test
ANNEX A 1851-73
subject(s) on the same day will allow more uniform testing ple, the organization should be sure the thermal protection
when comparing different ensembles. Also, note that the performance (TPP) specified can be achieved with the materi‐
donning process can impact the results of this procedure. als specified. A prebid meeting with participation by potential
bidders or manufacturers is useful in eliminating inconsisten‐
N A.5.1.6.1 More than one type of eye and face protection cies and explaining requirements that might be unclear in the
component as provided with the helmet or separate eye and specifications.
face protection devices might be needed to cover the full range
of activities for which the organization conducts emergency Organizations should continuously review and document
response operations. For example, while the full facepiece of how their specifications and ensembles and ensemble elements
the self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) provides meet their needs and applicable standards. There are many
primary eye protection during structural fires including over‐ ways to improve the quantity and quality of information
haul, organizations might rely on faceshields and goggles provi‐ received from prospective bidders. Additionally, increased
ded with helmets for eye and face protection when not wearing purchasing power potential can be gained by forming collec‐
Y
the SCBA facepiece. To fulfill this requirement, an organiza‐ tive buys with other organizations for possible volume
tion might have to specify separate eye and face protection discounts.
devices that are suitable for providing individual member
protection during other types of emergency operations.
A.5.1.7 Organizations should contact manufacturers or
Purchase specifications should indicate the organization’s
ensemble element components:

N
selection of choice for the following required NFPA 1971
L
O
vendors about field evaluation programs. Many provide sample (1) Garments
items for tests. The following criteria should be used to
conduct an effective field evaluation: (a) Outer shell material: fabric, weight, color
E
(b) Thermal liner material
(1) Test participants should be selected based on a cross (c) Moisture barrier material: base fabric, film, or coat‐
section of personnel, willingness to participate, objectiv‐
(2)
ity, and level of operational activity.
Participants should conduct field evaluations of each
different product model being evaluated from each
manufacturer for a particular ensemble element. Partici‐
U
ing
S
(d) Trim: configuration, material, color
(e) Closure system
(f) Wristlets: material, design
L
(2) Hoods
pants should be fitted for each product model being eval‐
uated from each manufacturer. Evaluations should be (a) Material
(3)
conducted with the same participants to use and evaluate
each ensemble.
A product evaluation form should be developed for each
element and interface area. The form should include a
U A (3)
(b) Face opening design
(c) Particulate contamination blocking layer
Gloves
D
(a) Composite materials
I
rating system for those characteristics considered impor‐ (b) Wristlet or gauntlet
tant to the organization, facilitating a quantitative evalua‐ (c) Wristlet material
tion. Evaluation forms should include general
I V
performance criteria, a specific length of time for the
field evaluation, and criteria addressing ease of move‐
(4) Helmets
(a) Material
D
ment, ability to work, and so forth. Size and fit issues (b) Color
should be addressed since they relate to comparative eval‐ (c) Retention system
IN
uation of ensembles and ensemble elements. Evaluation (d) Trim configuration
forms that provide only narrative responses should be (e) Trim color
avoided. (f) Ear cover material
(g) Ear cover dimension
R
(4) The organization should solicit periodic reports from
participants in the field evaluation. At least three evalua‐ (h) Eye protection
tion reports should be completed and filled out inde‐ (5) Boots: composite materials
F
(5)
O pendently.
The organization should conclude the evaluation process
in a timely manner and analyze the results.
Δ A.5.1.8 Specifications translate the organization’s needs into
Δ A.5.1.8(2) An organization should consider its needs for
performance or features in excess of the minimum require‐
ments of NFPA 1971, such as the following:
(1) Garment elements, as follows:
performance or design requirements that can be met by manu‐ (a) Any styling issues
facturers of protective equipment. Specifications should clearly (b) Any specific range-of-motion requirements
address every aspect of the department’s needs and expecta‐ (c) Any sleeve retraction requirements
tions in regard to both the performance and the delivery of the (d) Any garment rise with overhead reach require‐
ensembles or ensemble elements. ments
Organizations should specify delivery time requirements (e) Any winter liner requirements
and, if appropriate, penalty assessments for not meeting deliv‐ (f) Any additional reinforcement needs (recognizing
ery dates. Warehousing requirements, if desired, should also be that multiple layering can modify protective
established in the procurement specification. performance in several areas, especially breathabil‐
ity)
Organizations should be careful not to write specifications (g) Any specific additional thread requirements
that are redundant or contradictory or that cannot be met by (h) Any specific additional requirements for stitch
manufacturers of ensembles or ensemble elements. For exam‐ characteristics
(i) Any customized sizing requirements (6) All ensemble elements, as follows:
(j) Any attachment requirements for liners and outer (a) Any additional certification requirements (e.g.,
shells Project FIRES, state OSHA, federal OSHA)
(k) Any specific requirements for placement of visibil‐ (b) Any requirements for interface with existing
ity marking, visibility marking materials, and reflec‐ elements of the protective ensemble
tive lettering (c) Any warranty requirements
(l) Any specific material choices (d) Any requirements for cleaning and repair support
(m) Any requirements for weight reduction (e) Any requirements for manufacturer or dealer refer‐
(n) Any specific details of required suspender ences
construction or suspender/garment interface (7) Liquid and particulate contaminant protection ensem‐
(o) Any requirements for spot or localized enhanced bles, as follows:
insulative performance
(p) Any requirements for field interchangeability or (a) Method of deploying the liquid and particulate
replacement of reinforcement pieces
(q) Any requirements for enhanced flexibility at
movement-sensitive areas
(r) Any requirements for notification systems to indi‐
contaminant protection
(b) Position of material systems of each element and
ease of their inspection
(c) Manner in which ensemble interfaces are designed
L Y
cate liner absence
(s) Any requirements for moisture barrier substrate or
thermal fill accessibility to allow field inspection
(t) Any requirements for lumbar support systems
wearing of the ensemble
O N
to limit liquid and particulate contaminant ingress
(d) Specialized donning or doffing procedures in the
(e) Ensemble resistance to contamination and ease of

ensemble doffing for safe exit of wearer from
E
(u) Any customization requirements
(v) Any passport or accountability system require‐ ensemble
S
ments (f) Specific types of SCBA for which ensemble is certi‐
(w) Any specialized or additional pocketing require‐ fied
ments
(x) Any flashlight clips required
(y) Any personal alert safety system (PASS) interface
features required
L U
A.5.1.8(3) Depending on the items being purchased and the
size of the order, organizations should consider requiring prod‐
uct representatives to provide samples with their proposals.
Manufacturers should also be required to provide complete
(z) Any requirements for personal escape or rescue
features
(aa) Any requirements for sizing adjustment
(bb) Any requirements for temperature-sensing features
U A user instructions and warranty information with each bid.
Organizations should review the past record of each manufac‐
turer concerning length of time for delivery, repair turnaround
times, and similar customer service issues.
(2)
(cc) Any requirements for interface area compatibilities
Helmet elements, as follows:
I D A.5.1.8(4) Organizations can obtain assistance in garment

sizing from ASTM F1731, Standard Practice for Body Measurements
V
(a) Any styling requirements
and Sizing of Fire and Rescue Services Uniforms and Other Thermal
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Any customization requirements
Any faceshield or goggles requirements
Any reflective marking requirements
Any customized sizing requirements
D I Hazard Protective Clothing. Helmets are adjustable and fit a wide
range of sizes. If a helmet is not adjusted correctly, it might not
stay on the user’s head during periods of active wear. In addi‐
tion to the sizing and depth adjustments, many models are
IN
(f) Any specific material choices
(g) Any specific requirements for earflaps (e.g., design, available with quick adjusters to accommodate varying condi‐
materials, dimensions, attachment to shell specifics) tions for proper fitting (e.g., with or without SCBA facepiece).
(h) Any specific requirements for suspension construc‐
R
A.5.1.8(5) Organizations should consider comparing a
tion preproduction sample from the apparent winning submitter
(i) Any requirements for weight reduction against the purchase specifications before awarding the bid.
(3)
F O
Glove elements, as follows:
(a) Any specific material choices
(b) Any overall styling requirements
(c) Any details of cuff styling (wristlet or gauntlet)
A.6.1.3 It is not the intent of this standard to require the
cleaning of ensembles and ensemble elements if the elements
are not soiled. Organizations should establish guidelines for
judging the extent of soiling that requires cleaning based on
(4) Boot elements, as follows: the organization’s needs and experience. In applying such
(a) Any specific material choices judgment, organizations should take into consideration the
(b) Any overall styling requirements importance of keeping ensembles and ensemble elements
(c) Any trouser interface requirements clean. Soiled ensemble elements can pose a health risk to the
(5) Hood interface elements, as follows: wearer and the levels of protective performance.
(a) Any specific material choices A.6.2.2 Table A.6.2.2 provides a quick reference guide to
(b) Any styling requirements routine inspection criteria.
(c) Any coverage requirements
(d) Any particulate-blocking layer
ANNEX A 1851-75
Δ Table A.6.2.2 Routine Inspection Criteria
Coats and Hoods/

Criteria Trousers Shrouds Helmets Gloves Footwear DRD
Soiling X X X X X X
Contamination X X X X X X
Rips, tears, abrasions, and cuts X X X X X X
Damaged or missing hardware and closure systems X
Charring, burn holes, melting X X X X X X
Shrinkage
Material discoloration and degradation
Visibility marking integrity attachment to garment: reflectivity
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
L Y X
damage
Loss of face opening elasticity or adjustability
Cracks, dents, abrasions
X
X
O N X
Bubbling, soft spots, warping
Damaged or missing components of suspension or retention
systems
S E X
X
Damaged or missing components of faceshield/goggle system,

including discoloration and scratched lenses
Inverted glove liner
L U X
X
Exposed or deformed steel toe, steel midsole, or shank
Loss of water resistance
U A X
X
Closure system component damage and functionality
I D
Earflaps: rips, tears, or cuts; thermal damage such as charring, X
X
burn holes, or melting
I V
Correct assembly and size compatibility of shell, liner, and DRD X X
D
Delamination as evidenced by separation or peeling of outer X X X X X
IN
shell (aluminized materials)
Any damage to the particulate blocking layer (particulate- X
O R
N A.6.2.2.2(6) The following simple evaluation can be conduc‐ indicates the hood should be removed from service for
F ted in the field to assess the integrity of the particulate-blocking

layer of hoods:
(1) Assess areas of the hood where a particulate-blocking
layer is present using a bright flashlight or similar focused
light to gauge the integrity of the particulate-blocking
additional evaluation or retirement. More obvious
damage such as a hole or tear in the particulate-blocking
layer might also be more observable than otherwise might
be seen without the addition of a light source.
This test might not be suitable for all types of particulate-
layer. The light source used should provide enough blocking hoods, especially hoods that use an ordinary moisture
focused light to show changes in density of the hood barrier as the particulate-blocking layer. Some hoods might be
materials when viewed. However, the light source should provided with an inspection opening to allow viewing of many
not produce excessive heat that would damage the hood portions of the particulate-blocking layer.
materials and should be configured so as to prevent the
bulbs from directly contacting the hood materials. Section 12.1 also provides an evaluation method that can be
(2) Position the light source near the hood so that the light adapted for conducting a light source–based evaluation of the
passes through the hood composite materials. hood using a simple fixture.
(3) Evaluate the hood by examining the amount of light A.6.2.2.3(6) The inspection should ensure that the sides and
coming through the hood composite. Brighter areas edges of faceshields and goggles are maintained to preserve
could be an indication of material degradation, migra‐ peripheral vision.
tion, or shifting resulting in a thin or bare spot, which
Δ A.6.3.2.1 For any inspection program to be effective, ensem‐ that can lead to loss of liquid penetration resistance for the
bles and ensemble elements should be evaluated by trained garment element.
individuals. The individuals evaluating the ensembles and
ensemble elements should understand the limitations of each Moisture barrier coatings or films can become abraded, tear,
element and recognize the signs of failure. Utilizing trained or have pinholes from use. In severe cases, the degradation in
individuals provides consistency on whether an item should be some moisture barrier materials can take the form of separa‐
repaired or retired. The manufacturer and the organization, tion, cracking, or flaking. Tapes used on moisture barrier
the verified ISP and the organization, or a verified organization seams, to ensure garment element integrity against liquid pene‐
should determine the level of training required to perform tration, can crack, lift, or completely separate. Because only the
advanced inspections. Resources for training that should be most obvious damage is usually observable, the field evaluation
considered, as a minimum, are the manufacturer(s) of the procedures in Section 12.3 is necessary.
elements in use; the Fire and Emergency Manufacturers and A simple evaluation that can be conducted in the field to
Services Association (FEMSA) user guides; NFPA 1500; and assess the integrity of the moisture barrier is as follows:
professional cleaning and repair facilities.
A.6.3.3 If ensemble elements have been issued, they are not
reserve and are intended to be subjected to the advanced
(1) This test should be applied to areas of high wear such as,
but not limited to, the broadest point of the shoulders,
the back waist area of the coat, knees, crotch area, and
L Y
inspection.
A.6.3.4 The following inspection grading scale is designed to
assist fire department personnel in identifying and document‐
ing the condition of ensembles and ensemble elements:
(2)
should also be evaluated. N
seat area. Garment seams, discolored areas, or where
potential damage to other layers has been detected
O
Position the garment liner, removed from the shell, over
a 5-gal bucket or similar container so that the thermal
(1)
(2)
New or as-new condition. Newly purchased items that are in
like-new condition.
Good condition. Items in good serviceable condition; might
show wear, but replacement or repair is not necessary.
S E
liner is pointed down, and the moisture barrier is orien‐
ted upward such that it will be in contact with the liquid
exposure. When testing a seam, the seam should be posi‐
tioned so that it divides the test area in two equal halves.
(3) Maintenance needed. Items in need of repair. The organiza‐
tion determines if an item is to be retired. Maintenance
details are described in the “Comments” section of the
inspection form. (3)
L U
The test liquid should consist of an alcohol–tap water
mixture made by combining 1 part rubbing alcohol
(70 percent isopropanol alcohol) with 6 parts tap water.
Form a well in the liner area that is being evaluated so
(4) Immediate replacement. Unsafe items that should be
removed from service.
A.6.3.5 Table A.6.3.5 provides a quick reference guide to
U A that it is lower than the surrounding liner. Pour 1 cup of
the alcohol–tap water mixture onto the moisture barrier
in the welled area of the liner. Allow the mixture to sit for
3 minutes and then visually inspect the thermal barrier
advanced inspection criteria.
A.6.3.5.1 It is important to realize during the inspection of
I D side of the liner for any signs of liquid passing through
the moisture barrier.
different layers of garment elements that some portions of the
I
material might be more susceptible to damage than others. For
example, one side of a multilayer laminate material or quilted V (4) If any liquid passes through, the garment should be
removed from service and sent for an advanced inspec‐
tion. After the evaluation, ensure that the liner is cleaned
D
material might show damage while the other side might not.
Moreover, certain fibers in a single-layer material might be
and allowed to completely dry to remove all traces of the
alcohol–tap water mixture.
IN
more susceptible to damage than other fibers. Each of these A.6.3.5.1(7) Material discoloration can indicate many types of
effects could be cause for repair or retirement of the garment possible damage, including, but not limited to, dye loss, heat
element, depending on the extent of observed damage. When degradation, UV damage, and chemical contamination.
R
garments have an optional winter liner, the winter liner should
be inspected during each advanced inspection. A.6.3.5.1(9) Visibility markings can appear to the human eye
O
to be undamaged when actually they have lost much of their
A.6.3.5.1(3) All charred, burned, or discolored areas should ability to reflect. Retroreflective properties can be checked with
be thoroughly checked for strength and integrity by aggressive
F
flexing of the material and attempts to push a finger or thumb
through the fabric. Any loss of strength or weakening of the
materials to the degree that the material can be torn with
manual pressure is a sign of deterioration, and the garment
should be removed from service.
the following simple flashlight test:
(1)
(2)
Stand approximately 12 m (40 ft) from a sample of the
trim being tested and a sample of new trim.
Hold a bright, focused flashlight at eye level, either next
to the temple or on the bridge of the nose, and aim the
light beam at the samples.
Δ A.6.3.5.1(4) While all materials and components in garment (3) Compare the brightness of the reflected lights. If the
elements are susceptible to different types of damage from reflected light from the trim being tested is substantially
wear or abuse, the moisture barrier is one of the most difficult less than the light reflected from the new trim, the trim
parts of the garment element to inspect and evaluate. That is should be replaced.
because the film or coating side of most moisture barriers faces
the interior of the liner and is hidden from easy examination. This field evaluation test provides effective and timely results
Even if a garment element is equipped with a means of open‐ while allowing the evaluator to physically view the reflective
ing the liner to view the film or coating side, it is difficult to trim as it is seen by the naked eye.
conduct a visual evaluation of the moisture barrier film or coat‐
ing. Even a physical examination of the moisture barrier film
or coating side will not detect all types of damage or defects
ANNEX A 1851-77
Δ Table A.6.3.5 Advanced Inspection Criteria
Coats and Hoods/

Soiling X X X X X X
Contamination X X X X X X
Rips, tears, cuts, and abrasion X X X X X X
Damaged or missing hardware or closure system X X X X X
Charring, burn holes, melting X X X X X X
Shrinkage
Material degradation (UV or chemical damage)
Material discoloration
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
L Y X
X
Visibility marking integrity, attachment to garment,
reflectivity damage
Loss of face opening elasticity or adjustability
X
X
X
O NX X
Any damage to the particulate blocking layer (particulate

Cracks, dents, abrasions
X
S E X X
Bubbling, soft spots, warping
Damaged or missing components of the suspension and
retention systems
L U X
X
X
Earflaps: rips, tears or cuts, thermal damage (such as

charring, burn holes, melting, or discoloration of any
layer)
U A X
Damaged or missing components of faceshield/goggle

system, including discoloration and scratched lenses
I D X
Inverted glove liner
I
Exposed or deformed steel toe, steel midsole, or shank V X
X
Loss of water resistance
D X X
IN
Evaluation of system fit and coat/trouser overlap X
Loss of seam integrity X X X
R
Broken or missing stitches
Loss or shifting of liner material
O
Loss of wristlet elasticity, stretching, runs, cuts, or holes
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
F Label integrity and legibility

Hook and loop functionality
Liner attachment system
X
X
X
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
Material elasticity, stretching out of shape X
Damage to the impact cap X
Loss of flexibility X
Punctures, cracking, or splitting X X X
Excessive tread wear X
Condition of lining: tears, excessive wear, separation from X
outer layer
(continues)
Δ Table A.6.3.5 Continued
Coats and Hoods/

Correct assembly and size compatibility of shell, liner, and X X
DRD
Closure system functionality X
Accessories for compliance with 4.2.3 X X
Complete liner inspection (Section 6.4) X
Delamination as evidenced by separation or peeling of the X X X X X
outer shell (aluminized materials)
While this simple test provides a practical evaluation of trim test used to qualify particulate-blocking protective hoods at the
L Y
retroreflective performance, it does not evaluate trim fluores‐
cence or mean that the trim will provide adequate fire fighter
visibility. Trim can lose fluorescence (daytime visibility) and still
remain retroreflective. Trim can also appear to be retroreflec‐
O N
1 micron particle size. It is important to point out that use of
this test will require the hood to be cleaned twice. Hoods must
be cleaned prior to the inspection, and they must also be
cleaned after the inspection test is applied to remove any resid‐
E
tive and not have sufficient intensity for nighttime visibility at ual smoke-generating liquid deposited on the hood as a result
far distances. Only testing under laboratory conditions can of the exposure.
provide an accurate determination of trim visibility properties.
Attention during inspection should be paid to sections that
show evidence of damage, abrasion, excessive soiling, or stains/
discoloration. With proper care, visibility markings on turnout
S
A.6.3.5.2(10) If a label problem is identified, the organization
should contact the manufacturer of the ensemble or ensemble
element.
U
L
gear can provide long service, often as long as the service life of A.6.3.5.3(13) If a label problem is identified, the organization
the ensemble itself. should contact the manufacturer of the ensemble or ensemble
A.6.3.5.1(10) If a label problem is identified, the organization

should contact the manufacturer of the ensemble or ensemble
element.
U A element.
A.6.3.5.4(3) The watertight integrity of gloves can be evalu‐
ated by the following test. A test subject wears lightweight
cotton gloves under the gloves being inspected. The test
N A.6.3.5.2(5) Two different test methods are provided for
inspection of the particulate-blocking layer in protective hood
I D subject then immerses the gloves in water up to the wrist
crease, repeatedly flexes his or her hands for 2 minutes, and
interface components. Each of these test methods has advan‐
tages and disadvantages, and either can be selected.
I V then takes them out of the water. The test gloves are removed
and the cotton gloves examined for signs of watermarks. Gloves
showing signs of leakage should be removed from service.
D
Section 12.1 provides a standardized means for evaluating
damage to the particulate-blocking layer using a light evalua‐ A.6.3.5.4(8) If a label problem is identified, the organization
IN
tion method. This method is relatively simple and can be should contact the manufacturer of the ensemble or ensemble
applied either by using a clear head form with an internal light element.
source to evaluate the entire hood simultaneously or by using a
pipe section with an internally positioned light source to evalu‐ A.6.3.5.5(6) Excessive tread wear significantly reduces traction
O R
ate selected portions of the hood. Nevertheless, this technique
might not be effective for all types of particulate-blocking
protective hoods. It might be difficult to identify damaged
areas of hoods that have relatively thick or dense layers or are
and safe footing on many surfaces such as wet flooring and
roads, roofs, ladder rungs, and apparatus steps and platforms.
Inspection of tread wear should focus on the heel and the ball
of foot areas since those two areas carry the majority of a fire
F
dark in color.
Section 12.2 provides an inspection technique based on the
use of smoke directed towards the hood that is clamped onto a
modified moisture barrier hydrostatic testing device. The hood
fighter’s body weight and are the most critical in maintaining
adequate traction. The organization should consult with the
manufacturer and set guidelines for a minimum tread depth
that has to be present for footwear to remain in service.
is observed for the passage of smoke through the clamped A.6.3.5.5(10) If a label problem is identified, the organization
hood inspection area. The test can be performed one of two should contact the manufacturer of the ensemble or ensemble
ways: qualitatively, by simply observing any differences in the element.
amount of smoke coming through the hood; or quantitatively, A.6.3.5.7(5) If a label problem is identified, the organization
with the use of a light beam directed across the hood inspec‐ should contact the manufacturer of the ensemble or ensemble
tion area that measures the interruption of light caused by the element.
passage of smoke. The latter test provides a measurement of
light transmission from 0 percent (fully blocked by smoke) to A.6.3.7.1 Organizations should consult with the manufacturer
100 percent (no smoke). Ordinary two-layer knit hoods without of the ensemble with optional liquid and particulate contami‐
particulate-blocking layers generally provide measurements of nation protection for any additional or specific advanced
20 to 40 percent light transmission. The quantitative method inspection requirements for this type of ensemble.
moderately correlates with NFPA 1971’s particulate-blocking •
ANNEX A 1851-79
A.6.4.5.1 The ability to inspect the interior sides of the liner into the body through either skin absorption or from contami‐
for the moisture barrier and thermal barrier can be accommo‐ nants off-gassing into the immediate atmosphere breathed by
dated by the presence of an inspection opening designed by fire fighters.
the manufacturer that is built into the protective element. The
location and method for securing this opening will vary with Ensembles and ensemble elements contaminated with body
the manufacturer’s design. However, the intent of this feature fluids present a potential risk of infectious diseases being trans‐
is to permit the organization conducting the inspection to mitted to the person coming into contact with the contamina‐
invert the liner so that the interior sides of the moisture barrier ted ensembles or ensemble elements.
and thermal barrier can be readily inspected. If the protective Other forms of contaminants include substances such as
element is not provided with an inspection opening, the organ‐ bulk chemicals, asbestos, and other hazardous substances
ization conducting the complete liner inspection might be encountered at the emergency scene.
required to remove a portion of the seam in the lining to
permit opening the lining and allow its inversion for inspecting Reduced performance hazards of contaminated ensembles and
the interior sides of the moisture barrier and thermal barrier.
The procedures used for removing the lining seam should
conform to those procedures specified by the manufacturer of
the protective element and should account for practices that
ensemble elements. When ensembles or ensemble elements
become laden with particles and chemicals, other problems are
faced in addition to being exposed to toxins, such as the follow‐
ing:
L Y
minimize the damage and allow for ease of reconstructing the
liner seam to limit any decrement of protective element
performance or integrity.
Δ A.7.1 The importance of maintaining the cleanliness of
(1)
N
Soiled ensembles and ensemble elements typically reflect
less radiant heat. After materials are saturated with hydro‐
O
carbons, they will tend to absorb rather than reflect the
radiant heat from the surrounding fire.
ensembles and ensemble elements should not be underestima‐
ted. Studies have shown that soiled or contaminated ensembles
and ensemble elements are a hazard to fire fighters because
soils and contaminants can be flammable, toxic, or carcino‐
(2)
S E
Ensembles and ensemble elements heavily contaminated
with hydrocarbons are more likely to conduct electricity,
increasing the danger when entering a building or vehi‐
cle where wiring can still be live.
genic. Additionally, soils or contaminants can reduce the
protective performance of the ensembles and ensemble
elements. Clean ensembles and ensemble elements can last
longer and offer emergency responders better protection.
(3)
L U Ensembles and ensemble elements impregnated with oil,

grease, and hydrocarbon deposits from soot and smoke
can ignite and cause severe burns and injuries, even if the
materials are normally flame-resistant.
Ensembles and ensemble elements should be cleaned when‐
ever they become soiled.
In everyday use, personal protective equipment (PPE)
U A Even though the number of specialized hazardous materials
response teams is growing, individual fire fighters can still
encounter various chemicals in their normal fire-fighting activi‐
D
becomes dirty by absorbing sweat from the wearer and soils, ties. Exposures to oils, gasoline, and lubricants can occur
ensembles and ensemble elements removes those substances.
V I
soot, and so forth from the outside environment. Cleaning of around fire station vehicles. During responses, exposures to
liquids ranging from pesticides to acids to chemical solvents
can occur, knowingly or unknowingly. These contaminants, in
I
Ensembles and ensemble elements can also become contami‐
nated with other substances, principally hazardous materials, addition to being hazardous, can also degrade ensembles and
ensemble elements as follows:
D
particulates, and body fluids. The removal of these substances
is most often referred to by the term decontamination. In struc‐ (1) Fabrics and materials can become weakened and tear
IN
tural and proximity fire fighting, both general cleaning and more easily.
decontamination of ensembles and ensemble elements are (2) Thread or seam sealing tape can become loose.
often necessary. (3) Water-repelling treatments can be removed.
(4) Visibility markings can lose reflective properties or mark‐
R
Health risks of soiled or contaminated ensembles and ensemble ings, becoming less visible.
elements. Soiled or contaminated ensembles and ensemble (5) Helmet shells, helmet faceshields, or goggles can pit or
O
elements can expose fire fighters to toxins, carcinogens, and craze.
other harmful substances that enter the body through inges‐ (6) Ensemble and ensemble elements hardware can become
F tion, inhalation, or skin absorption. Repeated small exposures

to some contaminants can accumulate within the body over
time and cause health problems.
Although great emphasis is placed on safety to avoid injury
or inhalation hazards to personnel working on the fireground,
•
corroded.
N A.7.1.1.1 Verified ISPs are required to go through a third-
party verification of their cleaning procedures for garments in
order to determine the effectiveness of their cleaning
processes. Since the technical committee did not want to deter
many of the contaminants that lead to health risks are being organizations from cleaning, they purposely did not make this
carried away from the fire scene on PPE used by the fire cleaning verification a requirement for organizations cleaning
fighter. Structural and proximity fires are increasingly being their own gear. However, this validation is the only real assur‐
identified as sources for contamination by products of combus‐ ance that a garment is “clean” as per the parameters estab‐
tion that are known to include various toxic and carcinogenic lished by the standard. Organizations are encouraged to
chemicals. contact verification agencies to have their own cleaning
Contaminants that a fire fighter could come into contact processes go through the same verification; however, the
with can be trapped in the fibers of soiled ensembles and recommended procedures provided in A.7.3.9(5) for garments
ensemble elements or absorbed into the materials themselves. have been examined in a verification process and are expected
Contact with the soiled ensembles and ensemble elements to meet the cleaning verification requirements that are applied
increases the risk of hazardous contaminants being introduced to a verified ISP.
Although the training for cleaning is only required to be Hazardous Materials Incident Exposure. The second decision
done initially for each new edition of the standard, organiza‐ involves the use of fire-fighting protective ensembles and
tions should work with their training provider to determine if ensemble elements in a hazardous materials incident. It is
the training needs to be performed more frequently. At a mini‐ recognized that fire fighters might sometimes wear their struc‐
mum, discussion with the trainer should occur when deter‐ tural or proximity fire-fighting protective ensembles and
gents, chemicals, equipment, processes, or employees ensemble elements in response to a hazardous material inci‐
managing the training program undergo changes in order to dent, even if other types of protective clothing might be consid‐
determine if additional training is required. ered more appropriate for the type of exposure. Hazardous
materials incidents typically involve exposure to chemicals or
N A.7.1.1.3 In most cases, preliminary exposure reduction is a other substances that pose toxic, corrosive, irritating, or sensi‐
recommended first step for any handling, cleaning, disinfec‐ tizing hazards to the wearer. This type of ensemble or ensemble
tion, or sanitization of protective ensembles or ensemble element use might occur without any fire threat; this section
elements. One exception is where the ensemble and ensemble provides for decisions involving exposure during a response to
Y
elements have been exposed to CBRN terrorism agents where bulk chemicals that occur as the result of a fire-based incident.
the action should be to remove and isolate the clothing as
quickly as possible in order to prevent any further spread of
contaminants. Certain other highly hazardous contaminants
might also pose similar dangers, therefore the actions of the
organization should be to have the ensemble and ensemble
For hazardous materials incident exposure, the prescribed
action following preliminary exposure reduction, including
N
isolating and bagging the gear, is to have the organization’s
hazardous materials team or other qualified experts knowl‐
L
elements removed and isolated immediately and bagged for
later assessment. mine if decontamination is needed and is possible. If
O
edgeable in hazardous materials assess the exposure to deter‐
decontamination is needed, some form of specialized cleaning

Specific procedures for preliminary exposure reduction are
provided in Section 7.2. Procedures for preliminary exposure
reduction include the isolation, bagging, and separate trans‐
port of ensembles and ensemble elements that are contamina‐
S E
is required. The recommended decontamination procedures
should only be applied if it is understood that it will be effective
in removing the hazardous materials contamination or reduc‐
ing it to a safe level. Otherwise, the ensemble or ensemble
ted or soiled. In certain rare cases, there might be
circumstances where certain steps within the specified prelimi‐
nary exposure reduction procedures are not appropriate for
the circumstances of the event and it is the organization’s
L U
elements should be disposed of as contaminated waste.
Contamination Exposure. The third decision involves any
response where contamination of the protective ensemble or
responsibility to provide this judgment (e.g., contamination
with water-reactive substances or the creation of a hazardous
particulate atmosphere from brushing off a highly toxic
substance from the exterior of the clothing and equipment).
U A ensemble elements occurs. This decision is broken into a sepa‐
rate set of decisions provided in Figure 7.1.1.2(b) and de‐
scribed in A.7.1.3.
D
Likewise, there might be circumstances where it is impractical Soiling Exposure. If there is no contamination and the ensem‐
to carry out preliminary exposure reduction on scene and
delays might be incurred before the full set of procedures can
V I ble or ensemble element is simply soiled from ordinary dirt,

sweat, or other nonhazardous materials, then it is still recom‐
mended for the ensemble and ensemble elements to go
I
be undertaken.
through preliminary exposure reduction, followed by advanced
N A.7.1.1.6 In general, dry cleaning is not recommended for cleaning, and to be subject to at least a routine inspection.
D
cleaning protective ensembles and ensemble elements. Some
dry cleaning solvents, particularly perchloroethylene or similar N A.7.1.3 The application of the appropriate cleaning, disinfec‐
IN
chemicals, used in lieu of water can damage components of the tion, or sanitization procedure(s) is dependent on properly
ensembles and ensemble elements. In particular, reflective classifying the contamination types to which the ensemble or
trim, moisture barrier seam tape materials, certain helmet ensemble elements have been exposed. For this standard, there
are four general classifications of contamination.
R
materials, and leather gloves can be adversely affected by such
solvents. The manufacturer should be consulted prior to Bulk Chemicals. Exposure to chemicals can occur at any emer‐
O
performing dry cleaning to confirm that ensembles and ensem‐ gency scene, particularly where various types of oils, greases,
ble elements will not be damaged. Caution should be exercised and lubricants are used. Many residential structural fires
F
in considering any other type of dry cleaning process without
fully understanding that the process will not damage the
protective ensemble element or its components through one or
multiple applications.
N A.7.1.2 The approaches used for deciding on the handling,
include a variety of cleaning agents and other products
contained in garages, kitchens, and other portions of a house
where direct liquid exposure to the chemical in its bulk form
can occur. Structural fires at commercial facilities, particularly
those involved in manufacturing, can likewise include a variety
cleaning, and disposition of protective ensembles and ensem‐ of different chemical substances in containers that break open
ble elements uses a decision tree involving the highest risk and result in exposure to fire fighters in gas/vapor, liquid, or
contaminants and soils first and then proceeding to lower risk solid form. Depending on the nature of the specific chemical
contaminants and soils. The process is illustrated in Figure and its respective hazards, contamination of the ensemble and
7.1.1.2(a). ensemble elements can occur and remain as persistent contam‐
ination that advanced cleaning procedures might be able to
CBRN Exposure. The first decision involves any exposure to remove. Specialized cleaning is often recommended for bulk
chemical, biological, radiological, or nuclear (CBRN) terrorism chemical contamination and could require inquiries to the
agents. The ensemble and ensemble elements are immediately chemical supplier as well as the manufacturer of the respective
condemned and removed from service, given the high risks protective ensemble or ensemble elements. Depending on the
associated with CBRN terrorism agents. hazards associated with the specific chemicals, the extent of
contamination, or the lack of available decontamination proce‐
ANNEX A 1851-81
dures, organizations might conclude that the risk for reuse of ratus seats and fire station work/living areas prior to advanced
the ensemble or ensemble elements outweighs any benefits of cleaning.
retaining the clothing even if it appears to be clean and free of
contamination. N A.7.1.3.5.1 It is recognized that it might not always be practi‐
cal for organizations to carry out preliminary exposure reduc‐
Asbestos and Other Designated Hazardous Substances. Certain tion on-scene because of personnel constraints, lack of on-
types of common contaminants [e.g., asbestos, opioid drugs scene resources, availability of spare gear, the weather, and
(fentanyl)] and parasites (e.g., bed bugs) can require special‐ other operational factors. Nevertheless, it is important that
ized cleaning or treatments for their removal from ensembles organizations implement some form of preliminary exposure
and ensemble elements. These substances are called out sepa‐ reduction procedure as soon as is practically possible, particu‐
rately from bulk chemical exposures because there is some larly following any event where ensembles or ensemble
history and experience for addressing ensembles and ensemble elements are contaminated.
elements contaminated with them. In particular, asbestos
Organizations should review and revise their policies and
Y
warrants special attention because of the direct link between
asbestos exposure and mesothelioma, and the elevated risk to procedures to minimize opportunities for cross contamination
L
fire fighters. Decontamination of ensembles and ensemble of apparatus, personal vehicles, and fire stations.
elements that have been exposed to fentanyl powders requires N A.7.1.3.5.2 It is recognized that it might not always be possible
use of certain procedures that prevent exposure to fire fighters
and others handling the element. Conventional washing of
protective ensembles and ensemble elements that have been
exposed to bed bugs also will fail to kill all eggs that remain in
the clothing. Ensemble and ensemble element exposure to
N
for organizations to remove soiled or contaminated ensembles
or ensemble elements from service immediately following an
O
incident for advanced cleaning. This is not intended to change
the fact that advanced cleaning should be applied whenever
protective ensembles or ensemble elements are soiled and
these substances requires special consideration and often
entails specialized cleaning procedures or treatments for their
removal. Depending on the risk associated with a specific
contaminating substance, organizations might conclude that
S E
contaminated. It is important that organizations implement
advanced cleaning as soon as possible following any event
where ensembles or ensemble elements are soiled or contami‐
U
nated.
the risk for reuse of the ensemble or ensemble element
outweighs any benefits to retaining the ensemble or ensemble Organizations should review and revise their policies and
element even if it appears to be clean and free of contamina‐
tion.
Body Fluids and Other Microbial Contamination. Body fluids
A L
procedures to minimize the number of incidents where soiled
or contaminated ensembles or ensemble elements remain in
service. They should also review and revise their procedures to
reduce the amount of time soiled or contaminated ensembles
such as blood, vomit, and various secretions are often encoun‐
tered in providing emergency patient care or rescue of victims
at an emergency scene. These fluids must be treated as poten‐
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U or ensemble elements remain in service, in those rare inci‐
dents, before receiving advanced cleaning. The goal is to elimi‐
nate the number of times and the amount of time
I
tially infectious, therefore ensembles and ensemble elements
contaminated with body fluids must be subject to sanitization
V
contaminated ensembles and ensemble elements are left in
service.
I
or disinfection, where disinfection represents a greater effi‐
ciency in removing potentially infectious microorganisms. In many cases, this will fundamentally change the way fire
departments manage their on-scene and post-scene operations.
D
Other biological contaminants can include methicillin-resistant
Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA) and Clostridium difficile (C. Organizations and fire fighters must understand that the
longer soiled or contaminated PPE remains in service, the
IN
difficile) from medical victim contact and Escherichia coli (E.
coli) from flood water contact. These contaminants require longer fire fighters are exposed to carcinogens and other
disinfection or sanitization of ensembles and ensemble health hazards. This exposure includes direct contact as well as
elements to reduce the microbial threat where exposure has off-gassing.
O R
occurred. Disinfection or sanitization might precede advanced
cleaning or be part of the advanced cleaning process since soils
associated with many body fluids must also be removed. It is
important to recognize that disinfection or sanitization gener‐
N A.7.2 Preliminary exposure reduction is not considered by
itself to be a complete cleaning of ensembles or ensemble
elements. Rather, it is intended to reduce the exposure of fire
F
fighters to soils and contaminants that arise during structural
ally only affects the viability of the microbial contamination or proximity fires or other emergency response events. Prelimi‐
and might not remove other associated soils such as dried nary exposure reduction also aids in minimizing the transfer of
blood, body fluids, or other liquids/solids in which the micro‐ soils and contaminants from the emergency scene to the appa‐
bial contamination is found. ratus, station, and personal vehicles. Other forms of cleaning,
Products of Combustion. Generally, all fires where entry is made such as advanced or specialized cleaning, are required to
while wearing self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) will provide full cleaning of the ensemble or ensemble elements.
expose ensembles and ensemble elements to products of N A.7.2.1.1 Preliminary exposure reduction is an essential first
combustion. The smoke particles and fire gases easily penetrate step in minimizing cross contamination preceding the cleaning
and contaminate clothing. Depending on the length of expo‐ of ensembles or ensemble elements as specified in 7.1.1.2 and
sure and degree to which fire fighters are exposed, the levels of as shown in Figure 7.1.1.2(a) and Figure 7.1.1.2(b).
contamination from products of combustion will vary but will
always require advanced cleaning. Preliminary exposure reduc‐ A.7.2.1.2 Preliminary exposure reduction is an attempt to
tion is undertaken to remove some forms of surface contamina‐ remove some exterior soiling and contamination from ensem‐
tion as well as to minimize the transfer of exterior bles and ensemble elements that is performed by the end user
contaminants to the fire fighter or other surfaces such as appa‐ to minimize transfer of soil and contaminants outside of the
incident scene. Whenever possible, preliminary exposure
reduction should be conducted as personnel exit the emer‐ land Security has shown that wet mitigation techniques are
gency scene and before entering the rehabilitation area. While more effective in removing surface contamination as compared
it is possible to conduct dry mitigation without the elements to dry mitigation techniques. Wet mitigation techniques
being taken out of service, wet mitigation might require protec‐ remove a significant amount of products of combustion
tive elements to be removed because they are wetted. While the whereas dry mitigation techniques only remove a portion of
selected procedures for preliminary exposure reduction might such contamination. Techniques involving blowing air onto
not result in the elements being taken out of service, a determi‐ ensembles or ensemble elements, such as from a leaf blower,
nation by the organization might be made that the elements be should be avoided because they are minimally effective and
isolated and bagged if determined to be contaminated and might only redistribute contamination at the emergency scene
warrant more extensive cleaning. and create inhalation hazards for unprotected personnel (Fent,
et. al.).
Some organizations might consider having spare gear or
other spare clothing, such as disposable clothing, available for N A.7.2.2.4.1 Dry mitigation techniques are best achieved with a
Y
members to wear until the members can shower and change soft bristle brush starting at the top of the end user’s ensemble
into clean clothing. or ensemble element and working downward.
It is recognized that it might not always be practical for
organizations to carry out preliminary exposure reduction on-
scene because of personnel constraints, lack of on-scene
resources, availability of spare gear, the weather, and other
N A.7.2.2.4.2 There are several means by which wet mitigation
N
techniques can be carried out. One method is to use a reducer
from the apparatus pump panel to supply a small hose line,
L
O
such as a forestry hose or a garden hose with an adjustable
operational factors. Nevertheless, it is important that organiza‐ nozzle, at low pressure and volume. Caution should be applied
tions implement some form of preliminary exposure reduction when using ordinary fire hoses and nozzles for this technique
procedure as soon as is practically possible, particularly follow‐
ing any event where ensembles or ensemble elements are
contaminated. E
where the lowest possible flow rate is used. Most departments
might have a “booster line” or “trash line” that is usually 3∕4 in.
S
or 1 in. in diameter than can be applied at a low pressure less
than 30 psi. Portable decontamination showers that conform to
U
Organizations should review and revise their policies and ANSI/ISEA 113, American National Standard for Fixed and Portable
procedures to minimize opportunities for cross contamination Decontamination Shower Units, can also be used and assist where
of apparatus, personal vehicles, and fire stations.
A.7.2.2.1 Preliminary exposure reduction after the termina‐
tion of an incident can remove substantial amounts of surface
contaminants before they have a chance to set in and might
A L
weather, modesty, or other issues might occur.
The process of wet mitigation should start with spray at the
top of the user’s ensemble or ensemble element, rinsing down‐
U
ward. Where necessary, a soft bristle brush might be used to
limit the transfer of contaminants to apparatus, personal vehi‐ gently scrub the ensemble or ensemble elements. It is impor‐
cles, and stations. Many of the contaminants that can cause
D
tant that the spray be light, that it doesn’t soak through the
damage to visibility markings and other materials and compo‐
nents of ensembles or ensemble elements also can be removed
if preliminary exposure reduction is done as soon as possible
V I clothing, and that it can be applied over the entire fire fighter,
as the primary purpose of this mitigation technique is to
remove surface contamination. Wet mitigation techniques
D I
after exposure. It is recognized that is not always practical for
organizations to carry out preliminary exposure reduction on
scene because of constraints in personnel, on-scene resources,
availability of spare gear, weather, and other operational
cannot remove interior layer soiling or contamination.
It is further recommended that a mild detergent be used as
an aid in wet mitigation where the surfactant in the detergent
IN
factors. Nevertheless, it is important that organizations imple‐ is helpful for removing exterior soils. Where a mild detergent is
ment some form of preliminary exposure reduction proce‐ used, it should be followed by gentle rinsing of the ensemble or
dures as soon as practically possible, particularly following any ensemble elements.
event where ensembles or ensemble elements are contamina‐
ted.
O R
Use of a portable decontamination shower unit that
conforms to the requirements in ANSI/ISEA 113, American
Organizations performing wet mitigation techniques should
take into consideration the runoff of any contaminated rinse
water to minimize the spread of contamination to the environ‐
ment.
•
F
National Standard for Fixed and Portable Decontamination Shower
Units, is one means for providing wet mitigation as part of
preliminary exposure reduction.
N A.7.2.2.2 The purpose of remaining on air is to minimize the
N A.7.2.2.5 It is recognized that it might not always be practical
for organizations to carry out preliminary exposure reduction
on-scene because of personnel constraints, lack of on-scene
resources, availability of spare gear, the weather, and other
end user’s exposure to products of combustion that might off- operational factors. Nevertheless, it is important that organiza‐
gas from the ensemble or ensemble elements following tions implement some form of preliminary exposure reduction
contaminant exposure during a structural fire and to help the procedure as soon as is practically possible, particularly follow‐
end user avoid breathing in any particulates that might be ing any event where ensembles or ensemble elements are
dislodged from the ensemble or ensemble elements during dry contaminated.
mitigation.
Organizations should review and revise their policies and
N A.7.2.2.4 The decision between dry and wet mitigation will procedures to minimize opportunities for cross contamination
depend on the resources available to the organization and the of apparatus, personal vehicles, and fire stations.
conditions at the emergency scene or other location. Work by
the Illinois Fire Service Institute under an Assistance to Fire‐ The removal of ensembles or ensemble elements at the
fighters Research Grant from the U.S. Department of Home‐ scene might require additional clothing to be present, particu‐
larly under inclement or cold weather conditions. Portable
ANNEX A 1851-83
facilities might be required for end users to change. Portable by hand washing in a utility sink or by machine washing,
decontamination showers conforming to ANSI/ISEA 113, Amer‐ depending on the ensemble or ensemble element. Hand wash‐
ican National Standard for Fixed and Portable Decontamination ing is not permitted for ensemble or ensemble elements,
Shower Units, can be set up at the scene in a relatively short except for proximity fire-fighting garment outer shells and
period of time and require limited resources for provided in other radiant reflective components, because machine washing
protection from weather and modesty to fire fighters. In addi‐ can cause damage to the aluminized surfaces of these materi‐
tion, it is recommended that personnel use disposable wet als.
wipes to clean portions of their face and skin when known to
be directly exposed to contaminants, change into a clean Soiling and contamination are not always visible and can be
station/work uniform, and take a shower as soon as possible. difficult to observe on darkly colored materials. In addition,
ensembles and ensemble elements can be contaminated with
For isolation of ensembles and ensemble elements, airtight persistent fire gases and other hazardous substances, resulting
protective containers or bags should be used to minimize cross in ensembles and ensemble elements that are unsafe for use.
Y
contamination. Examples include disposable, heavy-duty poly‐ Ensembles and ensemble elements that have not been cleaned
ethylene bags or sealable plastic cases, which are cleanable. If a and appear to be unsoiled have been shown to contain numer‐
plastic bag is used, it is recommended that the bag be clear to
ensure that the contents of the bag can be readily identified.
Relatively thick plastic bags, at least 2 mils in thickness, are
recommended to resist punctures. Ensembles or ensemble
ous fire gas chemicals, including carcinogenic polynuclear
aromatic compounds. Periodic cleaning is required to avoid
N
use of ensembles and ensemble elements that could be conta‐
minated without visible evidence of soiling.
L
elements should not be transported from the incident scene in
the passenger areas of apparatus or personal vehicles. This
reduces further exposure of personnel to contaminated ensem‐ O
It is the intent of this standard that ensembles and ensemble
elements receive advanced cleaning whenever they are soiled
bles and ensemble elements and also reduces cross contamina‐
tion of apparatus or personal vehicles.
If the protective ensemble or ensemble elements are wet, the
S E
or contaminated. This is in addition to the being subjected to
advanced cleaning twice a year (see 7.3.4 and A.7.3.4).
It is recognized that it might not always be practical for
U
protective ensemble or ensemble elements must be removed as organizations to remove soiled or contaminated ensembles or
soon as possible following transport from the fire or other ensemble elements from service immediately following an inci‐
dent for advanced cleaning. This is not intended to change the
emergency scene since ensembles and ensemble elements that
remain wet under closed conditions can result in the growth of
damaging mold and mildew. It is further important that, follow‐
ing their transport, protective ensembles and ensemble
A L
fact that advanced cleaning should be applied whenever
protective ensembles or ensemble elements are soiled and
contaminated. It is important that organizations implement
U
elements be stored under conditions where they can dry until advanced cleaning as soon as is practically possible following
appropriate cleaning procedures can be conducted as specified any event where ensembles or ensemble elements are soiled or
ID
in Chapter 7. contaminated.
N A.7.2.4 The manufacturer’s guidelines for the proper cleaning Organizations should review and revise their procedures to
V
of faceshields, flip-downs, or goggles should be followed. Most reduce the amount of time soiled or contaminated ensembles
D I
manufacturers list specific products that will clean these
components without causing damage. For example, repeatedly
using ammonia-based window cleaner will eventually cause
fogging that will decrease visibility.
or ensemble elements remain in service, in those rare inci‐
dents, before receiving advanced cleaning. The goal is to elimi‐
nate the number of times and the amount of time
contaminated ensembles and ensemble elements are left in
IN
service.
N A.7.3.1.3 To perform advanced cleaning, the organization
must be a manufacturer-trained organization. The training In many cases, this will fundamentally change the way fire
required to become a manufacturer-trained organization is departments manage their on-scene and post-scene operations.
R
specified in 4.2.4.5.
Δ A.7.3.3 Advanced cleaning is a thorough cleaning of ensem‐
O
bles and ensemble elements accomplished by washing them
Organizations and fire fighters must understand that the
longer soiled or contaminated PPE remains in service, the
longer fire fighters are exposed to carcinogens and other
health hazards. This exposure includes direct contact as well as
Fwith cleaning agents. Advanced cleaning is prescribed for

ensembles and ensemble elements that are soiled or contami‐
nated, including those that have been subject to ordinary wear
without contamination, those that have been contaminated in
structural or proximity fire fighting by products of combustion,
off-gassing.
N A.7.3.4 This requirement is not intended to change the fact
that advanced cleaning should be applied whenever protective
ensembles or ensemble elements are soiled and contaminated.
or those that have been exposed to blood and body fluids. Instead, it is intended to ensure that worn and used clothing is
Where highly hazardous or other designated substances are subjected to advanced cleaning at least every six months. One
involved, specialized cleaning might be needed. of those advanced cleanings should be in conjunction with an
advanced inspection.
Specialized cleaning differs from advanced cleaning in that
an assessment of the contamination by an individual knowl‐ Δ A.7.3.5 Machine cleaning using a front-loading washer/extrac‐
edgeable in the cleaning of fire-fighting protective ensembles tor is the most effective method for cleaning ensembles and
and ensemble elements is needed for determining what type of ensemble elements such as structural fire-fighting coats, trou‐
cleaning, if any, is appropriate. sers, coveralls, and hoods. It is the most effective means of loos‐
ening and removing dirt, soot, and other debris. Front-loading
Advanced cleaning requires elements to be temporarily washer/extractors are the appropriate machine type for protec‐
taken out of service. Advanced cleaning can be accomplished tive ensembles and ensemble elements.
Front-loading washer/extractors have a door on the front of (HE) top-loading machines that do not have an agitator
the machine through which garments are loaded. They clean designed to clean multiple garments of minimum bulk. As a
by lifting garments out of the water and gently dropping them result of the center post agitation in machines that incorporate
back into the water. These units provide better mechanical that feature, it is generally accepted that top-loading machines
action because of the size and type of rotation, as well as the are more damaging to ensembles and ensemble elements than
degree of extraction. They have various capacities and are front-loading machines. Furthermore, many top-loading
designed to handle heavy loads of bulky items and also to save machines are unable to precisely control the temperatures for
water and energy. individual cycle steps, and HE top-loading machines generally
lack sufficient rinsing capability for advanced cleaning of
The capacity of a washer/extractor is important for several garments. Therefore, top-loading, agitating machines have the
reasons, including the following: potential to reduce the longevity of garments due to mechani‐
(1) Washer/extractors that are overloaded do not clean effec‐ cal damage and could be less effective in cleaning protective
tively because there is not enough movement of the garments.
(2)
protective elements to provide for mechanical action.
Washer/extractors that are underloaded do not clean
effectively because the wash articles do not make suffi‐
cient contact with mechanical action.
N A.7.3.6.1 Some manufacturers might maintain lists
advanced cleaning processes, equipment, and detergents.
L Y of
N
N A.7.3.7.2 The pH for the product can be indicated on the
(3) Large washer/extractors require more water and energy product (detergent) container and should be the pH for the
and also output a lot of water during the extraction
O
product in an undiluted form if it is a liquid. If the detergent is
discharge steps of the washing process. a powder, the pH will be reported at a specific concentration of
A washer/extractor with a minimum load capacity of 13.6 kg the solid on a weight basis in water. If the pH is not listed on
(30 lb) and a minimum volumetric capacity of 0.11 m3 (4.0 ft3)
is recommended. However, the capacity selection for the wash
can be increased or decreased depending on the expected
throughput of garments and the frequency of advanced clean‐
S E
the product container, then the safety data sheet (SDS) should
be requested from the product supplier. Most suppliers will
normally provide the SDS for their respective products as part
of the shipment, and it might also be possible to obtain a copy
ing. Further information on washer/extractor loading is provi‐
ded in A.7.3.9(1).
It is very important for machine operators to ensure correct
U
of the SDS online from the supplier’s website.
The pH for the product is typically listed in Section 9 of the
L
SDS for the product’s physical and chemical properties.
water temperatures and proper detergent selection and to
adjust the g-forces of the spinning/extraction cycle. Careful
adherence to manufacturers’ recommendations of cleaning
processes has a significant impact on cleaning thoroughness
U A The selection of the detergent should include a considera‐
tion of several factors in addition to the pH range. Foremost
among these is demonstration by the supplier that the deter‐
gent is safe to use with fire fighter protective clothing. This
ID
and maintenance of protection factors inherent in each demonstration consists of the following two parts:
element, as well as extending the life expectancy of elements.
(1) The effectiveness of the detergent in removing soils and
IV
When possible, organizations should provide a washer/ other contaminants as indicated later in this section
extractor(s) for the sole purpose of cleaning protective ensem‐ (2) The impact of the detergent through multiple washings
bles and ensemble elements. on the protective element as described in A.7.3.7.3
N D
N A.7.3.5(2) Preliminary research suggests that excessive g-
forces created by washing machine drums that spin at high
This information might be available from the supplier of the
detergent, the manufacturer of the protective element, or the
I
revolutions per minute (RPMs) can damage protective
garments. The type and severity of damage will depend on the
g-forces created, exposure time, number of exposures, condi‐
fabric suppliers. If there is uncertainty about a particular deter‐
gent or cleaning agent, the manufacturer of the protective
element should be contacted.
O R
tion of the ensemble or ensemble element, and materials used
to construct the ensemble or ensemble element. Thermal and
moisture barriers are the most vulnerable. Thermal barriers
can hold several times their weight in water; extraction at high
Organizations should be cautious about detergent or chemi‐
cal suppliers that offer several different chemicals for cleaning
protective elements. Many chemical suppliers will provide the
F
RPMs creates high g-forces, resulting in the shifting of nonwo‐
ven insulating materials. Moisture barrier materials and seams
are designed to impede the flow of water; extraction at high
RPMs can severely damage moisture barriers and moisture
barrier seams as water pushes against the barriers in an attempt
organization with an automated dispenser that can feed liquid
chemicals into the washer/extractor at no cost, on the require‐
ment that chemicals are purchased from that supplier. Certain
types of chemicals, such as alkali builders and sours, should be
avoided. Alkali builders are used to significantly increase the
to escape toward the outer perimeter of the drum. A vast pH of the wash water for enhancing the cleaning performance
majority of ISPs are monitoring extraction RPMs and have of certain detergents. These chemicals typically have pH values
adjusted their commercial machines to create less than 100 G that are greater than 10.5. When alkali builders are used, the
when cleaning all protective ensembles and ensemble pH is usually brought to a lower level using a “sour,” an acid-
elements. End users should make every effort to control and based agent used to bring the wash water back to a neutral pH.
lower the RPMs of laundering machines used for protective Sour cleaning agents are added toward the end of the wash
ensemble and ensemble elements to preserve their integrity formulation and almost always have pH values much lower than
and increase their longevity. 6.0. The combination of alkali builders and sours is most often
used in institutional laundering facilities but is not appropriate
N A.7.3.6 Top-loading machines are similar to those used in for protective elements unless the manufacturer of the respec‐
most homes. Many use a center post agitator to whisk water tive protective element has indicated that these types of prod‐
through the fibers of garments. There are also high efficiency ucts can be used safely.
ANNEX A 1851-85
In general, mild domestic laundry detergents can be used if rial could begin at 18.2 kg (40 lb) and drop to 11.4 kg (25 lb)
applied with the instructions provided for the laundry in terms after the same number of cleaning cycles. This particular case
of the amount of detergent added for the wash water volume points out that one material might be more susceptible to
used in the suds (detergent addition step) for the specific wash‐ damage during cleaning.
ing machine or washer/extractor. A single detergent can be
viable for washing both the shell and liners for structural fire- It is also possible for some measured properties to increase
fighting protective garments; however, some suppliers might after multiple cleaning cycles. For example, thermal insulation
offer specialty detergents that have been formulated for either as measured in the thermal protective performance test often
heavier duty cleaning of outer shells or gentler cleaning of improves after cleaning because the thickness (or loft) of the
linings. In addition, spot treatment agents are usually required materials increases. Conversely, the total heat loss (THL) value
for removal of specific heavy soiling and some common fire‐ of the same ensemble can decrease as a result of cleaning.
ground contaminants. In evaluating the effects of cleaning agents or cleaning
procedures on ensembles and ensemble elements, it is impor‐
Y
N A.7.3.7.3 Cleaning processing can have different effects on
the performance properties of protective ensembles or ensem‐ tant to realize that applying multiple cleaning cycles does not
L
ble elements, especially when repeated multiple times over the simulate its use. Cleaning is but one factor in the wear of
life cycle of the ensemble or ensemble element. The effects of protective ensemble and ensemble elements. Cleaning, when
N
the cleaning agent or cleaning process should be judged on properly applied, might also extend the life of the ensemble
the basis of tests performed on representative material samples and ensemble element.
following several cleaning cycles (washing and drying). The
samples should be subjected to at least 25 cleaning cycles;
however, organizations might want to demonstrate effects after O
N A.7.3.7.4 Organizations should be aware that cleaning of
protective equipment is a complicated process and that there is
no guarantee that the protective elements will be free from
as many as 40 cleaning cycles.
Ideally, ensembles and ensemble elements should be evalu‐
ated for each of the performance properties listed in
E
contamination after being subjected to an appropriate
S
advanced or specialized cleaning procedure.
Testing for Cleaning Effectiveness. While the purpose of clean‐
NFPA 1971; however, key properties can be selected. Table
A.7.3.7.3 provides a list of recommended key properties for the
evaluation of the impact of cleaning procedures on garment
elements. One approach for evaluating these properties is to
L U
ing is to remove all contamination from an ensemble or ensem‐
ble element, cleaning processes are not always 100 percent
effective in removing all contamination. The actual success of a
cleaning process can be determined only by measuring the
construct large panels of the composites, with finished edges
and including seams and other components of interest used in
representative protective clothing, and subject these samples to
the cleaning process multiple times. A panel size of 66 cm2
U A concentration of the contaminant(s) in the element before
and after the selected process. The majority of tests that can be
applied for measuring the concentration of contamination in
the ensemble or ensemble element require destructive
(26 in.2) has been found useful for this type of testing.
I D
Other properties that are of interest to the organization can
sampling of the ensemble or ensemble element that could
render it unusable or nonrepairable. Furthermore, many test
V
be evaluated, including, but not limited to, the following: methods require only small portions of material for analysis;
(1)
(2)
(3)
Composite weight
Composite thickness
D I
Composite total heat loss (breathability)
therefore, there is a lack of certainty that the swatches or pieces
of material analyzed are representative of the entire ensemble
or ensemble element. In addition, if destructive testing of one
or more ensembles or ensemble elements is applied, then
IN
(4) Outer shell colorfastness to washing assumptions about other untested ensembles or ensemble
(5) Outer shell colorfastness to light exposure elements have to be made, which might not be verifiable.
(6) Outer shell or thermal barrier abrasion resistance
If testing is performed on a contaminated ensemble or
R
The effects of cleaning properties are evaluated by compar‐ ensemble element, it is also necessary to test unaffected
ing the measured property after washing with the same prop‐ elements in order to get a baseline on chemicals that might
O
erty measured for new material. It is important to review both already be present in the clothing so that an adequate compari‐
the after-cleaning level and the change for the measured prop‐ son of cleaned and uncleaned clothing can be made to deter‐
F erty. Properties should remain at or above the minimum

performance requirements established in NFPA 1971. However,
it should be recognized that some properties, such as compo‐
site total heat loss and individual layer tear resistance might be
reduced and fall below initial NFPA 1971 minimum perform‐
mine the effectiveness of the cleaning process. When
noncontaminated elements are selected for testing, they should
be selected in such a fashion as to provide a similar age and
level of use and prior cleaning for establishing an appropriate
baseline. While an analysis of the rinse water or other extract
ance requirements during the service life of the garment. from a cleaning process can provide some information, the
These criteria only pertain to ensembles and ensemble sole evaluation of contamination levels in rinse water is not an
elements when new; therefore, experienced individuals within appropriate measure of effectiveness. Claims for ensembles or
the organization should make a determination on whether ensemble elements being contaminant-free based on state‐
diminished performance represents a safety hazard to the ments from any organization or facility or based on the use of
wearer. specific cleaning products or processes should be viewed with
It is also important to take note of large changes in clothing caution unless detailed information demonstrating effective‐
material properties, even if the results show compliant ness in removing specific contaminants from relevant fire
performance. For example, the tear strength of a material can fighter ensembles or ensemble elements is provided.
be measured at a level of 11.4 kg (25 lb) before cleaning and
then 10 kg (22 lb) after several cycles, whereas a different mate‐
N Table A.7.3.7.3 Recommended Test Methods in NFPA 1971 for Evaluating Effects of Advanced Cleaning Procedures on Garment
Performance Properties
Test Method (in

Performance Property NFPA 1971) Type of Sample(s) Specimens Required*
Thermal protective performance Section 8.10 Composite Three 150 mm (6 in.) squares
(TPP)
Flame resistance Section 8.2 Outer shell, moisture barrier, Five 75 mm × 305 mm (3 in. × 12 in.)
thermal barrier rectangles (in each material
direction)
Tear resistance Section 8.12 Outer shell, moisture barrier, Five 75 mm × 150 mm (3 in. × 6 in.)
thermal barrier rectangles (in each material
Breaking strength Section 8.50 Outer shell

direction)
Five 100 mm × 200 mm (4 in. × 8 in.)
rectangles (in each material
L Y
Seam-breaking strength
Water absorption resistance

Section 8.14
Section 8.25
Major outer shell, moisture
barrier, thermal barrier
Outer shell
direction)
N
Five 100 mm × 200 mm (4 in. × 8 in.)
O
rectangles where seam bisects long
dimension
Three 200 mm (8 in.) squares
Cleaning shrinkage resistance
Liquid penetration resistance–

Section 8.24
Section 8.27
Outer shell, moisture barrier,
thermal barrier
Moisture barrier seams
S EFive 375 mm (15 in.) squares
Three 75 mm (3 in.) squares

Fuel H
Viral penetration resistance
Retroreflectivity and fluorescence
Section 8.28
Section 8.45
Moisture barrier seams
Trim sections
*Either specimens removed from garment element or representative prepared material samples.
L U Four 75 mm (3 in.) squares
Four 305 mm (12 in.) lengths
General Procedures for Clothing Contamination Testing. Proce‐

dures used for measuring contamination levels should be
U A ide. The solution of the digested specimen is then diluted for
analysis by atomic absorption or ion coupled plasma-atomic
D
specific for the contaminant(s), if known. Useful analytical spectroscopy to identify and determine the amount of different
procedures for measuring levels of a broad range of semivola‐
tile organic chemicals in materials are found in the following
sections provided in EPA SW-846, Test Methods for Evaluating
V I inorganic substances.
Most tests for evaluating contamination levels of protective
D I
Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods: Method 3540C, “Soxhlet
Extraction” and Method 8270D, “Semivolatile Organic
Compounds by Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/
MS).”
ensembles or ensemble elements will yield results that are
reported in mass of contaminant per unit mass of the material,
such as milligrams of contaminant per kilogram of material
(mg/kg), which is equivalent to parts per million (ppm). In
IN
other cases, test results might be reported in the mass of
These procedures involve extracting a small piece of fabric contaminant per unit area of material, such as micrograms per
in a solvent such as methylene chloride and analyzing the square centimeter of material (µg/cm2). These types of meas‐
extract solution using gas chromatography in conjunction with urements provide a quantity of contamination that can be
O R
mass spectrometry. The gas chromatography separates chemi‐
cal contaminants and quantifies their amount, while the mass
spectrometry identifies the separate chemicals. It is important
to note that these procedures only target certain classes of
extrapolated to the entire item, knowing its overall weight or
surface area; however, that extrapolation assumes that the
contamination is uniformly spread over the entire ensemble or
ensemble element. This is generally not a valid assumption
F
common chemical contaminants such as polynuclear aromatic
hydrocarbons, phthalates, certain substituted phenols, and
other low volatility organic compounds. Different extraction
and analysis methods have to be used for other contamination
substances such as brominated fire retardant chemicals and
since contamination varies across the ensemble or ensemble
element.
Establishment of the Testing Approach. Because these procedures
are sensitive for quantifying many forms of contamination, any
substituted dioxins. testing for measuring contamination levels should involve
control tests. Control tests are separate measurements used to
Similar analytical procedures for measuring levels of inor‐ determine background contamination that might be present in
ganic chemicals (e.g., heavy metal contaminants like arsenic, the material or in residue left from the cleaning agents or
chromium, and lead) in materials are found in the following cleaning procedures. Failure to consider such chemicals can
sections provided in EPA SW-846, Test Methods for Evaluating interfere with the accuracy of measurements for actual contam‐
Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods: Method 3015A, “Micro‐ inants. In general, the following control tests are needed:
wave Assisted Acid Digestion of Aqueous Samples and (1) A test of the same material being analyzed without the
Extracts,” and Method 6010D, “Inductively Coupled Plasma- contaminant present (e.g., material taken from PPE with
Atomic Emission Spectrometry.” These procedures also involve a similar history but unexposed to the contaminants)
analysis of a small material specimen. The specimen is digested
in nitric acid and then treated with 50 percent hydrogen perox‐
ANNEX A 1851-87
(2) A test of the same material that is not contaminated after ble(s) or ensemble element(s). Organizations can periodically
washing that has been subjected to the cleaning process sample ensembles and ensemble elements to determine the
(e.g., a test on a piece of new material that has been effectiveness of cleaning processes in removing harmful
cleaned using the subject cleaning agent and procedures) contaminants, but they should understand the limitations of
the approach — specifically that sampling cannot be represen‐
The levels of residual contaminants from these control tests tative of all the protective ensembles and ensemble elements in
should be subtracted from the after-cleaning samples. The use.
residual contamination from the first control test should be
subtracted from the before-cleaning samples. Decontamination Further details about this information are provided in the
effectiveness can be determined by calculating the proportion report for the U.S. Fire Administration (USFA), “Research,
of contaminant removed using the following equation: Testing, and Analysis on the Decontamination of Fire Fighting
Protective Clothing and Equipment.” A synopsis of the USFA
report is provided in ASTM STP1237, Performance of Protective
[A.7.3.7.4]
Y
Clothing.
Percent
L
Initial level of C − Final level of C Overall Considerations for Contamination Testing. While testing
decontamination = × 100
efficiency Initial level of C for determining contamination in exposed or cleaned protec‐
N
tive elements can be useful, it must be carefully performed by
where: qualified laboratories with the results interpreted by knowl‐
edgeable individuals to provide an accurate assessment of
C = contaminant
The decontamination effectiveness will vary with each
O
cleaning effectiveness and any hazards associated with the
reuse of protective clothing. This testing is generally expensive,
contaminant because some contaminants can be removed
more easily than others, given differences in the properties of
the contaminant and the properties of the contaminated
element materials. For example, chemicals such as hexane and
S E
is destructive of the element being tested, and takes some to
have performed. Any decision to perform testing on contami‐
nated clothing should weigh the costs for replacing the cloth‐
ing versus the cost of testing and destruction of clothing items
benzene that evaporate easily will usually be removed easily
compared with nonvolatile (nonevaporating) chemicals found
in tars and oily chemicals.
Interpretation of Test Results. The remaining level of contami‐
U
through testing.
N A.7.3.8 Universal precautions, normally applied for handling
L
items potentially exposed to blood-borne pathogens, involve
A
the assumption that all contamination is potentially harmful
nant in a protective ensembles or ensemble element can be and that individuals handling the items need to wear appropri‐
used to determine the potential risk to the wearer. However,
U
ate PPE and apply appropriate hygiene to avoid accidental
there are no established safe levels of residual concentration contact with contaminated ensembles or ensemble elements.
levels for most contaminants. The decision to reuse a protective
D
Recommended PPE includes examination gloves, an apron and
I
element based on known, measured levels of contamination protective sleeves or coveralls, and a pair of safety glasses or
should be undertaken by a trained professional familiar with goggles.
the properties and hazards of the contaminant. Any uncer‐
I V
tainty of the risk presented by residual contamination or of
acceptable levels for continued use can be a cause for retire‐
A.7.3.9(1) Proper load size is essential for effective cleaning.
An overloaded washer prevents the wetted load from dropping
ment and disposal of the protective item.
D during the washing process from an 11 o’clock to a 5 o’clock

drop in a clockwise wash rotation. Overloading occurs when
IN
The procedures for measuring contamination levels in this drop of the wash load does not happen. In addition, full
protective ensembles or ensemble elements are usually destruc‐ loads are best for washing as the agitation and cleaning are
tive in that they require that a specimen be taken from the item most efficient with full loads. Therefore, it is also important to
and subjected to extraction or digestion with a solvent. This avoid under-loading the washer/extractor.
O R
requirement, in addition to the expense of the analytical test‐
ing, can make the decision to investigate contamination levels
in protective ensembles or ensemble elements cost prohibitive.
The capacity of a washer/extractor is provided both in the
weight of the load, usually reported in pounds, and the overall
volume, usually reported in cubic feet, of the basket. As a rule
F Specimens of protective ensembles or ensemble elements

taken for determination of contamination levels cannot be
representative for all areas of the item being sampled. For
example, a specimen taken from the pocket of a coat will not
reflect the contamination level for the back of the coat or the
of thumb, one cubic foot of washer/extractor basket allows a
capacity of two garment shells or liners. For example, a 30
pound washer/extractor has a basket volume of 4.1 cubic feet.
Thus, a washer/extractor with this capacity would fit four
pieces. Similarly, a 60 pound washer/extractor with a 9.0 cubic
bottom of trousers. In addition, sampling of one protective foot basket would fit nine pieces. Where there is a fractional
ensemble or ensemble element will not be representative of all amount of cubic feet in the washer/extractor capability, it is
ensembles or ensemble elements from a certain group that are recommended to round up to get a whole number of garment
or are suspected of being contaminated. Contamination levels pieces.
for different protective ensembles or ensemble elements of the
same type depend on the type of exposure, the condition of A.7.3.9(2) It is recommended that heavily soiled structural
the protective element, and the care provided to the item. fire-fighting garments be soaked according to the detergent
manufacturer’s instructions. The garment should be removed
Concerns over protective ensemble or ensemble element and the soak water should be drained. If necessary, a soft bristle
contamination can arise from a single incident involving a brush should be used to gently scrub those portions of the
contamination event or can be an ongoing consideration as garment outer shell that have the greatest soiling. Alternatively,
contaminants from routine situations accumulate in the ensem‐
specific formulations for washer/extractors can include As a consequence of these findings, various organizations
presoak steps at the beginning of the wash cycle. recommend the use of hot water at 60°C (140°F) as well as
other laundering procedures for the optimum removal of pesti‐
Proximity garment outer shells should not be soaked, scrub‐ cides from work clothing.
bed, or brushed. Use a soft cloth or sponge when cleaning
proximity garments. Similarly, a number of studies have addressed the efficacy of
increased water temperatures in killing bacteria and other
A.7.3.9(4) At the time this edition was prepared, the technical microorganism contaminants in hospital laundry. As a conse‐
committee recognized that, depending on the contaminant, quence of this research, the Centers for Disease Control (CDC)
the wash temperature maximum of 40°C (105°F) might not be and the Healthcare Infection Control Practices Advisory
the most effective temperature for cleaning those ensemble Committee (HICPAC) have recommended the use of specific
elements that can be subjected to higher wash temperatures in laundering practices that include even higher temperatures at
washer/extractors. However, even with this recognition, the 71°C (160°F) in combination with bleach. (Note: This practice
technical committee was reluctant to increase the maximum
Y
is not appropriate for fire fighter protective ensembles and
wash temperature for advanced cleaning because it will occur ensemble elements).
L
more frequently than specialized cleaning or disinfection or
sanitization and, to date, only limited testing has been done on Clearly, high wash temperatures provide greater effectiveness
N
the effects of multiple washings at 60°C (140°F) on garment in addressing many forms of contamination, but the use of
ensembles and ensemble elements. Based on this work, there is higher temperatures must be weighed against its potential
a tradeoff between increasing the wash temperature for purpo‐ effects on the performance properties and continued service
ses of contaminant removal and the impact of the increased
wash temperature for adversely affecting the performance
life of ensemble and ensemble elements.
O
Impact of Higher Wash Temperatures on Ensemble Element Materi‐
properties of ensemble elements.
Effects of Increasing Wash Temperature for Removal of Contami‐
nants. Fire fighter protective ensembles and ensemble elements E
als and Components. To investigate the potential of applying
S
higher wash temperatures, the technical committee conducted
several laundering trials on unused materials, components, and
U
might be contaminated with soot and chemicals such as poly‐ full clothing both at 105°F (40°C) and at 140°F (60°C) to
nuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs), phenols, phthalates, compare the overall impact of multiple launderings (60 cycles)
hydrocarbons, heavy metals, and other hazardous materials at these temperatures. Multiple samples at several different
during fire responses, various chemical compounds from
hazmat responses, and microorganisms during medical respon‐
ses or biohazard responses. Appropriate removal of these
A L
facilities were subjected to conventional laundering procedures
using both wash temperatures, with comprehensive inspections
and assessment of certain performance properties after 20, 40,
U
contaminants is necessary both for protecting the health of the and 60 cycles of laundering. The preliminary findings of this
fire fighter and for ensuring that the gear performance is not work shows that components can be adversely affected by
D
compromised. To assess appropriate turnout cleaning parame‐ increased wash temperature and the increased cycles of laun‐
ters, specifically wash temperature, it is useful to consider the
cleaning recommendations for garments used in agricultural
and health care applications because such applications involve
V I dering. Higher wash temperatures and multiple launderings

created loss of certain performance properties for the actual
material layers, and particular durability concerns were noted.
hazardous materials to which ensembles and ensemble
I
elements might also be exposed: pesticides and infectious
agents.
D
At the time this work was conducted, it was not possible to fully
conclude that safety issues would arise for protection of fire
fighters; however, garment elements laundered multiple times
and at the higher wash temperature would clearly require more
IN
Extensive research has been performed to examine the frequent repair and replacement of components.
effectiveness of different laundering procedures in removing
pesticides. This information is relevant to fire fighter ensem‐ Specific Considerations for Frequent Advanced Cleaning, Sanitiza‐
bles and ensemble elements because pesticide chemicals have a tion, and Specialized Cleaning. Organizations are cautioned to be
O R
range of properties that are similar to fireground chemicals in
terms of low volatility and often low water solubility. Research
from several sources has shown that higher wash temperatures
of up to 60°C (140°F) have greater efficacy at removing pesti‐
aware of the tradeoffs that exist for increased laundering at
higher wash temperatures. Higher wash temperatures are likely
to be more effective in removing many contaminants but will
also likely reduce the service life of or increase the number of
F
cide contamination, as reported in the following references:
(1) Thostenson, A., et al. “Laundering Pesticide-
contaminated Work Clothes (PS1778).” North Dakota
State University Extension Service, January 2016.
repairs to garment elements and other ensemble elements.
Increased cleaning creates additional wear and tear on
garments, but, if handled properly and coupled with frequent
inspections, ensemble element service can be optimized for
both effective cleaning and retention of performance proper‐
www.ag.ndsu.edu/publications/crops/laundering-
pesticide-contaminated-work-clothes/ps1778.pdf. ties.
•
(2) Laughlin, J. “Decontaminating Pesticide Protective Cloth‐ A.7.3.9(5) A formulation is a set of instructions or a program
ing. Reviews of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology for how the washer/extractor injects specific wash chemicals,
130 (1993): 79–94. Springer, New York, NY. https:// controls the water temperature and water level, and sets the
doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4613-9763-2_3. specific times for each step. Different formulations should be
(3) Easley, C. B., J. Laughlin, and R. Gold. “Laundering Pesti‐ used for outer shells versus liners given differences in soiling
cide Contaminated Clothing.” Cornell University Cooper‐ and contamination levels, as well as the types of materials and
ative Extension, Pesticide Safety Education Program components involved in their construction. Suggested formula‐
(PSEP). psep.cce.cornell.edu/facts-slides-self/facts/gen- tions are provided for garment outer shells in Table A.7.3.9(5)
posaf-laund.aspx. (a), while suggested formulations for garment liners and hoods
is provided in Table A.7.3.9(5)(b). In each of these formula‐
ANNEX A 1851-89
tions, load the washer/extractor to 3∕4 of the sight glass in the N A.7.3.10 Deciding how to dry ensembles and ensemble
front of the machine. elements after cleaning should be done with the following
factors in mind:
An appropriate detergent should be dispensed once the
drum is filled with water during the suds/detergent step. (1) Time constraints
Consideration should be given to the levels of soiling and (2) Effect of the drying method on the ensembles and
contaminants (light, medium, or heavy) in ensemble and ensemble elements
ensemble elements for selecting the amount of detergent. Drying is what takes up the majority of time to get ensembles
Organizations should avoid using too much detergent. It is and ensemble elements back in service. Nevertheless, the
imperative that organizations check with the detergent supplier recommended and preferred method of drying is air or forced
to ensure that the correct amounts of detergent are used ventilation or drying in a drying cabinet as opposed to
according to the specific instructions for laundering fire- machine-drying by tumbling action. In some cases, it might be
fighting protective garments. If automatic detergent dispensers appropriate for machine-drying by tumble action of a garment
Y
are used, it is important to perform regular maintenance to liner while the garment outer shell is air dried or dried in a
ensure proper function and dispensing of the recommended drying cabinet.
•
amounts.
N A.7.3.10.1(1) Air drying is the most appropriate method for
N
drying ensembles and ensemble elements. It causes no
mechanical damage and little or no shrinkage. The most effi‐
L
N Table A.7.3.9(5)(a) Suggested Formulation for Garment Outer
Shells
O
cient method of air drying involves forced air ventilation. This
method can be achieved by simply using fans to recirculate air
in the room with the ensembles and ensemble elements. The
Operation
Time
(min) Temperature Water Level E
basic drying room should include floor drains, a method to
exchange the air to the outside environment, and drying racks
S
for hanging ensembles and ensemble elements to provide
maximum air exposure. Overall drying time will depend on the
Prewash fill, flush
Agitate
Drain
Fill
—
3
—
—
≤40°C (≤105°F)
—
—
≤40°C (≤105°F)
High
—
—
Low–Med
L U
efficiency of the drying room and the ambient conditions.
Heating the room or the inlet air up to 38°C (100°F) can
further improve the efficiency of the drying process. Drying
ensembles and ensemble elements in ambient air, as opposed
Wash, add suds/
detergent
Agitate
Drain
—
12–15
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
U A to drying rooms, takes a considerable length of time, depend‐
ing on the ambient environmental conditions.
N A.7.3.10.1(1)(a) The use of racks to provide maximum air
Rinse, fill/agitate
Drain
5
—
Cold
—
I D High
—
exposure of the ensembles and ensemble elements will
decrease the overall drying time.
Rinse, fill/agitate
Drain
Rinse, fill/agitate
5
—
5
I
Cold
—
Cold V High
—
High
N A.7.3.10.1(1)(b) Exposure to direct and indirect sunlight will
cause degradation of fibers in protective garments, resulting in
loss of fabric strength. Similar effects have been observed for
Drain
Extract at 100 G
—
6
D —
—
—
—
extended exposures to fluorescent or ultraviolet (UV) light.
IN
N A.7.3.10.1(2) A suitable alternative to air drying involves the
use of a drying cabinet. Drying cabinets, available from differ‐
N Table A.7.3.9(5)(b) Suggested Washer/Extractor Formulation ent machine manufacturers, are contained cabinets where
for Garment Sanitization garments, gloves, and footwear can be suspended with the
O R
Operation
Time
(min) Temperature Water level
introduction of heated air over a specified period of time. This
type of drying approach enables greater control of the air
temperatures and, if properly used, can result in improved effi‐
ciency of garment drying and lower utility costs.
F Prewash fill, flush

Agitate
Drain
Fill
Wash, add
—
3
—
—
—
≤40°C (≤105°F)
—
—
≤40°C (≤105°F)
—
High
—
—
Low–Med
—
N A.7.3.10.2 Machine drying of ensembles and ensemble
elements is generally not recommended. Dryers can reach high
basket temperatures during operation, potentially damaging
ensembles or ensemble elements. Machine drying also includes
mechanical action that can cause damage. Nevertheless, a
detergent
tumble dryer with a moisture-sensing feature can dry a satura‐
Agitate 9–12 — —
ted load with higher than 40°C (105°F) heat; when it reaches a
Drain — — — percent dryness level, the heat can then be reduced or stop‐
Rinse, fill/agitate 5 Cold High ped.
Drain — — —
Rinse, fill/agitate 5 Cold High N A.7.3.10.2(3) “No heat” is the preferred method of machine
Drain — — — drying because it effectively accomplishes forced air ventilation.
Rinse, fill/agitate 5 Cold High N A.7.3.10.2(4) Excessive temperatures can cause damage to
Drain — — — ensembles and ensemble elements, excessive garment shrink‐
Extract at 100 G 5 — — age, and potentially premature failure and retirement of
Note: Wash formulations assume a full load for the washer size.
protective equipment. Temperatures can rise as the garments N A.7.3.13.2(2) See A.7.3.7.2 for a discussion on the limits for
in the basket dry out. selecting detergents based on their range in pH.
N A.7.3.10.2(5) Removal of garments before they are completely N A.7.3.13.2(4) If gloves are heavily soiled, the gloves should be
dry prevents exposure to excessive heat and reduces the poten‐ submerged in a way where the dirty wash water does not
tial for premature retirement of ensembles and ensemble contaminate the interior of the gloves. This can be accom‐
elements. Ensembles and ensemble elements should be air plished by wearing the glove while it is being washed. If the
dried to complete the drying process. Mechanical dryers can be exterior only is submerged, the interior of the gloves should be
used on a “no heat” setting. separately washed with clean water and detergent followed by
rinsing.
N A.7.3.10.2(6) Ensembles and ensemble elements should be
completely dry before reuse to avoid the potential for steam N A.7.3.13.2(7) Gloves are most effectively dried when they are
burns caused by moisture remaining in the layers of the ensem‐ placed on a rack or otherwise hung to allow water to drain
ble or ensemble element under some exposure conditions. from the interior. Gloves might also be placed in a drying cabi‐
N A.7.3.11.2 Ensembles and ensemble elements should be
cleaned only with like items, including, but not limited to,
outer shells with outer shells, liners with liners, hoods with
net. Forced air dryers are also available for gloves where the
glove is mounted on a plastic pipe that blows air into the glove
interior.
L Y
hoods, gloves with gloves, and footwear with footwear. In
general, accessory items should only be cleaned with accessory
items [e.g., life safety harnesses should be removed (whenever
possible) from coats and/or pants prior to cleaning, and
O N
A.7.3.14.1 Unless specifically approved by the manufacturer,
footwear should not be machine washed. Damage to both the
footwear and the machine can result. Alternative commercial
machine technologies as well as specific procedures for differ‐
E
cleaned separately]. An exception is that drag rescue devices ent footwear materials and construction are available but
(DRDs), when properly contained in mesh bags, can be appro‐ should be used only after consultation with and approval from
S
priately cleaned with garment outer shells. It is highly recom‐ the footwear manufacturer.
mended that garment liner systems be removed and cleaned •
N A.7.3.14.2(2) See A.7.3.7.2 for a discussion on the limits for
U
separately, if possible, to avoid contamination with the debris
found in the shell. Because the moisture barrier will limit the selecting detergents based on their range in pH.
flow of water through the outer shell fabric, removing the liner
L
N A.7.3.14.2(3) Where the use of a soft bristle brush is difficult
will result in better cleaning. Separating the liner from the for cleaning the full interior of the footwear, it is recommen‐
A
outer shell will also reduce drying time. The liner should also ded that the footwear be filled with a mixture of water and
be turned inside out to help protect the moisture barrier layer detergent and allowed to stand for at least 15 minutes before
U
during both laundering and drying. [See A.7.3.9(5).] the mixture is poured out of the footwear and followed by rins‐
N A.7.3.12.1 The manufacturer’s instructions for the specific ing.
helmet should be consulted to determine if there are other
detachable components such as the impact cap, suspension,
I D N A.7.3.14.2(6) The interior of footwear can be particularly diffi‐
cult to dry. Turning the boot upside down can allow the boot to
V
faceshield, or other items that are best removed from the drain easily and dry more quickly. However, given the volume
helmet shell and cleaned separate.
D I
N A.7.3.12.2 Detachable items can include helmet covers, liners,
suspension sweat bands or covers, ear covers, certain types of
faceshield/goggle components, identification shields, and vari‐
of water that can come out of footwear, pooling of water from
the drainage can create a slip hazard in the drying area. An
alternative approach to drying footwear is to use plastic tubes
or similar equipment for blowing air into the footwear interior.
IN
ous accessories. N A.7.4.2 Applicable regulations in 29 CFR 1910.1030, “Blood‐
N A.7.3.12.4 Advanced cleaning includes washing both the borne Pathogens,” include observing universal precautions,
instituting engineering and workplace controls, using appropri‐
R
inside and outside surfaces of the helmet carefully, using a soft
brush to reach between components and into difficult-to-access ate PPE for personnel involved in the disinfection or sanitiza‐
spaces, and separately washing the eye/face protection with a tion and biological decontamination of PPE, and ensuring that
F O
soft cloth. Proximity items should not be brushed. Only a soft
cloth or sponge should be used to wash proximity items that
utilize aluminized fabric. It is usually not necessary to
completely submerge a helmet for cleaning unless it is being
inspected for damage or repairs are being performed in
the decontamination area is in a clean and sanitary condition.
Universal precautions are applied to prevent contact with
blood or other potentially infectious materials where all body
fluids are considered potentially infectious materials. Engineer‐
ing and workplace controls include the provision of hand-
conjunction with the cleaning. washing facilities and the prohibition of food and beverages in
areas where handling of contaminated PPE and decontamina‐
N A.7.3.12.4(2) See A.7.3.7.2 for a discussion on the limits for tion occur. They also include bagging and appropriately identi‐
selecting detergents based on their range in pH. fying body fluid–contaminated clothing using either a
biohazard symbol or red bag to indicate potentially infectious
Δ A.7.3.13.1 The thermal protective capability of leather gloves materials. PPE includes the use of gloves, aprons, full torso
is seriously degraded when gloves are washed in any machine coveralls or smocks, arm covers, and eye/face protection. At a
that develops excessive g-forces to extract water from the mate‐ minimum, persons involved in cleaning contaminated ensem‐
rials. Studies indicate that the outer leather shell material bles and ensemble elements should wear cleaning gloves, an
becomes compressed and does not fully recover once dry. This apron and protectives sleeves or a coverall, and a pair of
loss of thickness directly relates to a loss of thermal protection goggles or a faceshield that conforms to NFPA 1999. In addi‐
as well as a loss of dexterity, both important factors of fire tion, cleaning of contaminated ensembles and ensemble
fighter PPE safety. elements should take place in a designated area with sinks and
ANNEX A 1851-91
counters made of materials, such as stainless steel, that can be factors that were used to demonstrate the effectiveness of the
adequately decontaminated following an element-cleaning product as a disinfectant or sanitizer. Use of too little product
procedure. or under the wrong conditions might cause the product to be
ineffective in achieving sanitization or disinfection. Unless
NFPA 1581 should be consulted for additional guidance. specifically indicated as a laundry additive, many disinfectants
N A.7.4.3 The contamination of protective ensembles or ensem‐ and sanitizers are not to be used as part of the wash chemicals.
ble elements with body fluids or other potentially infectious In some cases, certain laundering procedures or supplemen‐
materials, such as contaminated flood water, requires specific tal additives such as ozone could be effective in providing sani‐
procedures for eliminating the health threats associated with tization of clothing. If used with garments, the textile
microbial contamination. At a minimum, protective ensembles components of helmets, or hoods, however, these procedures/
and ensemble elements should be subject to sanitization, where additives must be qualified as effective by meeting the require‐
the levels of microbial contamination are reduced to accepta‐ ments in 11.3.7.5 where specific testing is conducted to demon‐
ble levels, or disinfection, where all viable microbial contamina‐
Y
strate sanitization efficacy.
tion has been eliminated. In general, sanitization is most often
L
applied to porous surface such as the fabrics and textiles associ‐ Since disinfection and sanitization only affects microbial
ated with garments, helmets textile components, gloves, foot‐ contamination, it must be followed up with advanced cleaning
N
wear, and hoods, whereas disinfection is applied to hard to remove any soils associated with the body fluid or other
surfaces such as helmet shells. infectious material.
In many cases, disinfection or sanitization is initially applied
to the ensemble or ensemble element to inactivate the micro‐
bial contamination and is then followed up by advanced clean‐ O
N A.7.4.3.2 A listing of currently registered disinfectants and
sanitizers can be found at https://www.epa.gov/pesticide-
registration/selected-epa-registered-disinfectants.
ing to further remove the soils associated with the
contamination (e.g., blood and body fluid solid residue). Any
sanitizer or disinfectant that is used on the ensemble or ensem‐ E
N A.7.4.3.3 The same approach described in A.7.3.7.3 can be
S
used to assess the impact of the respective disinfection or sani‐
tization agents or process on ensembles or ensemble elements.
U
ble element should be registered with the EPA, which has
approval processes for different types of sanitizers and disinfec‐ N A.7.4.3.5 The determination of effectiveness for a specific
tants. The EPA has established guidelines for demonstrating
L
sanitizer or disinfectant can be accomplished by using products
the efficacy of both disinfectants and sanitizers. These proce‐ that are registered with the EPA as a sanitizer or disinfectant
A
dures are established in the following publications: appropriate for the type and materials of the ensemble or
(1) OCSPP 810.2200, “Disinfectants for Use on Environmen‐ ensemble element and using the sanitizer or disinfectant as
(2)
tal Surfaces — Guide for Efficacy Testing”
OCSPP 810.2300, “Sanitizers for Use on Hard Surfaces —
U specifically directed by the product labeling and directions.
Procedures are also provided in Chapter 12 for assessing the
ID
Efficacy Data Recommendations” effectiveness of sanitizers on textile-based fabrics.
(3) OCSPP 810.2400, “Disinfectants and Sanitizers for Use on
Fabrics and Textiles — Efficacy Data Recommendations”
N A.7.4.3.6 The application of spot sanitization and cleaning
I V
A listing of currently registered disinfectants and sanitizers
can be found at https://www.epa.gov/pesticide-registration/
requires judgment since not all blood and body fluid contami‐
nation is clearly visible. This judgment should take into
account how the exposure occurred so that a determination
selected-epa-registered-disinfectants.
D can be made whether spot sanitization and cleaning will fully

remove the contamination. It is important to point out that
IN
However, in order to identify an appropriate sanitizer or some forms of biological contamination such as methicillin-
disinfectant on the EPA’s directory, the EPA registration resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA) or other population and
number, manufacturer name, or product name is needed. health care infections are not likely to be visible.
Many disinfectant and sanitizer products are rebranded and
O R
have a distributor number that appears after the primary
manufacturer registration number. This listing also identifies
specific disinfectants or sanitizers for effectiveness against
specific types of infectious diseases. A recommended starting
N A.7.4.4.1 Sanitization represents inactivation of microorgan‐
isms to a safe level. For textile-based products, sanitization is
generally considered achievable, whereas disinfection involving
the inactivation of all microorganisms might not be possible.
F point is “List H. EPA’s Registered Products Effective Against

Methicillin Resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA) and Vanco‐
mycin Resistant Enterococcus faecalis or faecium (VRE).” Not all
recommended listed disinfectants or sanitizers are suitable for
protective ensembles or ensemble elements. Examine the
Three different approaches can be used for the sanitization
of garments: use of a soak tank, use of a washer-extractor, or
use of ozone in an advanced cleaning process.
Use of Soak Tank. A tank or other vessel that is large enough
product’s safety data sheet (SDS) for chemicals that might be to hold the number of sets of garments can be used for sanitiza‐
harmful to the protective ensemble or ensemble element, tion. In this approach, the vessel is filled with water and an
particularly those with container pH outside the prescribed EPA-registered sanitizer is added at the concentration specified
acceptable range of 6 to 10.5 specified in 7.3.7.2, or check with by the supplier. The entire garment is placed in the sanitizer/
a verified ISP or the manufacturer of the ensemble or ensem‐ water solution with all portions of the garment immersed. The
ble element for further advice. See 7.4.3.2 for additional infor‐ garment is left in the tank or vessel for a period of time indica‐
mation. ted by the sanitizer instructions, but typically periods of time
ranging from 1 hour or more can be used. Extended soak
Where these product types are used, it is essential that times in excess of the sanitizer instructions are recommended
instructions provided by the supplier be followed since the effi‐ since garments include multiple layers, pockets, and other
cacy of their disinfection or sanitization is based on specific features the sanitizer solution might not easily reach. Longer
ratios of agent to water, residence time, and other application
soak times should also be used when clothing is heavily conta‐ sanitization of the garments or if a laundry additive–based sani‐
minated. Following the end of the soak period, the garment tizer is used as part of the advanced cleaning process. Regard‐
should be subjected to advanced cleaning as described in less, practices for sanitization of garments should include
A.7.3.9(5). minimum handling to avoid cross contamination.
Use of a Washer/Extractor. Another recommended procedure N A.7.4.5.1 Examples of helmet components include ear covers,
for sanitization of protective garments involves using an EPA- suspension covers, and goggles. Helmet textile components
registered sanitizer as part of the cleaning formulation. In this can be sanitized using similar procedures as applied to
approach, an EPA-register sanitizer or other product that has garments. See A.7.4.4.1 for more information.
been demonstrated to be effective in sanitizing garments is
used as a laundry additive. The garments are placed in an N A.7.4.5.3 See A.7.4.3 for the selection of an appropriate disin‐
extractor with a special programmed formulation into which fectant for the hard surfaces of a helmet. It is important to
the sanitizer is added. The specific steps for this formulation select a disinfectant that does not contain constituents that
could damage the helmet surfaces.
Y
are shown in Table A.7.4.4.1.
N A.7.4.6.1 If gloves have been exposed to blood and potentially
L
One of the steps allows for the injection of the sanitizer at a
concentration recommended on the sanitizer product label, infectious materials, gloves can be set in a soak tank that uses
sanitizer at the supplier’s recommended dilution for the suppli‐
N
which is typically 1 ounce per gallon of water added. This step
should subject the garment to the sanitizer for at least er’s recommended contact time. Following this step, it is
10 minutes, followed by extraction (drain and spin) and a rinse important that gloves be thoroughly rinsed and then subjected
cycle at moderate temperature. Following this procedure, the
garments should be subjected to normal advanced cleaning as
to advanced cleaning.
O
While potentially suitable for exterior-based contamination,
recommended in A.7.3.9(5).
Use of Ozone in an Advanced Cleaning Process. The use of ozone
injected into washing machines for the sanitization of linens
S E
the use of spray-applied sanitizers or disinfectants should be
viewed with caution because their effectiveness will be affected
by the ability of the solution to fully penetrate all biologically
contaminated areas of the gloves.
U
has been demonstrated as effective in reducing microbial
contamination. Special ozone-generating equipment is availa‐ Consideration should be given for the disposal of gloves that
ble that can be installed for adding appropriate amounts of
L
have been extensively contaminated by blood, body fluids, or
ozone to the wash water in washer/extractors at specific steps other potentially infectious materials, especially when the
A
in the cleaning process. The specific steps where ozone is contamination extends to the interior of the gloves.
added, the amount of ozone, and the overall configuration of
At the time this standard was prepared, there were no clean‐
U
the equipment to provide this capability depend on the ozone-
generating equipment, the washer/extractors involved, and the ing verification procedures that had been prepared specifically
for gloves.
ID
specific procedures in place at the facility where sanitization
operations are carried out. Where these processes are used, the
specific system should be verified for biological decontamina‐
N A.7.4.7.1 A similar approach to the sanitization procedure for
gloves described in A.7.4.6.1 can be applied to footwear. If the
tion effectiveness as specified in 11.3.7.4.
I V
Other approaches for sanitization of garments can be
biological contamination is expected to have only affected the
exterior layer or surface of the footwear, the footwear can be
D
performed that involve novel sanitizers or processes; however, placed in the soak tank such that only the exterior contacts the
before these approaches are used, biological decontamination sanitizer solution by placing weights in the boot and control‐
IN
effectiveness as specified in 11.3.7.4 should be demonstrated ling the soak solution to a level just below the top line of the
since there can be substantial differences between processes footwear. As with gloves, following the sanitization of footwear
used for ordinary linens and garments as compared to fire in the soak tank, the footwear should be thoroughly rinsed and
fighter protective clothing. then subjected to advanced cleaning.
R
N A.7.4.4.3 It is not recommended that garment shells and
O
liners be separated prior to sanitization in order to minimize
the handling of the contaminated garment. Instead, the entire
At the time this standard was prepared, there were no clean‐
ing verification procedures that had been prepared specifically
for footwear.
F
garment should be subject to the sanitization process first to
address the microbial contamination and then separated for
advanced cleaning. An exception to this approach would occur
if the organization is relying on advanced cleaning to provide
N A.7.4.8.1 Hoods can be sanitized using similar procedures as
those applied to garments. See A.7.4.4.1 for more information.
N A.7.5.2 Specialized cleaning is reserved for those forms of
contamination that cannot be removed by advanced cleaning
and for clothing contaminated with soils associated with body
N Table A.7.4.4.1 Suggested Washer/Extractor Procedures for fluids or other infectious materials. (See Section 7.4 and associated
Garment Sanitization annex material.) Since there are a myriad of different potential
contaminants, organizations should consider using specialized
Step Action cleaning where there are concerns for highly dangerous or
unusual forms of contamination. Examples of situations where
1 Fill to a maximum of 35°C (95°F) on low specialized cleaning can be applied include, but are not limited
2 Inject disinfectant to, the following:
3 Wash/soak for 10 minutes*
(1) Bulk chemicals (e.g., varnish, household cleaning
4 Drain for 1 minute
supplies, other liquids or solids that could be encoun‐
5 Extract on low for 4 minutes
tered in their ordinary form via ruptured or broken
*Perform advanced cleaning after disinfecting soak.
ANNEX A 1851-93
containers on the fireground) found at the fire scene that (1) Interagency Board for Equipment Standardization and
either come directly in contact with ensembles or ensem‐ Interoperability (interagencyboard.org/content/first-
ble elements or are exposed to ensembles or ensemble responder-ppe-and-decontamination-recommendations-
elements due to their decomposition in a fire fentanyl-august-2017)
(2) The identification of asbestos or other hazardous particu‐ (2) Center for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC)
lates that are either known before or after the fire event (www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/fentanyl/risk.html)
(3) The provision of emergency medical care to individuals (3) CDC’s 2018 interim report, “Evaluation of Potential
or at facilities where known elevated levels of hazardous Occupational Exposures to Opioid Drugs During an
particulates, such as fentanyl or other opioid drug resi‐ Emergency Medical Services Response”
dues, are present
(4) Response environments where textile products are conta‐ Bed Bugs. Bed bugs are a frequent type of contamination for
minated with bedbugs or other infectious organisms protective ensembles and ensemble elements, generally result‐
ing from exposure to areas or items infested with bed bugs.
Y
N A.7.5.3 Where certain types of contaminants are frequently Conventional laundry procedures are ineffective in removing
encountered that warrant specialized cleaning, organizations bed bugs. More importantly, conventional laundry processes
should determine their capabilities and limitations with respect
to cleaning both soiled and contaminated ensembles and
ensemble elements that have been contaminated with specific
substances outside of their normal capabilities for applying
are insufficient to kill any eggs that might have been laid in the
clothing item, which can cause the further spread of bed bugs.
N
Two different approaches based on temperature extremes can
be used to decontaminate ensembles and ensemble elements
L
advanced cleaning. While it is possible that some forms of
advanced cleaning might effectively remove these substances,
the organization should obtain independent information indi‐ O
exposed to bed bugs. Using a wash temperature of 60°C
(140°F) and a drying temperature above 40°C (105°F) for a
minimum of 30 minutes has been determined to be effective in
cating the efficacy of any applied specialized cleaning proce‐
dures.
The following are examples of specialized cleaning for three
S E
killing bed bug adults, nymphs, and eggs. Drying could be
accomplished with a drying cabinet as long as the requisite
temperature can be maintained over the minimum 30-minute
period. If the clothing is wet, longer periods of drying might be
specific forms of contamination: asbestos, fentanyl and other
synthetic opioid drugs, and bed bugs.
Asbestos. Given its established link to mesothelioma asbesto‐
U
necessary to ensure that the clothing reaches the temperature
of 40°C (105°F) for an extended period of time. Alternatively,
L
extremely cold temperatures of −21°C (−5°F) or below for at
least 8 hours can be used for killing bed bug adults, nymphs,
A
sis, clothing known to be contaminated with asbestos fibers
presents an elevated risk, and complete decontamination and their eggs, although longer freezing times are recommen‐
ded because the mass of clothing can take a relatively long time
U
might not be possible. While the application of additional
presoaking and rinse cycles in conjunction with advanced to reach the appropriate temperature. Documentation for the
effectiveness of these test conditions is provided in Naylor and
D
cleaning might remove the large majority of respirable asbestos
I
fibers, some uncertainty still exists for the condition of the Boase, “Practical solutions for treating laundry infested with
clothing following cleaning. In general, it is recommended that Cimex lectularius (Hemiptera: Cimicidae).”
organizations work with ISPs capable of removing asbestos
I V
contamination if cleaning has been determined to be a viable
option. It is further recommended that testing as described in
N A.7.5.4.4 It might not be possible for a specific cleaning
procedure to fully remove all contaminants. In some cases, test‐
D
ing of contaminated clothing might show residual levels of
A.7.5.3.3 be performed with any specialized cleaning of contamination still being present after cleaning. In these cases,
asbestos-contaminated protective ensembles or ensemble
IN
the organization should contact individuals with expertise on
elements. exposures and hazards associated with the specific contami‐
Fentanyl and Other Synthetic Opioid Drugs. Where ensemble or nants to determine if there are levels of residual contamination
ensemble element exposure to fentanyl and/or other synthetic that are acceptable for continued safe use of the ensemble or
O R
opioids has occurred, extreme care must be taken to ensure
that any powder residue is not aerosolized into the breathing
zone of the individual wearing the ensemble or ensemble
element. It is highly recommended that individuals involved in
ensemble element.
There are certain persistent contaminants found in clothing
regardless of whether the ensemble or ensemble element has
F the handling and cleaning of ensembles and ensemble

elements contaminated with synthetic opioid drugs wear at
least air-purifying respirators outfitted with P-100 particulate
filters, given the severe effects from respirations of these drugs
at very low concentrations. Highly absorbent wipes are recom‐
been exposed in a fire. For example, certain phthalates are
common contaminants in clothing as the result of contact with
plastics. These plasticizer chemicals are found through many
ordinary items worn or used by individuals. There are also
other ordinary environmental contaminants that can show up
on protective ensembles and ensemble elements.
mended for the removal of any exterior deposited powder
followed by rinsing with soap and water. Use of alcohol-based In addition, it is important than any testing determine base‐
wipes for removal of contamination from exposed skin is not line levels of certain chemicals or other substances that could
recommended because these types of products could increase be intrinsically part of the ensemble or ensemble element.
the absorption of the drug into the wearer’s skin. Detergents or Typically, certain heavy metals can be found in dyes and other
other cleaning agents with a pH near neutral (7.0) should be constituents of heavy metals and are not actually due to
used to wash products contaminated with these types of contamination on the fireground or with the use of the ensem‐
substances. Additional information related to the hazards and ble or ensemble elements.
exposure control of fentanyl and other synthetic opioid drugs
is available as follows: Regardless of any evidence gathered or testing performed to
assist in determining whether to apply specialized cleaning, it is
highly recommended that organizations maintain records of A.8.1.4 Although repairs can bring ensembles or ensemble
this information. elements back to a serviceable level of performance, repaired
ensembles or ensemble elements might not provide the same
N A.7.5.4.5 See 7.3.7.4 for more information. If ensembles or levels of protection and performance as new ensembles or
ensemble elements are exposed to specific hazardous contami‐ ensemble elements.
nants and advanced or specialized cleaning is performed for
the removal of this contamination, testing of selected cleaned A.8.2.4 Although some hardware can be replaced in the field,
ensembles or ensemble elements might provide a basis for it should be noted that field application might not be as perma‐
determining the effectiveness of the cleaning process and the nent or as strong as when the hardware is replaced at the
ability of the ensembles or ensemble elements to be reused. factory, by a verified organization, or by a verified ISP.
For example, the following nondestructive testing procedure A.8.4.1 For elements that are being repaired by a verified ISP,
conducted in a qualified laboratory can be used to determine the questions in this section should be asked to determine if
residual asbestos fibers in protective garments that have been the verified ISP is knowledgeable enough to ensure that the
identified as being exposed to asbestos, based on either on‐
scene monitoring or post‐incident findings:
(1) Seal each protective element in a separate plastic bag.
repaired elements are safe and serviceable. It is important that
the organization request information for the verified ISP so
that the organization can make an informed decision about
L Y
N
how their gear is being maintained and by whom. The follow‐
(2) Identify a NVLAP-accredited asbestos analysis laboratory ing questions should provide assistance in making that deci‐
and send the bagged elements to that laboratory using
O
sion, but they should not be considered to be all-inclusive, and
the laboratory’s chain of custody and sample provision the organization might have other questions they would like to
procedures. ask as well.
(3) At the selected laboratory, have each element separately
(4)
removed in a sterile room.
Have the entire exterior surface of each element
vacuumed using a specialized sampling pump that with‐ E
(1) Can the ensemble or ensemble element be repaired
(i.e., is the damage too severe), or does the age and/or
S
overall condition of the garment make a repair too
costly or prohibitive to safety?
U
draws air at a rate of 2 L/min through a transmission
electron microscopy (TEM) cassette (25 mm, (2) Does the verified ISP have a certificate it can provide for
0.45 micron, MCE filter); multiple cassettes might be review?
needed for each element, depending on its overall
surface area and the amount of lint and other surface
contaminants present.
A L
(3) The certificate and/or the certification organization’s
listing should be read carefully. What materials does the
listing identify that the verified ISP is verified to repair?
Some verifications are limited to outer shells and, there‐
U
(5) Following vacuuming, seal the element back in the bag.
(6) Analyze each cassette filter sample to identify and quan‐ fore, the verified ISP cannot repair moisture barriers.
Other verified ISPs elect to become verified to work only
D
tify asbestos fibers using TEM according to ASTM D5755,
I
Standard Test Method for Microvacuum Sampling and Indirect on specific moisture barrier fabrics, not all. It is impor‐
Analysis of Dust by Transmission Electron Microscopy for Asbes‐ tant to confirm that a verified ISP has been verified to
(7)
tos Structure Number Surface Loading.
I V
Have the laboratory provide a report for the specific iden‐
tification and quantification of asbestos fibers present on
work on the specific type of moisture barrier found in a
garment.
(4) Does the verified ISP have liability insurance for repair
D
each element sample. Results should be reported as struc‐
tures (fibers) per square centimeter of element surface
or replacement of lost or stolen ensembles or ensemble
elements?
IN
area. (5) Does the verified ISP have a quality assurance program?
If so, the verified ISP should make that program availa‐
It must be noted that the above procedures, while attempt‐ ble upon request.
ing to provide full sampling of the element and provide consis‐
R
(6) Does the verified ISP take appropriate steps to prevent
tency with industry practices for quantifying asbestos levels on cross-contamination between any and all items being
contaminated surfaces, might not fully capture all asbestos repaired?
O
even when careful sampling of the entire item is applied. In
addition, where one element or a small group of elements are
F
sampled and analyzed to represent an entire population of
elements, care must be exercised in assuming that the limited
sampling and analysis results apply to the entire set of affected
(7) Does the verified ISP have training to do the required
repair?
(8) Can the verified ISP supply documentation to confirm
the repair was completed?
(9) Does the verified ISP have current calibration data for
elements. Furthermore, while some background levels of asbes‐ the gauges used on the hydrostatic testing apparatus?
tos might occur naturally, there is no established acceptable (10) Does the verified ISP follow the guidelines of the mois‐
level of asbestos fibers for protective ensembles or ensemble ture barrier manufacturer for repair of moisture barri‐
elements. If clothing was initially shown to be contaminated ers?
with asbestos and subsequent testing reveals that asbestos has
not been found, some uncertainty still exists for potential
continued exposure to asbestos.
ANNEX A 1851-95
(11) At what point does it make the decision to replace a helmets should include only those items that are provided by
moisture barrier rather than repair it? Does age enter or recommended by the manufacturer. Because aftermarket
into that decision? accessories affect the weight and balance of the helmet, they
(12) If a moisture barrier has been repaired previously (e.g., should not be utilized unless they have the approval of the
patches on the fabric, re-seam-sealing small areas of the manufacturer. Pre-existing holes should never be enlarged to
seam), and additional punctures or taping issues are accommodate aftermarket accessories.
found, at what point does it stop repairing and make the
decision to replace the moisture barrier? Does age enter A.9.1 Proper storage of ensembles and ensemble elements
into that decision? extends their life, maintains their performance, and reduces
(13) Has the verified ISP attended seminars provided by potential health risks. Improper storage can result in damage
moisture barrier manufacturers for proper testing and to the ensemble or ensemble element and can compromise the
repair? fire fighter’s safety. Certain conditions can result in deteriora‐
(14) Does the verified ISP have documentation that it can tion of performance of the ensemble or element or create
Y
provide warranty repairs for the moisture barrier manu‐ potential health hazards.
facturer’s products? Most of the major moisture barrier
L
A.9.1.1 Ultraviolet (UV) light, especially from sunlight, is a
manufacturers provide warranties on their products, but known cause of protective ensemble degradation. Storage in
the ISP must be registered with the moisture barrier
N
both direct and indirect sunlight causes degradation of fibers
manufacturer in order to perform these repairs. in protective garments, resulting in fabric strength loss, and
(15) Does the verified ISP warranty its work, and if so, for
O
can cause accelerated aging of other equipment. In addition,
how long? other UV light sources, such as fluorescent light, can cause
(16) What is the normal turnaround time for repairs? similar degradation. Therefore, ensembles and ensemble
A.8.4.3 Due to the complexity and specialized equipment
needed to conduct moisture barrier repairs, it is mandated that
the garment be returned to the manufacturer or to a verified
ISP. The equipment needed to conduct these repairs is typically light sources.
S E
elements should be stored to minimize exposure to all sources
of UV light. LED light sources produce minimal amounts of
UV light, and therefore, could be a good alternative to other
not found in the field but in specialized repair facilities or

manufacturing facilities. Moisture barrier materials are found
in collars, collar closure systems, and other assemblies, includ‐
ing, but not limited to, storm flaps and sleeve wells.
U
A.9.1.2 Storage of wet or moist ensembles and ensemble
elements promotes the growth of mildew and bacteria, which
L
can lead to skin irritation, rashes, or more serious medical
A
conditions. Mildew and bacteria growth can also affect the
A.8.4.4 While some loss of quilting threads on thermal liners strength of some materials.
is the normal result of wear, excessively large areas where quilt
stitching is broken or missing can indicate the need to replace
the liner.
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U Δ A.9.1.4 Storage in extreme temperatures for extended periods
can accelerate deterioration of ensembles and ensemble
elements. A cold performance parameter of −32°C (−25°F) is
A.8.4.5 Organizations can acquire a replacement complete
V I
liner assembly (thermal barrier and moisture barrier) from the
used in NFPA 1971. Temperatures above 82°C (180°F) can
cause some adhesives to lose their integrity.
D I
original garment manufacturer and install that replacement
liner assembly in the original outer shell. The exception to this
is sewn-in liner assemblies. Liner assemblies that are sewn into
the outer shell should be replaced in accordance with 8.4.5.
A.9.1.6 Contaminated and soiled ensembles and ensemble
elements can present a health risk to individuals who come
into contact with them, and need to be segregated. The poten‐
tial for spread of contamination is particularly high when newly
IN
A.8.4.8 Stress areas are generally considered to be the corners contaminated or soiled ensembles and ensemble elements are
of pockets and flaps, the base of the fly, the top and bottom of transported inside the passenger compartments of vehicles or
the storm flap, and any place where the stitching begins or stored in living quarters. It is recognized that it is not always
ends.
O R
A.8.4.10 Depending on the method of construction, broken
zippers can be replaced in the field, providing they can be
possible to segregate contaminated or soiled elements. There‐
fore, airtight protective containers or bags should be used to
minimize cross contamination. Examples include disposable
polyethylene bags or sealable plastic cases, which are cleanable.
F replaced without causing a breach of any moisture barrier

material and without affecting the garment integrity.
A.8.4.11 Depending on the method of construction, hooks
and loops can be replaced in the field, providing they can be
If a plastic bag is used, it is recommended that the bag be clear
to ensure that the contents of the bag can be readily identi‐
fied.It is further suggested that plastic bags, if used, be at least
2 mils thick to resist punctures.
replaced without causing a breach to any moisture barrier If the protective ensemble or ensemble elements are wet, the
material and without affecting the garment integrity. protective ensemble or ensemble elements should be removed
as soon as possible following transport from the fire or other
A.8.4.12 Reinforcing materials are those fabrics, including, emergency scene since ensembles and ensemble elements that
but not limited to, suede leather and outer shell fabrics, that remain wet under closed conditions can result in the growth of
are used to reinforce specific areas of an element, for example, damaging mold or mildew. It is further important that protec‐
a knee or elbow on a garment. tive ensembles and ensemble elements be subjected to appro‐
A.8.5.2 The manufacturer’s literature supplied with the priate cleaning procedures (see Chapter 7) or stored under
helmet should be consulted for disassembly instructions. If the conditions where the ensembles or ensemble elements can dry
manufacturer’s instructions cannot be located, the manufac‐ following their transport. To prevent the spread of disease or
turer should be contacted for a new set of inspection and main‐ infections through cross contamination, soiled elements should
tenance instructions. Accessories to structural fire fighting not be cleaned with other items of clothing or laundry.
A.9.1.7 Storage in contact with hydraulic fluids, solvents, For every revision of this standard since the inclusion of the
hydrocarbons, hydrocarbon vapors, or other contaminants can 10-year protective element retirement requirement, the techni‐
cause material degradation, transfer toxins to individuals, and cal committee has conducted a detailed assessment of its
reduce self-extinguishing properties of ensembles and ensem‐ impact based on technical changes in NFPA 1971 and the avail‐
ble elements. ability of new technology for nondestructive evaluation of
continued protective element service.
Δ A.10.1.1 Retirement criteria should be based on a number of
factors, including, but not limited to, the following: For both the 2014 and 2019 revisions, the technical commit‐
(1) Overall condition of the item tee spent considerable time on the issue of mandatory retire‐
(2) Specific deterioration of materials or components beyond ment. In each case, the technical committee reaffirmed its
their economic repair position based on the following factors:
(3) Ability to adequately remove hazardous materials and (1) Since NFPA standards are revised every 5 years, 10 years
other contaminants represents two revision cycles that incorporate significant
(4)
(5)
Age of structural or proximity ensemble or ensemble
elements
Excessive soil buildup that could impact performance of
the ensemble or ensemble element
performance enhancements in ensembles and ensemble
elements to warrant retirement of personal protective
equipment (PPE) 10 years from the date of manufacture.
Significant changes in the technology used in fibers,
L Y
Physical damage from use, detrimental effects from
improper cleaning procedures, and fabric failure of an ensem‐
ble and ensemble elements that can make repairs impossible
are other factors that can affect when an item should be
N
fabrics, components, and overall designs of fire fighter
protective ensembles and ensemble elements along with
O
the test methods for their evaluation have advanced
considerably over this period of time. For example, many
E
materials that were used in protective garments to meet
retired. the 2007 edition of NFPA 1971 are no longer available.
Where ensembles and ensemble elements are worn,
damaged, or contaminated, organizations should determine if
it would be more appropriate for them to be repaired, decon‐
taminated, or replaced. One general guideline is if the cost of
U S
Some of these differences in clothing technology can
mean that fire fighters operating on the same fireground
wearing clothing certified to different editions of
NFPA 1971 can have protective ensembles and elements
L
the repair or decontamination is greater than 50 percent of the that provide different levels of protection. These differen‐
replacement cost of the ensemble or ensemble elements, ces increase with each new edition of NFPA 1971.
replacement should be considered. A typical guideline that can
be used involves the use of a matrix that takes into account the
current age of the gear and the cost of the repair versus the
replacement cost of the item. (See A.10.1.4.)
U A (2) In the absence of scientifically validated test methods that
would support modifying or eliminating the current
mandatory retirement of 10 years, the technical commit‐
tee reaffirmed the existing 10-year requirement for all
Experience suggests that ensembles and ensemble elements
that are approaching 10 years since the date of their manufac‐
I D PPE. Around the time the 2014 edition of this standard
was released, research was carried out and documented
in “A Post-use Evaluation of Turnout Gear Using
ture have a high likelihood of performance deficiencies in
I
multiple areas that can often be detected only by destructive
testing. Additionally, experience suggests that the reflective V NFPA 1971 Standard on Protective Ensembles for Struc‐
tural Fire Fighting and NFPA 1851 on Selection, Care and
Maintenance.” The research examined over
D
outer shell of proximity elements that are approaching 5 years
since the date of their manufacture have a high likelihood of
250 garments, including 108 garments that had been
retired, and found support for the 10-year retirement
IN
performance failures that can be detected only by destructive requirement on the basis of comprehensive inspections
testing. Such performance failures could compromise fire and testing of samples from gear for selected perform‐
fighter safety. ance properties. The technical committee remains aware
O R
It is important to understand that the actual service life of
ensembles and ensemble elements varies depending on the
amount of their use and the care they receive. Factors such as
the size of the department, area covered, types of exposures, (3)
of ongoing research efforts to investigate the service life
of fire fighter protective ensembles and ensemble
elements.
In the absence of a nondestructive test or evaluation
F
and aggressiveness of the individual fire fighter are all consider‐
ations in how long any ensemble element will last. It is possible
that a protective element could be exposed to circumstances
that totally destroy it the first time it is utilized. Since the
purpose of fire fighters’ protective elements is to protect the
method that can conclusively and reliably determine that
PPE remains compliant with the performance require‐
ments in place at the time of manufacture, the technical
committee continues to support the existing retirement
criteria. Nearly all performance properties either require
wearer, if the element has saved a life or prevented serious samples that must be cut from protective ensembles or
injury, even just once, it has done its job. In many cases, an ensemble elements or are destructive in the manner of
ensemble or ensemble element will need to be retired sooner testing. Through the date of the current revision, no
than 10 years (or 5 years for the proximity reflective outer shell single or combination of nondestructive test methods has
component). been identified that permits confidence in fully assessing
protective ensemble or ensemble element service life.
An additional consideration that can influence the decision (4) Increasing concern for fire fighter exposure to carcino‐
to repair or replace an ensemble or ensemble element centers gens and their retention in clothing, sometimes in spite
on the advances in technology that occur through each revi‐ of the frequent application of advanced cleaning, has
sion of NFPA 1971. These technological advances might be provided an additional reason for maintaining the exist‐
deemed important enough by an organization to influence its ing retirement criteria. Older ensembles and ensemble
criteria for replacement of ensembles or ensemble elements. elements tend to absorb and retain low volatility carcino‐
ANNEX A 1851-97
gens and other hazardous materials compared with new Table A.10.1.4 Sample Calculator for Turnout Gear Repair
protective ensembles and ensemble elements. As with Limits
performance testing, the technology for nondestructive
evaluations of contamination levels that can readily deter‐ Amount of
mine retention of persistent contaminants does not yet Year-of- Original Cost Amount
exist. Year of Service ($1000) Allowed Allowed
Organizations should include members who have received Service End Date for Repair per Set
training in the inspection of ensembles and ensemble
1st 01/11/05 70% $700
elements, who understand the limitations of each ensemble
2nd 01/11/04 50% $500
and ensemble element, and who recognize the signs of failure
in the decision-making process as to the integrity of an ensem‐ 3rd 01/11/03 40% $400
ble or ensemble element. Organizations are further encour‐ 4th 01/11/02 25% $250
5th 01/11/01 20% $200
Y
aged to ensure that inventories of protective ensembles and
ensemble elements are effectively managed so that their full 6th 01/11/00 15% $150
utility can be realized. Efficient rotation of clothing and use of
spare ensembles and ensemble elements where available can
help maximize their service life. Repurposing clean, expired
ensembles or ensemble elements for use as training gear, exer‐
7th
8th
9th
10th
01/11/99
01/11/98
01/11/97
01/11/96
N
10%
5%
5%
0%
L $100
$50
$50
$0
cise gear, public education gear, and demonstration gear are
good alternatives for extending the non–fire use of retired
gear. O
label stating compliance and the label, symbol, or other identi‐
A.10.1.2 After discussion of the concept of mandatory retire‐

ment for protective elements, the consensus of the technical
committee, led by the fire service segment, is that the life of a
S E
fying mark of that certifying organization.
Third-party certification is an important means of ensuring
the quality of ensembles and ensemble elements. To be certain
U
turnout suit is generally less than 10 years. Regardless of when than an item is properly certified, labeled, and listed, NFPA
the element was originally produced, it is imperative that the strongly recommends that prospective purchasers require
appropriate evidence of certification for the specific product
protective elements be routinely inspected to ensure that they
are clean, well maintained, and still safe. Just knowing the age
of the elements cannot do that. In the 2014 and 2019 revision
cycles, the technical committee, led by the fire service, again
A L
and model from the manufacturer before purchase. Prospec‐
tive purchasers also should contact the certification organiza‐
tions and request copies of the certification organization’s list
U
reaffirmed this position. of certified products to the appropriate NFPA standard. This
listing is required for third-party certification by NFPA 1971
ID
A.10.1.3.1 Specific to proximity elements, the consensus of and is a service performed by the certification organization.
the technical committee is that the life of a proximity outer
shell is considerably less than that of a structural shell and that Details about certification and product labeling can be
V
the life span is entirely dependent on the type and amount of found in Chapters 4 and 5 of NFPA 1971. Also, the definitions
D I
field use to which each separate element has been exposed.
Given the characteristics of the aluminized outer materials
necessary to obtain the required radiant and reflective proper‐
ties, this type of fabric is especially susceptible to abrasion,
of certification/certified in Section 3.3 of NFPA 1971, and labeled
and listed in Section 3.2 of this standard should be reviewed.
From time to time, NFPA receives complaints that certain
items of structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
IN
which can result in a loss of the protective qualities in a very elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles and ensemble
short time. Regardless of when the element was originally elements might be carrying labels falsely identifying them as
produced, it is imperative that the protective elements be compliant with an NFPA standard. NFPA advises those purchas‐
R
routinely inspected to ensure that they are clean, well main‐ ing structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble elements
tained, and still safe. Just knowing the age of the elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles and ensemble elements
O
cannot do that. It should be noted that most manufacturers of to be aware that any structural fire fighting ensemble or ensem‐
proximity fire fighting protective garments can make a replace‐ ble element or proximity fire fighting ensemble or ensemble
F ment outer shell for a liner system that is less than 10 years old
from the date of manufacture. If a replacement outer shell is
not obtainable, the entire garment might need to be retired.
A.10.1.4 Organizations can use various methods to determine
whether it is cost effective to repair or replace structural ensem‐
element that does not bear the appropriate compliance state‐
ment and the mark of an independent, third-party certification
organization is not compliant with NFPA 1971, even if the
product label states that the ensemble or ensemble element is
compliant.
bles or ensemble elements and proximity ensembles or ensem‐ When an organization is in doubt as to the authenticity of a
ble elements. One commonly used method involves the use of certification claim, the certification organization or the
a matrix that compares factors such as the age of the gear, the consumer protection agency of the state/provincial govern‐
cost of the repair, and the replacement cost or the original cost ment should be contacted directly.
of the ensemble. Table A.10.1.4 is an example of such a matrix.
A.10.1.8 Changes in the type of structural fire fighting ensem‐
Δ A.10.1.5 All structural fire fighting ensembles and ensemble bles and ensemble elements and proximity fire fighting ensem‐
elements and proximity fire fighting ensembles and ensemble bles and ensemble elements used by a fire department can
elements are required by NFPA 1971 to be certified by an inde‐ result in the retirement of elements that have not yet reached
pendent, third-party certification organization. For an ensem‐ the end of their service life. Items of no further use to the
ble or ensemble element to meet the requirements of
NFPA 1971, the item should carry a statement on the product
organization in frontline service might be of use for training or dures should comply with the provisions of ISO Guide 27,
donation to other organizations. Guidelines for corrective action to be taken by a certification body in the
event of misuse of its mark of conformity, and as modified herein.
A.10.3.1 When developing these procedures, the organization
should coordinate with other agencies such as the medical For the purposes of defining noncompliant cleaning or
examiner, law enforcement, or other experts to determine what repairs of ensemble elements, a valid report should include any
actions are appropriate. Organizations can find additional specific approach to cleaning or repair that is not authorized
guidance related to the processing of structural ensembles and by the manufacturer of the ensemble element and that does
ensemble elements and proximity ensembles and ensemble not meet the one or more of the respective applicable require‐
elements that are directly related to serious fire fighter injuries ments for cleaning in accordance with Chapter 7 or for repairs
and fire fighter fatalities in the International Association of Fire in accordance with Chapter 8.
Fighters manual, Line of Duty Notification, Assistance, and Investi‐
gation Policy, available at www.iaff.org/safe/lodd.html, and the Where a report of potentially noncompliant cleaning or
repairs is provided, the certification organization should make
Y
International Association of Fire Chiefs guide for investigating
a line-of-duty death, “LODD Response Plan,” available at an assessment of the severity of the noncompliance and its
L
www.iafc.org. consequences to the safety and health of users. This assessment
should involve the certification organization consulting with
N
N A.11.1.1.1 Organizations should look at the listed capabilities the manufacturer of the affected ensemble element(s).
indicated by the certification organization for verified ISPs to
Where a complaint of potentially noncompliant cleaning or
O
determine which moisture barriers can be repaired prior to
requesting repair work on their garments. The ISP’s or organi‐ repairs is provided, the certification organization should deter‐
zation’s certificate or the certification organization’s website mine the scope of the services as applied to ensemble
element(s) in terms of the period of time for which the
should also be reviewed.
Δ A.11.1.3.1 It should be noted that the 2008 edition of
NFPA 1851 included two categories of independent service
S E
noncompliant cleaning or repairs had occurred, if possible.
The certification organization should conduct the investiga‐
tion with input from the verified ISP or verified organization
U
providers (ISPs): verified and non-verified. In the 2014 edition
of the standard, the technical committee eliminated the non- providing the cleaning or repairs. Where findings conclude
verified ISP completely. This was based on the technical that the verified ISP’s or verified organization’s specific clean‐
committee’s position that any service provider offering
advanced inspection, advanced cleaning, sanitization, basic
repair, advanced repair, and training must be third-party veri‐
A L
ing or repairs are noncompliant with this standard and the
certification organization's appeal procedures referenced in
11.2.14 have been followed, the certification organization
should take one or more of the following corrective actions:
U
fied in order to do so. Thus, the term ISP can be used only by
companies verified by an independent third-party agency in (1) Require the verified ISP or verified organization to insti‐
ID
accordance with the requirements of this standard. In the 2020 tute changes in its procedures to bring its cleaning or
edition, the technical committee maintained the categories of
verified ISP and verified organization; the category of verified (2)
repairs into compliance with this standard
Require the verified ISP or verified organization to notify
V
cleaner was also added to allow for more access to entities that
I
clean and sanitize garments but don’t offer other services
covered by this standard, like inspection and repair. (3)
those parties or individuals affected by the noncompliant
cleaning or repairs
Require the verified ISP or verified organization to
D
A.11.2.1 The certification organization should have a suffi‐
perform compliant cleaning or repairs on the affected
ensemble elements when such recleaning of ensemble
IN
cient breadth of interest and activity so that the loss or award of elements or performance of additional repairs is neces‐
a specific business contract would not be a determining factor sary to protect the users
in the financial well-being of the agency. (4) Remove the verified ISP or verified organization from its
R
A.11.2.5 The contractual provisions covering verification verification program if it refuses to comply with the certif‐
programs should contain clauses advising the verified organiza‐ ication organization’s corrective action indicated as part
O
tion or verified ISP that, if requirements change, the process of its investigation
should be brought into compliance with the new requirements The certification organization should provide the findings of
F
by a stated effective date through a compliance review program
involving all currently verified repairs. Without such clauses,
certification organizations would not be able to move quickly to
protect their names, marks, or reputations. A verification
program would be deficient without these contractual provi‐
the investigation to the appropriate parties.
Where a change to this standard is necessary as a result of
the investigation, the certification organization should submit
either a Public Input for a proposed change to the next revi‐
sions and the administrative means to back them up. sion of this standard or a proposed Temporary Interim Amend‐
ment (TIA) to the current edition of this standard.
A.11.2.7 Investigative procedures are important elements of
an effective and meaningful verification program. A prelimi‐ N A.11.3.7 The requirements in this section are imposed to
nary review should be carried out on processes submitted to verify that certain facilities that perform advanced cleaning and
the agency before any major testing is undertaken. sanitization of fire fighter protective garments can provide
minimum levels of contaminant removal. Facilities subject to
A.11.2.12 Such inspections should include witnessing of this verification by the certification organization include ISPs,
advanced cleaning, advanced inspections, and advanced repairs cleaners, manufacturers that provide cleaning services, and
and review of the quality management system. verified organizations.
•
N A.11.2.16 The certification organization should establish
procedures for when complaints are submitted. These proce‐
ANNEX A 1851-99
Verification of advanced cleaning includes evaluating the presence of 1 mm or larger diameter holes in natural-colored
facility’s ability to separately remove both heavy metal contami‐ hoods; however, the ability of the test to identify holes in black-
nation and semivolatile organic compound contamination colored hoods is lessened to holes that are 7 mm or larger in
using procedures established in Chapter 12. Minimum levels of diameter. The utility of this test should be demonstrated before
contamination removal for these substances are based on relying on this technique to detect damage in particulate-
cleaning efficiency, which is measured by comparing levels of blocking hoods.
specific contaminants in contaminated surrogate clothing
samples subject to advanced cleaning to similar samples that N A.12.2.1.2 This test method involves clamping a portion of the
have not been cleaned. These minimum levels were established particulate-blocking hood onto a fixture and flowing a simulant
by a comprehensive study conducted by the Fire Protection smoke underneath the portion of the hood being tested under
Research Foundation and reflect practical and achievable specific conditions of exposure.
contamination removal levels based on current cleaning In the qualitative test approach, the test operator examines
approaches available to the fire service. the exposed area of the tested hood for any signs of visual
Verification of sanitization is applied to those facilities that
sanitize fire fighter protective garments. Sanitization is applied
to biological contaminations such as microorganisms from
penetration of smoke. A comparison is made with a new hood
to determine if there are any differences in the amount of
smoke penetration observed.
L Y
blood, body fluids, and contaminated water. Procedures for
verifying sanitization of fire fighter protective garments are
established in Chapter 12. Effectiveness for sanitization is
judged on a log reduction (powers of 10) where the minimum
log reduction represents a 99.9 percent reduction in the
N
In the quantitative test approach, a light transmission meter
is used to measure the density of smoke across the exposed
O
surface of the test hood and provides the percentage of light
transmission. A measurement of 100 percent indicates the
amount of smoke coming from the hood does not affect the
number of viable microorganisms. This level of reduction is
consistent with EPA regulations for sanitizer registration.
N A.12.1.1 While this technique can be effectively used for quick
S E
light beam, whereas any measurement less than 100 percent
indicates that some smoke is passing through the area of the
hood being tested. As with the qualitative test, acceptable
U
inspection of a particulate-blocking protective hood interface performance is determined by a comparison between light
component, hoods that use dark materials or utilize multiple transmission measurements with a new hood and light trans‐
mission measurements with a used hood.
thick layers in their construction can be difficult to inspect for
identifying damage. If this technique does not readily identify
small holes and tears in the type of hood being tested, it is
recommended that the smoke evaluation method specified in
A L
N A.12.2.3 An example test apparatus, quantitative smoke
inspection method (QSIM), conforming to the requirements
in 12.2.3 is shown in Figure A.12.2.3(a) and Figure A.12.2.3(b).
Section 12.2 be used for inspection of particulate-blocking
hoods.
I
N A.12.1.3.1 A clear head form can be found online and at vari‐
ous fashion or clothing display supply stores. Ideally, the head
form should be completely clear and have average human
V
D I
features. It is advantageous to use an SCBA facepiece on the
head form and block off the area underneath the SCBA visor to
minimize light coming out of the face opening. A regular
incandescent light bulb of 60 W or greater can be used as the
IN
light source. Alternatively, a light-emitting diode (LED) light
can also be used and might provide greater light intensity. The
head form and light source can be mounted on a board or plat‐
R
form to provide ease of use.
The equipment used in Section 12.2 can also be used where
F O
the transparent cylindrical reservoir is replaced with an opaque
cylindrical reservoir, the smoke generator is not connected to
the sample clamping device, and a small multi-LED light
source is used inside the cylindrical reservoir.
N A.12.1.3.2 A simple fixture meeting this requirement is a
100 mm (4 in.) diameter solid color Schedule 40 or Schedule
80 PVC pipe section that is approximately 150 mm (6 in.) long
and mounted on top of a board or other platform. A socket can
be used to mount the pipe vertically on the board. A socket or
other open pipe fixture end can be installed on the top of the
pipe section cut edge to provide a smoother surface for mount‐
ing the hood. A small multi-LED can be placed at the base
inside the pipe section as the light source. A simple elastic
band can be used to hold the hood in position at each inspec‐
tion site.
N A.12.1.6 Research performed by the North Carolina State N FIGURE A.12.2.3(a) Complete QSIM Testing Apparatus.
University has shown that this test can readily discriminate the
N A.12.2.3.2 A hydrostatic testing device used for conducting (3) Three layer light transmittance: 82.6 percent
water penetration evaluation of garment moisture barriers and ± 5.0 percent
moisture barrier seams can be adapted for achieving these (4) Four layer light transmittance: 91.7 percent ± 5.0 percent
characteristics.
N A.12.2.6.2 Organizations and ISPs conducting the inspection
N A.12.2.3.3 Several commercial smoke generators can be used of particulate-blocking hoods should establish the baseline
to meet these requirements. Smoke generators can use either performance of new, unused hoods and apply statistics for
aqueous-based smoke-generating liquids (e.g., glycerin) or determining if lower light transmission values suggest possible
mineral oil. A determination should be made for the safety of defects in used hoods.
the smoke-generating liquid. If there are any concerns for resi‐
due left by the smoke-generating liquid, then the tested hood A.12.3.3.1 An evaluation apparatus meeting these require‐
should be subjected to an advanced cleaning. ments is specified in AATCC 127, Water Resistance: Hydrostatic
Pressure Test. The method of pressurization can be automatic or
N A.12.2.3.5 A representative light transmission meter is a manual.
window tint meter used for automotive windshields that is self-
contained with both a movable LED light source and a photo‐
resister with a digital display and RS232 port for data
N A.12.4.1 This test method is used for verifying the efficacy of
advanced cleaning in removing contaminants generally associ‐
ated with products of combustion. For the purposes of this test‐
L Y
N
acquisition.
ing, a single outer shell material is used where samples of the
N A.12.2.4.2(13) The cleaning procedures used should be outer shell material are contaminated with specific chemicals
appropriate for removing any residue left on the hood inter‐
face component as the result of contact with the test smoke.
O
under controlled conditions and then subjected to a single
cycle of advanced cleaning at the cleaning facility. The results
E
The post-inspection test cleaning procedures do not necessarily of the test are used to determine cleaning efficiencies for two
have to be those complying with 7.3.16, but should be demon‐ different groups of chemical contaminants: selected semivola‐
S
strated to remove the smoke-generated residue. tile organic chemicals and selected heavy metals. While this test
method is used to assess the effectiveness of advanced cleaning
N A.12.2.4.3(1) Suitable standard reference materials are the
U
in removing contaminants, it cannot be inferred to represent
CHEMEX® bonded filters as prefolded squares. When evalu‐ the effectiveness of advanced cleaning procedures to remove
ated using the quantitative approach in 12.2.4.3 in one, two, all contaminants in all types of materials under all circumstan‐
three, and four layers of the standard reference material filter
paper, the following results should be obtained:
(1) One layer light transmittance: 36.9 percent ± 10.0 percent
A
ces.
L
N A.12.4.2 The paragraphs in 12.4.2 provide an overall descrip‐
tion of procedures for measuring cleaning efficiency for
U
(2) Two layer light transmittance: 68.6 percent ± 10.0 percent
advanced cleaning processes in removing chemical contami‐
nants from protective garment outer shell materials.
I D Section 12.4 provides the overarching set of procedures for
these measurements covering both semivolatile organic
V
compound (SVOC) and heavy metal inorganic contaminants.
D I Specific procedures for the preparation of SOVC-contaminated

specimens, the extraction of SVOC contaminants from both
contaminated and noncontaminated specimens, and the analy‐
sis of those specimens for specific contaminants are provided in
IN
Section 12.6. Similarly, specific procedures for the preparation
of heavy metal inorganic compound contaminated specimens,
the extraction of heavy metal contaminants from both contami‐
nated and noncontaminated specimens, and the analysis of
O R those specimens for specific contaminants are provided in

Section 12.7. Section 12.9 is referenced for the preparation of
surrogate garments, the preparation of ballast material panels,
and the creation of the wash load.
F N A.12.4.4.4.1 A total of 10 specimens are prepared and used for

two types of contaminant (semivolatile organic compounds and
heavy metals). Of the six contaminated specimens, two speci‐
mens are inserted into the pockets of a surrogate coat, two
specimens are inserted into the pockets of a surrogate pant,
one specimen travels with the other specimens to the cleaning
facility where the verification is conducted, and the last speci‐
men is retained by the certification organization or its designa‐
ted laboratory. Of the four noncontaminated (control)
specimens, one specimen is inserted into the pocket of a surro‐
gate coat, one specimen is inserted into the pocket of a surro‐
gate pant, one specimen travels with the other specimens to the
cleaning facility, and the last specimen is retained by the certifi‐
N FIGURE A.12.2.3(b) QSIM During Testing with No Test cation organization or its designated laboratory.
Fabric in Place.
ANNEX A 1851-101
The number of specimens can be reduced to five contamina‐ gate pant, one specimen travels with the other specimens to the
ted specimens and three noncontaminated specimens if the cleaning facility, and the last specimen is retained by the certifi‐
certification organization can demonstrate that the transporta‐ cation organization or its designated laboratory.
tion of the specimens to the receiving facility does not affect
the specimen’s condition or the contaminant concentrations. The number of specimens can be reduced to five contamina‐
This reduction in sample numbers would occur if the travel ted specimens and three noncontaminated specimens if the
specimens are not prepared and sent to the cleaning facility. certification organization can demonstrate that the transporta‐
The removed sixth contaminated specimen and removed tion of the specimens to the receiving facility does not affect
fourth noncontaminated specimen are intended to be controls the specimen’s condition or the biocontamination levels. This
to indicate the transportation of the specimens is not affected reduction in sample numbers would occur if the travel speci‐
by their transport to the cleaning facility. mens are not prepared and sent to the cleaning facility. The
removed sixth contaminated specimen and removed fourth
N A.12.5.1 This test method is used for verifying the efficacy of noncontaminated specimen are intended to be controls to
Y
sanitization to inactivate microbiological contaminants associ‐ indicate the transportation of the specimens is not affected by
ated with biological contaminants such as body fluids or conta‐ their transport to the cleaning facility.
minated water. For the purposes of this testing, a single outer
shell material is used where samples of the outer shell material
are contaminated with specific types of bacteria under control‐
led conditions and then subjected to a single cycle of sanitiza‐
N A.12.6.4.1 This type of apparatus can either be fabricated or
N
purchased. Multiple port evaporators/concentrators can be
purchased or fabricated. A photograph of a fabricated minia‐
ture evaporator designed to hold oil tubes is shown in Figure
L
tion at the cleaning facility. The results of the test method are
used to determine log reductions for two different bacteria:
Klebsiella pneumoniae and Staphylococcus aureus. While this test
A.12.6.4.1.
O
N A.12.6.4.8 EPA Method 3540C, “Soxhlet Extraction,” can be
method is used to assess the effectiveness of sanitization in inac‐
tivating or killing these biological contaminants, it cannot be
inferred to represent the effectiveness of sanitization proce‐
dures to inactivate all forms of microbial contamination in all
contaminants.
S E
adapted for use with textile sample matrices for performing
this type of extraction for semivolatile organic compound
types of materials under all circumstances.

N A.12.5.2 The paragraphs in 12.5.2 provide an overall descrip‐
tion of procedures for measuring log reduction for sanitization
L U
N A.12.6.5.6 EPA Method 8270E, “Semivolatile Organic
Compounds by Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/
MS),” can be adapted for use with textile sample matrices for
performing this type of analysis for semivolatile organic
processes in removing biological contaminants from protective
garment outer shell materials. Section 12.5 provides the over‐
arching set of procedures for these measurements covering two
different types of vegetative bacteria: Klebsiella pneumoniae and
U A compound contaminants.
N A.12.7.2.3 A metal wire test tube rack can be used for this
purpose.
bacteria-contaminated specimens, the extraction of bacteria

contaminants from both contaminated and noncontaminated
I D
Staphylococcus aureus. Specific procedures for the preparation of
I V
specimens, and the analysis of those specimens for specific
contaminants are provided in Section 12.8. Section 12.9 is
D
referenced for the preparation of surrogate garments, the
preparation of ballast material panels, and the creation of the
IN
cleaning load.
N A.12.5.2.6 Log reduction is a shorthand for indicating the
percentage reduction of microorganisms. For example, a log10
O R
3 reduction is the removal of a 99.9 percent reduction of
microorganisms. In this referenced method, the log reduction
is based on comparing the reduction of the microorganisms
between surrogate fabrics subjected to a sanitization process
F and the same fabrics subjected to a water wash only. The proce‐
dures used in this standard are based on ASTM E2274, Standard
Test Method for Evaluation of Laundry Sanitizers and Disinfectants,
which is one of the test methods specified by the U.S. Environ‐
mental Protection Agency (EPA) for determining the efficacy
of sanitizers.
N A.12.5.4.4.1 A total of 10 specimens are prepared and used for
types of bacteria. Of the six contaminated specimens, two speci‐
mens are inserted into the pockets of a surrogate coat, two
specimens are inserted into the pockets of a surrogate pant,
one specimen travels with the other specimens to the cleaning
facility where the verification is conducted, and the last speci‐
men is retained by the certification organization or its designa‐
ted laboratory. Of the four noncontaminated (control)
specimens, one specimen is inserted into the pocket of a surro‐
N FIGURE A.12.6.4.1 Photograph of a Miniature
gate coat, one specimen is inserted into the pocket of a surro‐
Evaporation Apparatus.
N A.12.7.2.4.3 Given the hydrophobic nature of original finish N Table A.12.9.3.8(c) Number and Type of Panels for 100 lb
on the specimens, extreme care must be exercised that no Washer/Extractor Load at 80 Percent Capacity
liquid runs off the specimen during the application of the
metals standard solution. Individual Weight Total Weight
N A.12.7.3.1.5 EPA Method 3050B, “Acid Digestion of Sedi‐ Panel Number g lb kg lb
ments, Sludges, and Soils,” can be adapted for use with textile
A 70 172 0.38 12.07 26.60
sample matrices for performing this type of extraction for B 20 354 0.78 7.08 15.60
heavy metal contaminants. C 32 354 0.78 11.03 24.32
N A.12.7.3.2.9 EPA Method 3050B, “Acid Digestion of Sedi‐ D 3 354 0.78 1.06 2.34
ments, Sludges, and Soils,” can be adapted for use with textile E 3 308 0.68 1.06 2.34
F (3 pieces) 13 181 0.40 2.36 5.20
sample matrices for performing this type of extraction for
Total load weight — — — 34.66 76.40
heavy metal contaminants.
N A.12.7.4.1.3 EPA Method 6010D, “Inductively Coupled
Plasma,” can be adapted for use with textile sample matrices
for performing this type of analysis for heavy metal contami‐ N Table A.12.9.3.8(d) Recommended Sequencing for Individual
L Y
nants.
N A.12.9.3.8 Specific examples of samples (panels) are given
below for set size washer/extractors in Table A.12.9.3.8(a)
through Table A.12.9.3.8(c).
Panels
Step Sequence 40 lb O N
Extractor Load
60 lb 100 lb
The recommended sequencing for the individual panels for
a 40 lb, a 60 lb, and a 100 lb washer/extractor load at
80 percent capacity are provided in Table A.12.9.3.8(d).
1
2
3
D
S
A
C
E D
A
F
D
A
C
N Table A.12.9.3.8(a) Number and Type of Panels for 40 lb

Washer/Extractor Load at 80 Percent Capacity
4
5
6
7
L U A
F
A
B
A
C
A
F
A
F
A
B
A
Panel Number
28
Individual Weight
g
172
lb
0.38
Total Weight
kg
5.08
lb
11.20
U A 8
9
10
11
A
C
A
E
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
C
B
C
D
9
9
3
354
354
354
0.78
0.78
0.78
I D
3.27
3.27
1.06
7.20
7.20
2.34
12
13
A
B
A
F
A
B
E
F (3 pieces)
Total load weight
3
15
—
354
181
—
I
0.78
0.40
— V 1.06
0.91
14.65
2.34
2.00
32.28
14
15
16
A
C
A
A
E
A
A
C
A
D 17
18
F
A
B
A
F
A
IN
19 B C B
N Table A.12.9.3.8(b) Number and Type of Panels for 60 lb 20 A A A
Washer/Extractor Load at 80 Percent Capacity 21 C F C
O R
Panel Number
Individual Weight
g lb
Total Weight
kg lb
22
23
24
25
A
D
A
B
A
C
A
B
A
E
A
B
A
B
C
D
E
F 42
12
16
3
3
172
354
354
354
354
0.38
0.78
0.78
0.78
0.78
7.62
4.35
5.66
1.06
1.06
16.80
9.60
12.50
2.34
2.34
26
27
28
29
30
A
C
A
E
A
A
C
A
F
A
A
C
A
C
A
F (3 pieces) 27 181 0.40 1.63 3.60
Total load weight — — — 21.38 47.18 31 B D B
32 A A A
33 C B C
34 A A A
35 F C F
36 A A A
37 B F B
38 A A A
39 C C C
40 A A A
(continues)
ANNEX A 1851-103
N Table A.12.9.3.8(d) Continued N Table A.12.9.3.8(d) Continued
Extractor Load Extractor Load

Step Sequence 40 lb 60 lb 100 lb Step Sequence 40 lb 60 lb 100 lb
41 D B D 97 — — A
42 A A A 98 — — C
43 B C B 99 — — A
44 A A A 100 — — C
45 C E C 101 — — A
46 A A A 102 — — B
47 E C C 103 — — A
48 A A A 104 — — C
49
50
51
B
A
C
B
A
C
B
A
C
105
106
107
—
—
—
—
—
—
L Y A
C
A
52
53
54
55
56
A
F
A
B
A
A
F
A
C
A
A
F
A
B
A
108
109
110
111
112
—
—
—
—
— O N —
—
—
—
—
B
A
C
A
F
57
58
59
F
A
C
B
A
C
F
A
C
113
114
115
S E —
—
—
—
—
—
A
B
A
60
61
62
63
—
—
—
—
A
D
A
C
B
A
C
A
L U
116
117
118
119
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
F
A
C
A
64
65
66
67
—
—
—
—
A
B
A
C
F
A
B
A
U A 120
121
122
123
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
A
C
A
68 —
69 —
A
F
I D C
A
124
125
—
—
—
—
F
A
V
70 — A C 126 — — B
71
72
73
74
—
—
—
—
D I C
A
B
A
A
E
A
C
127
128
129
130
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A
F
A
C
IN
75 — E A 131 — — A
76 — A F 132 — — B
77 — C A 133 — — A
R
78 — A B 134 — — C
79 — F A 135 — — A
O
80 — A C 136 — — F
81 — B A 137 — — A
F 82
83
84
85
86
—
—
—
—
—
A
C
A
F
A
C
A
B
A
C
138
139
140
141
142
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
A
F
A
D
87 — B A
88 — C C N A.12.9.3.9 The efficacy of the wash load can be checked by
89 — B A running a test load and examining the condition of the panels
90 — — B washing the wash process. A successful test load occurs when all
91 — — A panels open during the wash process. For certain low depth
92 — — C wash drums, larger panels might have to be removed from the
93 — — A sequencing in order to achieve a successful load.
94 — — F
95 — — A
96 — — D
(continues)
Annex B Informational References ASTM E2274, Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Laundry
Sanitizers and Disinfectants, 2016.
Δ B.1 Referenced Publications. The documents or portions
thereof listed in this annex are referenced within the informa‐ ASTM F1731, Standard Practice for Body Measurements and
tional sections of this standard and are not part of the require‐ Sizing of Fire and Rescue Services Uniforms and Other Thermal
ments of this document unless also listed in Chapter 2 for Hazard Protective Clothing, 1999, reapproved 2013.
other reasons. ASTM F1930, Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Flame-
B.1.1 NFPA Publications. National Fire Protection Associa‐ Resistant Clothing for Protection Against Fire Simulations Using an
tion, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471. Instrumented Manikin, 2018.
NFPA 1500™, Standard on Fire Department Occupational Safety, ASTM STP1237, Performance of Protective Clothing, 5th volume,
Health, and Wellness Program, 2018 edition. 1996.
ASTM STP1386, Field Evaluation of Protective Clothing Effects on
NFPA 1521, Standard for Fire Department Safety Officer Professio‐
nal Qualifications, 2015 edition.
NFPA 1581, Standard on Fire Department Infection Control
Fire Fighter Physiology: Predictive Capability of Total Heat Loss Test,
2000.
Δ B.1.2.5 EPA Publications. Environmental Protection Agency,
L Y
Program, 2015 edition.
NFPA 1971, Standard on Protective Ensembles for Structural Fire
Fighting and Proximity Fire Fighting, 2018 edition.
NFPA 1991, Standard on Vapor-Protective Ensembles for Hazard‐ O N
William Jefferson Clinton East Building, 1200 Pennsylvania
Avenue, NW, Washington, DC 20460.
EPA SW-846, Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/
Chemical Methods. The specific methods cited can be downloa‐
ous Materials Emergencies and CBRN Terrorism Incidents, 2016
edition.
NFPA 1994, Standard on Protective Ensembles for First Responders
S E
ded at https://www.epa.gov/hw-sw846
Method 3015A, “Microwave Assisted Acid Digestion of Aque‐
ous Samples and Extracts,” February 2007.
to Hazardous Materials Emergencies and CBRN Terrorism Incidents,
2018 edition.
NFPA 1999, Standard on Protective Clothing and Ensembles for
U
Method 3050B, “Acid Digestion of Sediments, Sludges, and
Soils,” December 1996.
L
Method 3540C, “Soxhlet Extraction,” December 1996.
A
Emergency Medical Operations, 2018 edition.
B.1.2 Other Publications. Method 6010D, “Inductively Coupled Plasma,” July 2018.
B.1.2.1 AATCC Publications. American Association of Textile

U Method 8270E, “Semivolatile Organic Compounds by Gas
Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS),” 2007.
ID
Chemists and Colorists, P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle
Park, NC 27709-2215. OCSPP 810.2200, “Disinfectants for Use on Environmental
Surfaces — Guide for Efficacy Testing,” EPA Series 810 — Prod‐
N B.1.2.2 ACGIH Publications. American Conference of

V
AATCC 127,Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test, 2018.
I
uct Performance Test Guidelines, September 2012.
OCSPP 810.2300, “Sanitizers for Use on Hard Surfaces —
D
Governmental Industrial Hygienists, 1330 Kemper Meadow
Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45240-1634. Efficacy Data Recommendations,” EPA Series 810 — Product
Performance Test Guidelines, September 2012.
IN
2016 Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) and Biological Exposure Indi‐
ces (BEIs). OCSPP 810.2400, “Disinfectants and Sanitizers for Use on
Fabrics and Textiles — Efficacy Date Recommendations,” EPA
B.1.2.3 ANSI Publications. American National Standards Series 810 — Product Performance Test Guidelines, March 2013.
10036.
O R
Institute, Inc., 25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY
ANSI/ASSE Z87.1, American National Standard for Occupa‐

Δ B.1.2.6 IAFC Publications. International Association of Fire
Chiefs, 4025 Fair Ridge Drive, Suite 300, Fairfax, VA
22033-2868.
F
tional and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices,
2015.
ANSI/ISEA 107, American National Standard for High-Visibility
Safety Apparel and Accessories, 2015.
“LODD Response Plan,” www.iafc.org/topics-and-tools/
resources/resource/line-of-duty-death-resources
Δ B.1.2.7 IAFF Publications. International Association of Fire
Fighters, 1750 New York Avenue, NW, Suite 300, Washington,
ANSI/ISEA 113, American National Standard for Fixed and Port‐ DC 20006-5395.
able Decontamination Shower Units, 2013.
Line of Duty Notification, Assistance, and Investigation
ANSI/ISEA 207, American National Standard for High-Visibility Policy,http://client.prod.iaff.org/#contentid=369.
Public Safety Vests, 2011.
Δ B.1.2.8 ISO Publications. International Organization for
Δ B.1.2.4 ASTM Publications. ASTM International, 100 Barr Standardization, ISO Central Secretariat, BIBC II, Chemin de
Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA Blandonnet 8, CP 401, 1214 Vernier, Geneva, Switzerland.
19428-2959.
ISO Guide 27, Guidelines for corrective action to be taken by a
ASTM D5755, Standard Test Method for Microvacuum Sampling certification body in the event of misuse of its mark of conformity, 1983,
and Indirect Analysis of Dust by Transmission Electron Microscopy for reconfirmed 2014.
Asbestos Structure Number Surface Loading, 2014.
ANNEX B 1851-105
ISO/IEC 17065, Conformity assessment — Requirements for bodies ard on Protective Ensembles for Structural Fire Fighting and
certifying products, processes and services, 2012. NFPA 1851 on Selection, Care and Maintenance.” Fire Technol‐
• ogy 51, no. 5 (2015): 1149–1166.
B.1.2.9 U.S. Government Publications. U.S. Government
Publishing Office, 732 North Capitol Street, NW, Washington, Naylor, R. A., and C. J. Boase. “Practical solutions for treating
DC 20401-0001. laundry infested with Cimex lectularius (Hemiptera: Cimici‐
dae).” Journal of Economic Entomology 103(1): 136–139, February
FHA Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, 2012. 2010.
Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1910.1030, Report #HP170626, “A Report to FIERO on Total Heat Loss
“Bloodborne Pathogens.” and Evaporative Resistance Measurements of Eight Firefighter
N B.1.2.10 USFA Publications. U.S. Fire Administration, 16825 Composites.” Textile Protection and Comfort Center (T-PACC),
South Seton Avenue, Emmitsburg, MD 21727. College of Textiles, North Carolina State University, June 2017.
“Research, Testing and Analysis on the Decontamination of

Fire Fighting Protective Clothing and Equipment.” (A synopsis
of this report is provided in ASTM STP1237, Performance of
Protective Clothing.)
Report #PSM170626, “A Report to FIERO on Phase II Test‐
ing: Predicted Physiological Responses from Eight Firefighting
Suits Tested in Three Environmental Conditions.” Textile
Protection and Comfort Center (T-PACC), College of Textiles,
L Y
N B.1.2.11 Other Publications.
Easley, C. B., J. Laughlin, and R. Gold. “Laundering Pesticide
Contaminated Clothing.” Cornell University Cooperative
North Carolina State University, June 2017.
O N
Thostenson, A., et al. “Laundering Pesticide-contaminated
Work Clothes (PS1778).” North Dakota State University Exten‐
sion Service, January 2016. www.ag.ndsu.edu/publications/
Extension, Pesticide Safety Education Program (PSEP).
psep.cce.cornell.edu/facts-slides-self/facts/gen-posaf-
laund.aspx.
ps1778.pdf.
S E
crops/laundering-pesticide-contaminated-work-clothes/
Δ B.2 Informational References. The following documents or
U
Kent, K. W., et al. “Contamination of firefighter personal portions thereof are listed here as informational resources
protective equipment and skin and the effectiveness of decon‐ only. They are not a part of the requirements of this document.
tamination procedures,” Journal of Occupational and Environmen‐
tal Hygiene 14(9): 801–814, June 2017.
Laughlin, J. “Decontaminating Pesticide Protective Cloth‐
ing.” Reviews of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology 130
A L
NIOSH Publication No. 2005-149, NIOSH Pocket Guide to
Chemical Hazards, September 2005.
Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1910.120,
(1993): 79–94. Springer, New York, NY. https://doi.org/
10.1007/978-1-4613-9763-2_3.
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U “Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response,”

August 22, 1994.
McQuerry, M., A. Hummel, R. Barker, and S. Deaton. “The

Cost of a Pocket: How Additional Reinforcements Impact THL
& TPP.” Fire Engineering 168, no. 12 (2015): 78–79.
V I B.3 References
(Reserved)
for Extracts in Informational Sections.
D I
McQuerry, M., S. Klausing, D. Cotterill, and E. Easter. “A
Post-use Evaluation of Turnout Gear Using NFPA 1971 Stand‐
IN
O R
F
Index
Copyright © 2019 National Fire Protection Association. All Rights Reserved.
The copyright in this index is separate and distinct from the copyright in the document that it indexes. The licensing provi‐
sions set forth for the document are not applicable to this index. This index may not be reproduced in whole or in part by any
means without the express written permission of NFPA.
-A- Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of Garment

Elements, 7.3.11
Accessory/Accessories
Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of Glove
Definition, 3.3.1
Elements, 7.3.13
Administration, Chap. 1
Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of Helmet
Application, 1.3
Y
Elements, 7.3.12
Purpose, 1.2 Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of Hood
Scope, 1.1
Units, 1.4
Advanced Cleaning
Definition, 3.3.2
Elements, 7.3.15
Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of
Ensemble Elements, 7.3.16

N
Proximity Fire-Fighting Ensembles and L
Approved
Definition, 3.2.1, A.3.2.1
Drying Procedures, 7.3.10, A.7.3.10
Disinfection or Sanitization and Biological
Decontamination, 7.4 O
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
-B-
S E
Additional Requirements for Disinfection or Sanitization
and Cleaning of Helmet Elements, 7.4.5
Additional Requirements for Sanitization and Cleaning of
U
Ensembles and Ensemble Elements Certified to
Biological Terrorism Agents the Optional Liquid and Particulate
Definition, 3.3.3 Contaminant Protection Requirements of NFPA
Body Fluids
Definition, 3.3.4
-C-
A L 1971, 7.4.10
Footwear Elements, 7.4.7
Carcinogen/Carcinogenic
{10FEEA75-41E2-4C5E-80F9-9CC24DEEEDCE} D U Garment Elements, 7.4.4
Glove Elements, 7.4.6
Care
Definition, 3.3.6
V I Additional Requirements for Sanitization and Cleaning of

Hood Elements, 7.4.8
I
CBRN Additional Requirements for Sanitization and Cleaning of
Definition, 3.3.7 Proximity Fire-Fighting Ensembles and
D
CBRN Terrorism Agents Ensemble Elements, 7.4.9
Definition, 3.3.8, A.3.3.8 General, 7.1, A.7.1
IN
Certification/Certified Approach for Addressing Specific Types of
Contamination, 7.1.3, A.7.1.3
Definition, 3.3.9
Asbestos and Other Designated Hazardous Substance
Char Decontamination Actions, 7.1.3.3
O R
Definition, 3.3.10
Chemical Terrorism Agents
Definition, 3.3.11
Cleaning
Body Fluid and Other Microbial Contamination
Disinfection and Sanitization Actions, 7.1.3.4
Bulk Chemical Decontamination Actions, 7.1.3.2
F
General Decontamination Actions, 7.1.3.1
Advanced Cleaning Products of Combustion Cleaning Actions, 7.1.3.5
Definition, 3.3.12.1, A.3.3.12.1 Special Provisions for Ensemble Elements, 7.1.3.6
Definition, 3.3.12, A.3.3.12 Approach for Deciding the Handling, Cleaning, and
Specialized Cleaning Disposition of Ensemble Elements, 7.1.2, A.7.1.2
Definition, 3.3.12.2, A.3.3.12.2 Approach for Handling Ensemble Elements After Incident
Cleaning and Decontamination, Chap. 7 Response, 7.1.1
Advanced Cleaning, 7.3 Preliminary Exposure Reduction, 7.2, A.7.2
Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of Additional Requirements for Preliminary Exposure
Ensembles Certified to the Optional Liquid and Reduction of Eye and Face Protection
Particulate Contaminant Protection Components, 7.2.4, A.7.2.4
Requirements of NFPA 1971, 7.3.17 Additional Requirements for Preliminary Exposure
Additional Requirements for Advanced Cleaning of Reduction of Hood Interface Components, 7.2.3
Footwear Elements, 7.3.14
2020 Edition
INDEX 1851-107
Additional Requirements for Preliminary Exposure Fit

Reduction of Proximity Fire-Fighting Ensembles Definition, 3.3.35
and Ensemble Elements, 7.2.5
Flame Resistance (Protective Clothing and Equipment)
General, 7.2.1 Definition, 3.3.36, A.3.3.36
Preliminary Exposure Reduction Procedures, 7.2.2
Footwear
Specialized Cleaning, 7.5 Definition, 3.3.37
Cleaning Facility Functional
Definition, 3.3.13, A.3.3.13 Definition, 3.3.38
Coat
Definition, 3.3.14 -G-
Contamination Garment
Y
Coverall Gauntlet
Definition, 3.3.16
L
Definition, 3.3.40
Craze Glove
N
Definition, 3.3.17 Definition, 3.3.41
Cross-Contamination Glove Wristlet
O
Crown Goggles
Definition, 3.3.19
E
Definition, 3.3.43, A.3.3.43
Crown Straps Gross Decontamination
S
Definition, 3.3.20 Definition, 3.3.44, A.3.3.44
-D-
U
-H-
Decontamination Hardware
L
Definitions, Chap. 3 Hazardous Materials
Disinfectant
Definition, 3.3.22, A.3.3.22
Drag Rescue Device
Definition, 3.3.23, A.3.3.23
U A Definition, 3.3.46, A.3.3.46
Hazardous Materials Emergencies
Definition, 3.3.47
D
Helmet
I
DRD Definition, 3.3.48
Definition, 3.3.24 Hood
Ear Covers
I
-E-
V Definition, 3.3.49
-I-
Definition, 3.3.25
D Independent Service Provider (ISP)
IN
Elasticity Definition, 3.3.50
Definition, 3.3.26 Informational References, Annex B
Elements Inherent Flame Resistance
Definition, 3.3.27
R
Definition, 3.3.51
Embrittlement Inspection, Chap. 6
Definition, 3.3.28
O
Advanced Inspection, 6.3
Emergency Medical Operations Additional Advanced Inspection Criteria for Ensembles with
F Definition, 3.3.29, A.3.3.29

Energy Absorbing System
Definition, 3.3.30
Ensemble
Definition, 3.3.31
Optional Liquid and Particulate Contaminant
Protection, 6.3.7
Additional Advanced Inspection Criteria for Proximity Fire
Fighting Protective Ensembles and Ensemble
Elements, 6.3.6
Complete Liner Inspection, 6.4
Ensemble Elements
General, 6.1
Definition, 3.3.32, A.3.3.32
Routine Inspection, 6.2
Explanatory Material, Annex A
Additional Routine Inspection Requirements for Proximity
Fire Fighting Protective Ensembles and
-F-
Ensemble Elements, 6.2.3
Faceshield Integrity
Field Evaluation
Definition, 3.3.34
2020 Edition
Interface Area Protective Clothing

Interface Component(s) Protective Ensemble
Proximity Fire Fighting
-L- Definition, 3.3.70
Labeled Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Coat
Liner System Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Coverall
Listed Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble
Definition, 3.2.4, A.3.2.4 Definition, 3.3.73, A.3.3.73
Maintenance
-M-
Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble with Optional Liquid
and Particulate Contamination Protection
Definition, 3.3.74
L Y
N
Definition, 3.3.56 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Footwear
Major A Seam Definition, 3.3.75
O
Definition, 3.3.57 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Garments
Major B Seam Definition, 3.3.76
Definition, 3.3.58 Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Glove
Manufacturer
Definition, 3.3.59
Manufacturer-Trained Organization
Definition, 3.3.77
S E
Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Helmet
Definition, 3.3.78
Definition, 3.3.60
Melt
Definition, 3.3.61
Minor Seam
L U
Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Shroud
Definition, 3.3.79
Proximity Fire Fighting Protective Trouser
Definition, 3.3.80
Definition, 3.3.62
Moisture Barrier
Definition, 3.3.63
U A -R-
Radiological Particulate Terrorism Agents
Definition, 3.3.81, A.3.3.81
Organization
-O-
I D Referenced Publications, Chap. 2

Repair, Chap. 8
Definition, 3.3.64, A.3.3.64
Manufacturer-Trained Organization
I V Additional Requirements for Advanced Garment Element

Repair, 8.4
Additional Requirements for Basic Garment Element Repair, 8.3
D
Definition, 3.3.64.1
Verified Organization Additional Requirements for Structural Fire Fighting Ensembles
and Proximity Fire Fighting Ensembles with
IN
Definition, 3.3.64.2
Optional Liquid and Particulate Contaminant
Outer Shell Protection, 8.9
Definition, 3.3.65 Footwear Element Repair, 8.7
O R
Preliminary Exposure Reduction
Definition, 3.3.66, A.3.3.66
-P-
Glove Element Repair, 8.6
Helmet Element Repair, 8.5
Requirements for All Ensembles and Ensemble Elements, 8.1
Requirements for Both Basic and Advanced Garment Element
FProducts of Combustion
Definition, 3.3.67, A.3.3.67
Program, Chap. 4
General, 4.1
Manufacturer’s Instructions, 4.4 Retirement
Repair, 8.2
Structural Fire Fighting Hood and Proximity Fire Fighting
Helmet Overcover and Proximity Fire Fighting
Shroud Repair, 8.8
Program Organization for Structural Fire Fighting Ensembles Definition, 3.3.82

and Ensemble Elements and Proximity Fire Fighting Retirement, Disposition, and Special Incident Procedure, Chap. 10
Ensembles and Ensemble Elements, 4.2 Disposition of Retired Elements, 10.2
Protecting the Public and Personnel from Exposure to Retirement, 10.1
Contaminated PPE, 4.5
Special Incident Procedure, 10.3
Records, 4.3
Reporting Personal Protective Equipment Health and Safety -S-
Concerns, 4.6
Sanitizer
Definition, 3.3.83, A.3.3.83
2020 Edition
INDEX 1851-109
Seam Structural Fire Fighting Protective Trouser

Major A Seam Suspension
Definition, 3.3.84.1, A.3.3.84.1 Definition, 3.3.105
Major B Seam
Definition, 3.3.84.2, A.3.3.84.2 -T-
Minor Seam Tensile Strength
Definition, 3.3.84.3 Definition, 3.3.106
Selection, Chap. 5 Test Procedures, Chap. 12
Selection and Purchase, 5.1, A.5.1 Bacterial Contaminated Specimen Preparation, Extraction, and
Selection Analysis, 12.8
Definition, 3.3.85 Analysis of Specimens for Bacterial Contamination, 12.8.3
Separate/Separation
Definition, 3.3.86
Service Life
Preparation of Test Microorganisms, 12.8.1
Procedures for Contamination of Specimens, 12.8.2
Biological Decontamination Efficacy Test, 12.5
L Y
N
Definition, 3.3.87 Application, 12.5.1, A.12.5.1
Shall General Procedures, 12.5.2, A.12.5.2
O
Definition, 3.2.5 Interpretation, 12.5.7
Shank Report, 12.5.6
Specimen Evaluation, 12.5.5
E
Definition, 3.3.88
Should Specimen Handling, Sample Load Assembly, and
Sanitization, 12.5.4
Definition, 3.2.6
Shroud
Definition, 3.3.89
Soiling
U S
Assembly of Sanitization Load and Application of
Sanitization, 12.5.4.5
Ballast Material Panels, 12.5.4.3
General, 12.5.4.1
Definition, 3.3.90, A.3.3.90
Specialized Cleaning
Definition, 3.3.91
A L Handling and Disposition of Contaminated

Specimens, 12.5.4.4
Surrogate Garments, 12.5.4.2
U
Standard Specimen Preparation, 12.5.3
Definition, 3.2.7 Chemical Decontamination Efficacy Test, 12.4
D
Storage, Chap. 9 Application, 12.4.1, A.12.4.1
All Ensembles and Ensemble Elements, 9.1, A.9.1
Stress Area
V I General Procedures, 12.4.2, A.12.4.2

Interpretation, 12.4.7
I
Definition, 3.3.92 Report, 12.4.6
Structural Fire Fighting Specimen Evaluation, 12.4.5
Definition, 3.3.93
D
Structural Fire Fighting Protective Coat
Specimen Handling, Sample Wash Load Assembly, and
Cleaning, 12.4.4
IN
Definition, 3.3.94 Assembly of Wash Load and Application of Wash
Structural Fire Fighting Protective Coverall Load, 12.4.4.5
Definition, 3.3.95 Ballast Material Panels, 12.4.4.3
R
Structural Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble General, 12.4.4.1
Definition, 3.3.96, A.3.3.96 Handling and Disposition of Contaminated
O
Specimens, 12.4.4.4
Structural Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble with Optional Liquid
and Particulate Contaminant Protection Removal and Shipping, 12.4.4.6
F Definition, 3.3.97
Structural Fire Fighting Protective Footwear
Definition, 3.3.98
Structural Fire Fighting Protective Garments
Surrogate Garments, 12.4.4.2
Specimen Preparation, 12.4.3
Heavy Metals, 12.4.3.4
Semivolatile Organic Compounds, 12.4.3.3
Heavy Metal Contaminated Specimen Preparation, Extraction,
Definition, 3.3.99
and Analysis, 12.7
Structural Fire Fighting Protective Glove
Analysis of Specimens, 12.7.4
Definition, 3.3.100
Data Analysis, 12.7.4.2
Structural Fire Fighting Protective Helmet
Instrumentation Set-Up, 12.7.4.1
Definition, 3.3.101
Extraction of Specimens, 12.7.3
Structural Fire Fighting Protective Hood
Acid Digestion, 12.7.3.1
Definition, 3.3.102
Filtration, 12.7.3.2
Structural Fire Fighting Protective Particulate-Blocking Hood
Instrument Sample Preparation, 12.7.3.3
Definition, 3.3.103, A.3.3.103
2020 Edition
Procedures for Contamination of Specimens, 12.7.2 Textile Fabric

Selection of Contaminants, 12.7.1 Definition, 3.3.107
Light Evaluation of Hood Particulate-Blocking Layers, 12.1 Thermal Barrier
Application, 12.1.1, A.12.1.1 Definition, 3.3.108
Evaluation Apparatus, 12.1.3 Toxic Industrial Chemicals
Evaluation Areas, 12.1.2 Definition, 3.3.109
Interpretation, 12.1.6, A.12.1.6 Trim
Procedure, 12.1.4 Definition, 3.3.110
Results, 12.1.5 Trouser
Preparation and Handling of Contaminated Specimens and Definition, 3.3.111
Surrogate Clothing, 12.9
Preparation of Ballast Fabric-Based Wash Panels, 12.9.2 -U-
Preparation of Surrogate Garments, 12.9.1
Preparation of Wash Load, 12.9.3
Semi-Volatile Organic Compound Contained Specimen
Universal Precautions
Definition, 3.3.112, A.3.3.112
Utility Sink
L Y
N
Preparation, Extraction, and Analysis, 12.6 Definition, 3.3.113
Analysis of Specimens, 12.6.5
O
Extraction of Specimens, 12.6.3 -V-
Preparation of Extract for Analysis, 12.6.4 Verification, Chap. 11
Procedures for Contamination of Specimens, 12.6.2 General, 11.1
Selection of Contaminants, 12.6.1
Smoke Evaluation of Hood Particulate-Blocking Layers, 12.2
Application, 12.2.1
Inspection and Testing, 11.3
S E
Organization or ISP Quality Management Program, 11.4
Verification Program, 11.2
U
Evaluation Apparatus, 12.2.3, A.12.2.3 Verified Cleaner
Approaches, 12.2.3.1 Definition, 3.3.114
L
Qualitative, 12.2.3.1.1 Verified Independent Service Provider (ISP)
Quantitative, 12.2.3.1.2 Definition, 3.3.115
Evaluation Areas, 12.2.2
Interpretation, 12.2.6
Procedure, 12.2.4
Results, 12.2.5
U A Verified Organization
Definition, 3.3.116
Visibility Markings
ID
Definition, 3.3.117
Water Penetration Barrier Evaluation, 12.3
Application, 12.3.1 -W-
Evaluation Apparatus, 12.3.3
Evaluation Areas, 12.3.2
I V Winter Liner
Definition, 3.3.118
D
Procedure, 12.3.4 Wristlet
Results, 12.3.5 Definition, 3.3.119
IN
O R
F
2020 Edition
Sequence of Events for the Standards Committee Membership

Development Process Classifications1,2,3,4
Once the current edition is published, a Standard is opened for The following classifications apply to Committee members
Public Input. and represent their principal interest in the activity of the
Committee.
Step 1 – Input Stage
• Input accepted from the public or other committees for 1. M Manufacturer: A representative of a maker or mar-
consideration to develop the First Draft keter of a product, assembly, or system, or portion
• Technical Committee holds First Draft Meeting to revise thereof, that is affected by the standard.
Standard (23 weeks); Technical Committee(s) with Cor- 2. U User: A representative of an entity that is subject to
relating Committee (10 weeks) the provisions of the standard or that voluntarily
• Technical Committee ballots on First Draft (12 weeks); uses the standard.
Technical Committee(s) with Correlating Committee 3. IM Installer/Maintainer: A representative of an entity that
(11 weeks) is in the business of installing or maintaining a prod-
• Correlating Committee First Draft Meeting (9 weeks)
• Correlating Committee ballots on First Draft (5 weeks)
• First Draft Report posted on the document information
uct, assembly, or system affected by the standard.
4. L Labor: A labor representative or employee concerned
with safety in the workplace.
L Y
page
Step 2 – Comment Stage
• Public Comments accepted on First Draft (10 weeks) fol-
lowing posting of First Draft Report
and/or enforces standards.
O N
5. RT Applied Research/Testing Laboratory: A representative
of an independent testing laboratory or indepen-
dent applied research organization that promulgates
6. E Enforcing Authority: A representative of an agency or

• If Standard does not receive Public Comments and the
Technical Committee chooses not to hold a Second Draft
meeting, the Standard becomes a Consent Standard and
is sent directly to the Standards Council for issuance (see
standards.
S E
an organization that promulgates and/or enforces
7. I Insurance: A representative of an insurance company,

Step 4) or
• Technical Committee holds Second Draft Meeting
(21 weeks); Technical Committee(s) with Correlating
U
broker, agent, bureau, or inspection agency.
8. C Consumer: A person who is or represents the ultimate
purchaser of a product, system, or service affected by
L
the standard, but who is not included in (2).
A
Committee (7 weeks) 9. SE Special Expert: A person not representing (1) through
• Technical Committee ballots on Second Draft (11 weeks); (8) and who has special expertise in the scope of the
U
Technical Committee(s) with Correlating Committee standard or portion thereof.
(10 weeks)
• Correlating Committee Second Draft Meeting (9 weeks)
• Correlating Committee ballots on Second Draft
(8 weeks)
I D NOTE 1: “Standard” connotes code, standard, recom-
mended practice, or guide.
I
• Second Draft Report posted on the document informa-
tion page
V NOTE 2: A representative includes an employee.
NOTE 3: While these classifications will be used by the
Step 3 – NFPA Technical Meeting
D Standards Council to achieve a balance for Technical Com-
mittees, the Standards Council may determine that new
IN
• Notice of Intent to Make a Motion (NITMAM) accepted classifications of member or unique interests need repre-
(5 weeks) following the posting of Second Draft Report sentation in order to foster the best possible Committee
• NITMAMs are reviewed and valid motions are certified deliberations on any project. In this connection, the Stan-
by the Motions Committee for presentation at the NFPA
R
dards Council may make such appointments as it deems
Technical Meeting appropriate in the public interest, such as the classification
• NFPA membership meets each June at the NFPA Techni- of “Utilities” in the National Electrical Code Committee.
F O
cal Meeting to act on Standards with “Certified Amend-
ing Motions” (certified NITMAMs)
• Committee(s) vote on any successful amendments to the
Technical Committee Reports made by the NFPA mem-
bership at the NFPA Technical Meeting
NOTE 4: Representatives of subsidiaries of any group are
generally considered to have the same classification as the
parent organization.
Step 4 – Council Appeals and Issuance of Standard

• Notification of intent to file an appeal to the Standards
Council on Technical Meeting action must be filed within
20 days of the NFPA Technical Meeting
• Standards Council decides, based on all evidence,
whether to issue the standard or to take other action
Notes:
1. Time periods are approximate; refer to published sched-
ules for actual dates.
2. Annual revision cycle documents with certified amend-
ing motions take approximately 101 weeks to complete.
3. Fall revision cycle documents receiving certified amend-
ing motions take approximately 141 weeks to complete.
6/16-A
Submitting Public Input / Public Comment Through the Online Submission System
Following publication of the current edition of an NFPA standard, the development of the next edition
begins and the standard is open for Public Input.
Submit a Public Input

NFPA accepts Public Input on documents through our online submission system at www.nfpa.org. To use
the online submission system:
• Choose a document from the List of NFPA codes & standards or filter by Development Stage for
“codes accepting public input.”
Y
• Once you are on the document page, select the “Next Edition” tab.
L
• Choose the link “The next edition of this standard is now open for Public Input.” You will be asked
to sign in or create a free online account with NFPA before using this system.
• Follow the online instructions to submit your Public Input (see www.nfpa.org/publicinput for de-
tailed instructions).
• Once a Public Input is saved or submitted in the system, it can be located on the “My Profile” page
O N
by selecting the “My Public Inputs/Comments/NITMAMs” section.
Submit a Public Comment

S E
U
Once the First Draft Report becomes available there is a Public Comment period. Any objections or fur-
ther related changes to the content of the First Draft must be submitted at the Comment Stage. To sub-
L
mit a Public Comment follow the same steps as previously explained for the submission of Public Input.
Other Resources Available on the Document Information Pages
U A
Header: View document title and scope, access to our codes and standards or NFCSS subscription, and
sign up to receive email alerts.
I D
I V
Research current and previous edition information.
D
Current & Prior
Editions
Next Edition
IN
Follow the committee’s progress in the processing of a standard in its next revision cycle.
O R Technical
Committee
View current committee rosters or apply to a committee.
For members, officials, and AHJs to submit standards questions to NFPA staff. Our Technical
F Ask a Technical
Question
News
Questions Service provides a convenient way to receive timely and consistent technical assistance
when you need to know more about NFPA standards relevant to your work.
Provides links to available articles and research and statistical reports related to our standards.
Purchase Products Discover and purchase the latest products and training.
& Training
Related Products View related publications, training, and other resources available for purchase.
4/19-B
Information on the NFPA Standards Development Process
I. Applicable Regulations. The primary rules governing the processing of NFPA standards (codes, standards,
recommended practices, and guides) are the NFPA Regulations Governing the Development of NFPA Standards (Regs). Other
applicable rules include NFPA Bylaws, NFPA Technical Meeting Convention Rules, NFPA Guide for the Conduct of Participants in
the NFPA Standards Development Process, and the NFPA Regulations Governing Petitions to the Board of Directors from Decisions of
the Standards Council. Most of these rules and regulations are contained in the NFPA Standards Directory. For copies of the
Directory, contact Codes and Standards Administration at NFPA headquarters; all these documents are also available on the
NFPA website at “www.nfpa.org/regs.”
The following is general information on the NFPA process. All participants, however, should refer to the actual rules and
regulations for a full understanding of this process and for the criteria that govern participation.
II. Technical Committee Report. The Technical Committee Report is defined as “the Report of the responsible
Committee(s), in accordance with the Regulations, in preparation of a new or revised NFPA Standard.” The Technical
Committee Report is in two parts and consists of the First Draft Report and the Second Draft Report. (See Regs at
Section 1.4.)
III. Step 1: First Draft Report. The First Draft Report is defined as “Part one of the Technical Committee Report, which
documents the Input Stage.” The First Draft Report consists of the First Draft, Public Input, Committee Input, Committee
and Correlating Committee Statements, Correlating Notes, and Ballot Statements. (See Regs at 4.2.5.2 and Section 4.3.)
L Y
Any objection to an action in the First Draft Report must be raised through the filing of an appropriate Comment for
consideration in the Second Draft Report or the objection will be considered resolved. [See Regs at 4.3.1(b).]
IV. Step 2: Second Draft Report. The Second Draft Report is defined as “Part two of the Technical Committee Report,
which documents the Comment Stage.” The Second Draft Report consists of the Second Draft, Public Comments with
O N
corresponding Committee Actions and Committee Statements, Correlating Notes and their respective Committee
Statements, Committee Comments, Correlating Revisions, and Ballot Statements. (See Regs at 4.2.5.2 and Section 4.4.)
S
The First Draft Report and the Second Draft Report together constitute the Technical Committee Report. Any outstanding
objection following the Second Draft Report must be raised through an appropriate Amending Motion at the NFPA
E
Technical Meeting or the objection will be considered resolved. [See Regs at 4.4.1(b).]
L U
V. Step 3a: Action at NFPA Technical Meeting. Following the publication of the Second Draft Report, there is a period
during which those wishing to make proper Amending Motions on the Technical Committee Reports must signal their
A
intention by submitting a Notice of Intent to Make a Motion (NITMAM). (See Regs at 4.5.2.) Standards that receive
notice of proper Amending Motions (Certified Amending Motions) will be presented for action at the annual June NFPA
U
Technical Meeting. At the meeting, the NFPA membership can consider and act on these Certified Amending Motions as
well as Follow-up Amending Motions, that is, motions that become necessary as a result of a previous successful Amending
I D
Motion. (See 4.5.3.2 through 4.5.3.6 and Table 1, Columns 1-3 of Regs for a summary of the available Amending Motions
and who may make them.) Any outstanding objection following action at an NFPA Technical Meeting (and any further
Technical Committee consideration following successful Amending Motions, see Regs at 4.5.3.7 through 4.6.5) must be
I V
raised through an appeal to the Standards Council or it will be considered to be resolved.
VI. Step 3b: Documents Forwarded Directly to the Council. Where no NITMAM is received and certified in accordance
D
with the Technical Meeting Convention Rules, the standard is forwarded directly to the Standards Council for action on
issuance. Objections are deemed to be resolved for these documents. (See Regs at 4.5.2.5.)
IN
VII. Step 4a: Council Appeals. Anyone can appeal to the Standards Council concerning procedural or substantive matters
related to the development, content, or issuance of any document of the NFPA or on matters within the purview of the
authority of the Council, as established by the Bylaws and as determined by the Board of Directors. Such appeals must be in
R
written form and filed with the Secretary of the Standards Council (see Regs at Section 1.6). Time constraints for filing an
appeal must be in accordance with 1.6.2 of the Regs. Objections are deemed to be resolved if not pursued at this level.
O
VIII. Step 4b: Document Issuance. The Standards Council is the issuer of all documents (see Article 8 of Bylaws). The
F Council acts on the issuance of a document presented for action at an NFPA Technical Meeting within 75 days from the
date of the recommendation from the NFPA Technical Meeting, unless this period is extended by the Council (see Regs at
4.7.2). For documents forwarded directly to the Standards Council, the Council acts on the issuance of the document at its
next scheduled meeting, or at such other meeting as the Council may determine (see Regs at 4.5.2.5 and 4.7.4).
IX. Petitions to the Board of Directors. The Standards Council has been delegated the responsibility for the
administration of the codes and standards development process and the issuance of documents. However, where
extraordinary circumstances requiring the intervention of the Board of Directors exist, the Board of Directors may take
any action necessary to fulfill its obligations to preserve the integrity of the codes and standards development process
and to protect the interests of the NFPA. The rules for petitioning the Board of Directors can be found in the Regulations
Governing Petitions to the Board of Directors from Decisions of the Standards Council and in Section 1.7 of the Regs.
X. For More Information. The program for the NFPA Technical Meeting (as well as the NFPA website as information
becomes available) should be consulted for the date on which each report scheduled for consideration at the meeting will
be presented. To view the First Draft Report and Second Draft Report as well as information on NFPA rules and for up-to-
date information on schedules and deadlines for processing NFPA documents, check the NFPA website (www.nfpa.org/
docinfo) or contact NFPA Codes & Standards Administration at (617) 984-7246.
4/19-C
The Online Community of the

National Fire Protection Association®
L Y
CONNECT WITH YOUR PEERS FROM
O N
AROUND THE WORLD
S E
L U
NFPA® Xchange™ is an online forum for finding and sharing
knowledge among an open community of professionals worldwide.
This educational tool and job aid allows you to explore content
A
relevant to you, participate in discussions with peers and industry
leaders, ask and answer questions, and receive expert advice.
U
• An active community of more than 50,000
I D Membership to NFPA Xchange is free and provides access to:
I V professionals collaborating in a single place
D • Insights and information on trending topics, emerging

issues, and new technologies
IN • Blogs and webinars for learning on-the-job skills, and

forums for submitting queries to be answered by peers
O R and NFPA® technical staff
• Job board for posting open positions and discovering
F employment opportunities from NFPA and partner

organizations
• A robust collection of previously asked questions

and subject matter in a searchable database accessible
anywhere, anytime, from any device
Have the resources you need by your side at all times. NFPA Xchange
provides the knowledge and support to help you do your job better
and help protect lives and property. Join the conversation today!
Join now for free at nfpa.org/xchange-community

Nfpa 1851

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nfpa 1851

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nfpa 1851

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Copyright 2019 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA®).

IMPORTANT NOTICES AND DISCLAIMERS CONCERNING NFPA® STANDARDS

F ALERT: THIS STANDARD HAS BEEN MODIFIED BY A TIA OR ERRATA

ISBN: 978-145592354-0 (PDF)

Updating of NFPA Standards

Copyright © 2019 National Fire Protection Association®. All Rights Reserved.

Selection, Care, and Maintenance of Protective Ensembles for Structural

COMMITTEE PERSONNEL 1851-3

Louis Carpentier, Innotex Inc., Canada [M]

(Alt. to Jason L. Allen)

F Robert J. Athanas, FDNY/SAFE-IR, Incorporated, NY [U]

Chris Farrell, NFPA Staff Liaison

NOTE: Membership on a committee shall not in and of itself constitute an endorsement of

COMMITTEE PERSONNEL 1851-5

Marni L. Schmid, Secretary (Alternate)

F (Alt. to Patrick J. Woods)

Chris Farrell, NFPA Staff Liaison

NOTE: Membership on a committee shall not in and of itself constitute an endorsement of

Chapter 1 Administration ......................................... 1851– 8 8.4 Additional Requirements for Advanced

Chapter 10 Retirement, Disposition, and Special

Chapter 12 Test Procedures .......................................

Cleaning and Decontamination ..............

Informational References .......................

8.3 Additional Requirements for Basic Garment

V I exceeding these minimum requirements.

Chapter 2 Referenced Publications

2.1 General. The documents or portions thereof listed in this

Δ 2.2 NFPA Publications. National Fire Protection Association,

F Clothing for Hazardous Materials Emergencies, 2018 edition.

“standards development process” or “standards development

cleaning, advanced inspection and sanitization, basic repair,

3.3.112* Universal Precautions. An approach to infection

3.3.96* Structural Fire Fighting Protective Ensemble. Multi‐

3.3.98 Structural Fire Fighting Protective Footwear. The

the head. Chapter 4 Program

4.2 Program Organization for Structural Fire Fighting Ensem‐

I D management requirements of Chapter 11 and shall be verified

Δ Table 4.2.2 Required Program Parts for Structural and

Manufacturer Verified ISP or Manufacturer- Ensemble or

N 4.2.4.5.2* Training shall be consistent with the requirements

F documentation that the organization has received the required

V I ate fire fighting protective ensembles.

6.3 Advanced Inspection. (12) Liner attachment systems

O R (c) Thermal damage (charring, burn holes, melting,

V ID 6.3.7.2 Complete liner inspection of all garment elements

CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION 1851-21

CBRN Yes Condemn, retire, and

CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION 1851-23

Contamination Apply appropriate

Asbestos/ Apply preliminary Determine

CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION 1851-25

with good ventilation. N

(2)* A drying cabinet, as follows:

V I N 7.3.10.2* When machine drying is used, the following proce‐

The individual washing the gloves shall observe universal

V I and refill the utility sink with clean water.

7.3.12.1* Detachable or separate components, such as ear

CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION 1851-27

F Δ 8.2.3.4 Where moisture barrier tears, holes, or abrasions are